DELTA IA-CNC Milling Application OM MM en 20210630

Delta CNC Milling Machine Solution Operation and Maintenance Manual
Industrial Automation Headquarters

Taiwan: Delta Electronics, Inc.
Taoyuan Technology Center
No.18, Xinglong Rd., Taoyuan District,
Taoyuan City 33068, Taiwan
TEL: +886 - 3 - 362- 6301 / FAX: +886 -3 -371- 6301
Asia EMEA
China: Delta Electronics (Shanghai) Co., Ltd. EMEA Headquarters: Delta Electronics (Netherlands) B.V.
No.182 Minyu Rd., Pudong Shanghai, P.R.C. Sales: [email protected]
Post code : 201209 Marketing: [email protected]
TEL: +86 -21- 6872-3988 / FAX: +86 -21- 6872-3996 Technical Support: [email protected]
Customer Service: 400 - 820 - 9595 Customer Support: Customer- [email protected]
Service: [email protected]
Japan: Delta Electronics (Japan), Inc. TEL: +31(0) 40 800 3900
Industrial Automation Sales Department
2-1-14 Shibadaimon, Minato - ku BENELUX: Delta Electronics (Netherlands) B.V.
Tokyo, Japan 105 - 0012 Automotive Campus 260, 5708 JZ Helmond, The Netherlands
TEL: +81- 3 - 5733 -1155 / FAX: +81-3 - 5733 -1255 Mail: [email protected]
TEL: +31(0) 40 800 3900
Korea: Delta Electronics (Korea), Inc. DACH: Delta Electronics (Netherlands) B.V.
1511, 219, Gasan Digital 1- Ro., Geumcheon - gu,
Coesterweg 45, D - 59494 Soest, Germany
Seoul, 08501 South Korea
Mail: [email protected]
TEL: +82-2- 515 - 5305 / FAX: +82-2- 515 - 5302
TEL: +49(0)2921 987 0
Singapore: Delta Energy Systems (Singapore) Pte Ltd. France: Delta Electronics (France) S.A.
4 Kaki Bukit Avenue 1, #05 - 04, Singapore 417939 ZI du bois Challand 2, 15 rue des Pyrénées,
TEL: +65 - 6747- 5155 / FAX: +65 - 6744 - 9228 Lisses, 91090 Evry Cedex, France
Delta CNC Milling Machine

India: Delta Electronics (India) Pvt. Ltd. TEL: +33(0)1 69 77 82 60
Plot No.43, Sector 35, HSIIDC Gurgaon,
PIN 122001, Haryana, India Iberia: Delta Electronics Solutions (Spain) S.L.U
Solution
TEL: +91-124 - 4874900 / FAX: +91-124 - 4874945 Ctra. De Villaverde a Vallecas, 265 1º Dcha Ed.
Hormigueras – P.I. de Vallecas 28031 Madrid
Thailand: Delta Electronics (Thailand) PCL. TEL: +34(0)91 223 74 20
909 Soi 9, Moo 4, Bangpoo Industrial Estate (E.P.Z),
Operation and
Carrer Llacuna 166, 08018 Barcelona, Spain
Pattana 1 Rd., T.Phraksa, A.Muang, Mail: [email protected]
Samutprakarn 10280, Thailand
TEL: +66 -2709 -2800 / FAX: +66 -2709 -2827 Italy: Delta Electronics (Italy) S.r.l.
Maintenance Manual
Via Meda 2–22060 Novedrate(CO)
Australia: Delta Electronics (Australia) Pty Ltd. Piazza Grazioli 18 00186 Roma Italy
Unit 20 -21/45 Normanby Rd., Notting Hill Vic 3168, Australia Mail: [email protected]
TEL: +61-3 - 9543 -3720 TEL: +39 039 8900365
Russia: Delta Energy System LLC

Americas Vereyskaya Plaza II, office 112 Vereyskaya str.
17 121357 Moscow Russia
USA: Delta Electronics (Americas) Ltd.
5101 Davis Drive, Research Triangle Park, NC 27709, U.S.A.
TEL: +7 495 644 3240
TEL: +1- 919 -767-3813 / FAX: +1- 919 -767-3969
Turkey: Delta Greentech Elektronik San. Ltd. Sti. (Turkey)
Brazil: Delta Electronics Brazil Şerifali Mah. Hendem Cad. Kule Sok. No:16 - A
Rua Itapeva, 26 - 3°, andar Edificio Itapeva, 34775 Ümraniye – İstanbul
One - Bela Vista 01332- 000 - São Paulo - SP - Brazil Mail: [email protected]
TEL: +55 -12-3932-2300 / FAX: +55 -12-3932-237 TEL: + 90 216 499 9910
Mexico: Delta Electronics International Mexico S.A. de C.V. MEA: Eltek Dubai (Eltek MEA DMCC)
Gustavo Baz No. 309 Edificio E PB 103 OFFICE 2504, 25th Floor, Saba Tower 1,
Colonia La Loma, CP 54060 Jumeirah Lakes Towers, Dubai, UAE
Tlalnepantla, Estado de México Mail: [email protected]
TEL: +52- 55 -3603 - 9200 TEL: +971(0) 4 2690148
DELTA_IA-CNC_Milling application_OM_MM_EN_20210630 www.deltaww.com

Preface
Thank you for using this product. Please read this manual carefully before use to ensure proper
usage, and keep this manual at an obvious location to read at any time.
This manual includes:

 Installation and inspection of NC controllers
 Wiring for connectors of the NC controllers
 Description of the function and operation of NC controllers
 Description of parameters
 Troubleshooting
NC controller product features:

 Built-in 32-bit high-speed dual CPU for multi-task execution, improving operating
performance
 User-friendly human machine interface
 Interfaces for auto tuning and gain adjustment of the servo, meeting different
machine characteristics
 CNCSoft-B software for configuring user-defined screens
 Front USB interface (port) for easy data access, data backup, and parameter file
copying
 In Spindle mode, you can control the spindle system with DMCNET communication
or analog voltage according to the requirements
 Serial I/O modules for flexible I/O configuration
How to use this manual:

Use this manual as a reference when installing, setting up, operating, and maintaining the
NC controller. Read this manual before using and setting this product.
Delta technical services:

Consult your equipment distributors or Delta Customer Service Center if you encounter
any problem.
i
Safety Precautions
 Refer to the pin assignment when wiring. Ensure the product is properly grounded.
 Do not disassemble the controller, change the wiring, or touch the power supply
when the power is on to avoid electric shock.
Pay special attention to the following safety precautions at all times during installation, wiring,
operation, maintenance, and examination of the controller.
The symbols of “DANGER”, “WARNING” and “STOP” indicate:
Danger. May cause severe or fatal injuries to personnel if the instructions are not
followed.
Warning. May cause moderate injury to personnel, or lead to severe damage or

even malfunction of the product if the instructions are not followed.
Absolute prohibited activities. May cause serious damage or even malfunction of

the product if the instructions are not followed.
Precautions for installation
 Follow the installation instructions in the manual, or it may result in damage to

the equipment.
 Do not expose the product to an environment containing vapor, corrosive gas,
inflammable gas, or other foreign matter to reduce the risk of electric shock or
fire.
Precautions for wiring
 Connect the ground terminal to class-3 (below 100 Ω) ground system. Improper
grounding may result in electric shock or fire.
Precautions for operation
 Correctly plan the I/O configuration with the MLC editor software, or abnormal
operation may occur.
 Before operating the machine, properly adjust the parameter settings, otherwise
it may cause abnormal operation or malfunction.
 Ensure you can activate the emergency stop at any time, and avoid operating
the machine in unprotected condition.
 Do not change the wiring when the power is on, or it may lead to personal injury
caused by electric shock.
 Do not use a sharp-pointed object to touch the panel. Doing this may dent the
screen and lead to malfunction of the controller.
ii
Maintenance and Inspection
 When the power is on, do not disassemble the controller panel or touch the
internal parts of the controller, or it may cause electric shock.
 Do not touch the wiring terminal within 10 minutes after turning off the power
since the residual voltage may cause electric shock.
 Turn off the power before replacing the battery, and check the system settings
after the replacement.
 Do not block the ventilation holes when operating the controller since poor
Wiring method
 Power supply: use a 24 VDC power supply for the controller and comply with the
wire specification when wiring to avoid danger.
 Wire selection: Use stranded wires and multi-core shielded-pair wires for signal
cables.
 Cable length: the maximum cable length of the signal cable for remote I/O and
DMCNET communication is 20 m and the maximum cable length of other signal
cables is 10 m.
 The local I/O and remote I/O require an additional 24 VDC power for signal input
and output.
Wiring of Communication Circuit
 DMCNET wiring: the wiring materials should comply with the standard
specification.
 Make sure the controller and servo drive are firmly connected, or loose cables
may cause abnormal operation.
Note: The content of this manual may be revised without prior notice. Download the latest version from Delta’s website
at https://www.deltaww.com/.
iii
(This page is intentionally left blank.)
iv
Table of Content
Before use
1
Product Inspection and Model Explanation
1.1 Product inspection ···························································································1-2
1.2 A series product model explanation ·····································································1-3
1.3 Product interface A series NC controller································································1-4
1.4 B series product model explanation ··································································· 1-11
1.5 Product interface A series NC controller······························································1-12
2 Installation
2.1 A series product installation explanation ·······························································2-2
2.1.1 Ambient storage conditions··········································································2-2
2.1.2 Ambient installation conditions ·····································································2-2
2.1.3 Mounting direction and space ·······································································2-3
2.1.4 Hardware specifications ··············································································2-4
2.1.5 Outline and mounting dimensions ·································································2-6
2.1.6 Operating interface installation (for OPENCNC models) ·····································2-8
2.2 B series product installation explanation ·····························································2-10
2.2.1 Ambient storage conditions········································································2-10
2.2.2 Ambient installation conditions ···································································2-10
2.2.3 Mounting direction and space ····································································· 2-11
2.2.4 Hardware specifications ············································································2-12
2.2.5 Outline and mounting dimensions ·······························································2-13
2.2.6 Operating interface installation (for OPENCNC models) ···································2-16
3 Wiring
3.1 A series product ······························································································3-3
3.1.1 A series system interface ············································································3-3
3.1.2 A series controller connectors ····································································3-10
3.1.2.1 NC3 series connectors ·······································································3-10
3.1.2.2 NC2 series connectors ·······································································3-13
3.1.2.3 OPENCNC series connectors ······························································3-16
3.1.3 Wiring for power connector ········································································3-18
3.1.4 Wiring for RS-485 connector ······································································3-19
3.1.5 Wiring for Axis 1 - 4 input connector ····························································3-21
3.1.6 Wiring for spindle feedback input connector ··················································3-24
3.1.7 Wiring for spindle analog output connector ····················································3-26
3.1.8 Wiring for HSI connector ···········································································3-29
3.1.9 Wiring for emergency stop ·········································································3-32
3.1.10 Wiring for MPG connector········································································3-34
3.1.11 Wiring for remote I/O connector ································································3-39
3.1.11.1 NC-EIO-R2010 ················································································3-43
3.1.11.2 NC-EIO-R3216 ················································································3-46
3.1.11.3 NC-EIO-R3232 ················································································3-49
3.1.11.4 NC-EIO-T3232 ················································································3-52
3.1.12 Wiring for local I/O connector ···································································3-55
3.1.13 Wiring for I/O connector on machine operation panel B of
NC300 / NC310 series models ··································································3-57
3.1.14 Wiring for I/O connector on machine operation panel B of NC311 series models ··3-60
3.2 B series product ····························································································3-63
3.2.1 B series system interface ··········································································3-63
3.2.2 B series controller connectors ····································································3-73
3.2.2.1 NC3□□B series connectors ·······························································3-73
3.2.2.2 NC200B series connectors ··································································3-76
3.2.2.3 OPENCNC series connectors ······························································3-78
3.2.3 Wiring for power connector ········································································3-80
3.2.4 Wiring for spindle pulse output connector ·····················································3-81
3.2.5 Wiring for RS-485 connector ······································································3-84
3.2.6 Wiring for spindle analog feedback connector ················································3-86
3.2.7 Wiring for spindle analog output connector ····················································3-88
3.2.8 Wiring for HSI connector ···········································································3-91
3.2.9 Wiring for emergency stop ·········································································3-93
3.2.10 Wiring for MPG connector········································································3-94
3.2.11 Wiring for remote I/O connector ································································3-98
3.2.11.1 NC-EIO-R2010 ·············································································· 3-102
3.2.11.2 NC-EIO-R3216 ·············································································· 3-105
3.2.11.3 NC-EIO-R3232 ·············································································· 3-108
3.2.11.4 NC-EIO-T3232 ···············································································3-111
3.2.12 Wiring for local I/O connector ··································································3-114
3.2.13 Wiring for I/O connector on machine operation panel B of
NC3□□ series models ·········································································3-119
How to operate and set
4 Table of Group Function

4.1 System group function table ···············································································4-2
4.2 Machine operation panel A - function of keys ······················································· 4-11
4.3 Machine operation panel B - function of keys ·······················································4-13
4.4 Table of corresponding buttons (for OPENCNC models) ········································4-15
5 Introduction to NC System Modes

5.1 Auto mode (AUTO) ··························································································5-2
5.2 Program edit mode (EDIT)·················································································5-2
5.3 Manual input mode (MDI) ··················································································5-2
5.4 MPG mode (MPG) ···························································································5-2
5.5 Jog mode (JOG) ·····························································································5-3
5.6 Rapid mode (RAPID)························································································5-3
5.7 Homing mode (HOME) ·····················································································5-3
5.8 Group screen overview ·····················································································5-4
6 Position (POS) Group

6.1 Absolute coordinates ························································································6-3
6.2 Relative coordinates·························································································6-3
6.3 Machine coordinates ························································································6-3
7 Program (PRG) Group

7.1 Ethernet setting ·······························································································7-3
7.2 Create a new file (NEW F) ·················································································7-8
7.3 Copy files (COPY F) ·························································································7-9
7.4 Paste files (PASTE) ·························································································7-9
7.5 Delete files and directories (DEL) ········································································7-9
7.6 Select / cancel selection of multiple files (ALL SEL TOGL / CANCEL) ·······················7-10
7.7 Rename files (RENAME) ·················································································7-12
7.8 Create directories (FOLDER) ···········································································7-13
7.9 Search for files (FIND F) ·················································································7-14
7.10 File merging (MERGE) ··················································································7-14
7.11 Sequencing (SORT) ·····················································································7-15
7.12 Convert DXF files (Transform) ········································································7-16
7.13 Macro files (MACRO)····················································································7-17
7.14 Save macros in the bottom layer (INT MRO) ······················································7-17
7.15 File editing (File edit) ····················································································7-17
7.15.1 Line search (LABLE) ··············································································7-19
7.15.2 String search (STRING) ··········································································7-19
7.15.3 Edit a section of program (B START / B END) ··············································7-21
7.15.4 Delete lines and sections (DEL) ································································7-22
7.15.5 Copy lines and sections and paste (COPY and PASTE) ·································7-22
7.15.6 Undo (UNDO) ·······················································································7-22
7.16 Program function in other modes ·····································································7-23
8 Offset (OFS) Group

8.1 Coordinate setting (COORD) ·············································································8-2
8.1.1 Auto set (AUTO) ·······················································································8-3
8.1.2 Absolute input (ABS) ··················································································8-7
8.1.3 Incremental input (INC) ···············································································8-9
8.1.4 Center of rectangle (SQUARE) ···································································8-10
8.1.5 Center of circle (CIRCLE) ··········································································8-12
8.2 Tool setting (CUTTER)····················································································8-14
8.2.1 Milling machine system ·············································································8-14
8.3 Tool magazine management (MAGA) ································································8-17
8.3.1 Multi-magazine management ·····································································8-22
8.4 Macro variables (MACRO) ···············································································8-23
8.4.1 Local variables (LOCAL) ···········································································8-23
8.4.2 Global variables (GLOBAL) ·······································································8-24
8.4.3 Non-volatile variables (HOLD) ····································································8-24
8.4.4 Extension variables (EXTEND) ···································································8-24
9 Diagnosis (DGN) Group

9.1 Machining information (PROCESS) ·····································································9-2
9.2 User variable (USR VAR) ··················································································9-4
9.3 MLC ·············································································································9-5
9.3.1 Bit (BIT)···································································································9-5
9.3.2 Register (REG) ·························································································9-7
9.3.3 Device monitoring (DEV MON) ·····································································9-8
9.3.4 Line search (JUMP TO) ············································································9-10
9.3.5 Editor (EDITOR) ······················································································9-10
9.3.6 Operation (SET) ······················································································9-13
9.4 System monitoring (SYS MON) ········································································9-14
9.4.1 Servo monitoring (SRV MON) ····································································9-14
9.4.2 I/O monitoring (I/O MON) ··········································································9-14
9.4.3 Variable monitoring (VAR MON)··································································9-15
9.5 Password setting (PWD) ·················································································9-17
9.5.1 System security (S SCP) ···········································································9-17
9.5.2 Machine security (M SCP) ·········································································9-18
9.5.3 User security (User SCP) ··········································································9-21
9.5.4 Expiration time (EXPIRE) ··········································································9-22
9.6 System information (STATUS) ··········································································9-25
9.7 Gain tuning (TUNING) ····················································································9-26
9.8 Import (IMPORT) ···························································································9-29
9.9 Export (EXPORT) ··························································································9-31
9.10 Multi-language (TEXT WR) ············································································9-33
9.11 LOGO (LOGO WR) ······················································································9-33
10 Alarm (ALM) Group

10.1 Alarm (ALARM) ···························································································10-2
10.2 Alarm history (HISTORY)···············································································10-3
11 Graph (GRA) Group

11.1 Trajectory display ························································································· 11-3
11.2 Program simulation ······················································································ 11-4
Parameter Settings
12 Parameter (PAR) Group

12.1 Machining parameter (PROCESS) ··································································12-4
12.1.1 Machining parameter descriptions ·····························································12-4
12.2 Operating parameter (OPERATE)····································································12-7
12.2.1 Operating parameter descriptions ······························································12-7
12.3 Tool magazine parameter (MAGA) ································································· 12-22
12.3.1 Tool magazine parameter descriptions ····················································· 12-22
12.4 Spindle parameter (SPINDLE) ······································································ 12-24
12.4.1 Spindle parameter descriptions ······························································· 12-24
12.5 Machine parameter (MACHINE) ···································································· 12-30
12.5.1 Machine parameter descriptions ····························································· 12-30
12.6 Homimg parameter (HOME) ········································································· 12-32
12.6.1 Homing parameter descriptions ······························································ 12-32
12.7 Ethernet setting (ETH.) ··············································································· 12-38
12.7.1 Ethernet parameter descriptions ································································ 12-38
12.8 Compensation parameter (COMP) ··································································· 12-40
12.8.1 Compensation parameter descriptions ····················································· 12-41
12.9 System parameter (SYSTEM) ······································································ 12-44
12.9.1 System parameter descriptions ······························································· 12-44
12.10 MLC setting (MLC) ··················································································· 12-52
12.10.1 MLC parameter descriptions ································································· 12-52
12.11 Graph parameter (GRAPHIC) ····································································· 12-56
12.11.1 Graph parameter descriptions ······························································· 12-56
12.12 Servo parameter (SERVO) ········································································· 12-58
12.12.1 Servo parameter descriptions ······························································· 12-58
12.13 Channel setting (CONFIG) ········································································· 12-61
12.14 RIO setting ····························································································· 12-62
12.14.1 Details of RIO setting ·········································································· 12-63
12.14.2 Setting DA module (NC-EIO-DAC04) ······················································ 12-65
12.15 Search (SEARCH)···················································································· 12-66
12.16 Parameter group (PARAM GRP) ································································· 12-66
12.17 Other settings ·························································································· 12-68
12.17.1 Setting for absolute motor ···································································· 12-68
12.17.2 Setting synchronous motion control ························································ 12-70
12.17.3 Command transfer ············································································· 12-73
Customization function
13 Software (SOFT) Group

13.1 ScreenEditor software···················································································13-2
How to check controlled devices
14 MLC Special M Relay and Special D Register

14.1 MLC special M and D definitions ·····································································14-2
14.2 Special M summary table ··············································································14-3
14.3 Special D summary table ············································································· 14-27
How to troubleshoot
15 Troubleshooting
15.1 Alarm description ·························································································15-2
15.2 MLC errors (1200 - 13FF) ··············································································15-3
15.3 Servo errors (1E00) ······················································································15-5
15.4 Remote I/O error (1F00) ················································································15-5
15.5 HMI related alarms (3010 - 3FFF)····································································15-6
15.6 NC system errors (4200 - 4FFF) ·····································································15-8
15.7 NC channel errors (B000 - EFFF) ·································································· 15-10
15.7.1 Machining related alarms (B000 - B0FF) ··················································· 15-10
15.7.2 Tool compensation related alarms (B100 - B1FF)········································ 15-12
15.7.3 Milling machine related alarms (B300 - B3FF) ············································ 15-13
15.7.4 Command related alarms (B600 - B6FF; B64x not included) ························· 15-14
15.7.5 Temperature compensation related alarms (B640 - B64F) ···························· 15-16
15.7.6 Lathe cycle command alarms (B6A1 - B6A5) ············································· 15-16
Product Inspection and
Model Explanation
This chapter provides explanations for the A and B series product models, and the
introductions to the product interface of the NC controllers.
1.1 Product inspection ·············································································1-2

1.2 A series product model explanation ·······················································1-3
1.3 Product interface A series NC controller ·················································1-4
1.4 B series product model explanation ····················································· 1-11
1.5 Product interface A series NC controller ··············································· 1-12
1-1
Product Inspection and Model Explanation Milling Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual
1.1 Product inspection

In case of packaging mistakes or damages during shipping, check the items listed in the
following table carefully. If any issue occurs, contact the distributor for service.
1 Item
Purchased product
Content
Check the model number on the nameplate of the controller. Refer to
Sections 1.2 and 1.4 for the model explanation.
Buttons Press the buttons to check if the operation is smooth*.
Visually check if there are any damages on the exterior of the
Appearance
product.
Connectors Check if there are any loose or untightened connectors.
Note: this is applicable to all models except for the OPENCNC models.
1-2
Milling Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Product Inspection and Model Explanation
1.2 A series product model explanation

 Nameplate information
Model name
1
Input power
Barcode and
serial number
 Model explanation
NC series controller (MOP integrated)
NC3 0 0 A – M I – A E
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
No. Item Description

NC2: 2 series controller
(1) Series name
0: 8” screen
(2) Display
1: 10” screen
0: horizontal
(3) Screen orientation
1: vertical
A: A series
(4) Series type
AH: multi-axis A series
M: milling
(5) Model
L: lathe
I: integrated (machine operation panels integrated)
(6) Type P: separated type (machine operation panels not included)
S: separated type (machine operation panel A included)
(7) Version A: standard
Blank: Traditional Chinese
(8) Language S: Simplified Chinese
E: English
OPENCNC series controller
NC30 E
(1) (2)
(1) Series name NC30: 3 series controller
E: embedded A series
(2) Series type
EH: embedded multi-axis A series
1-3
1.3 Product interface of A series NC controller

NC300A(H)-MI-A_
1 (1) (2)
(6)
(7)
(8) (3)
(9)
(10) (4)
(5)
No. Item No. Item

(1) Screen (6) USB port
(2) Machine operation panel A (7) Function keys
(3) CYCLE START (8) Power On
(4) FEED HOLD (9) Emergency stop
(5) Machine operation panel B (10) Power Off
1-4
NC300A-MS-A_
(1) (2)
1
(3)
(4)
No. Item
(1) Screen
(2) Machine operation panel A
(3) USB port
(4) Function keys
1-5
NC301A-MS-A_
1
(3) (1)
( 4)
(2)
No. Item
(1) Screen
(3) USB port
(4) Function keys
1-6
NC311A-MS-A_
1
(3) (1)
( 4)
(2)
No. Item
(1) Screen
(3) USB port
(4) Function keys
1-7
NC310A-MS-A_
(1) (2)
1
(3)
(4)
No. Item
(1) Screen
(3) USB port
(4) Function keys
1-8
NC200A-MI-A_
(1) (2)
1
(6)
(7)
(8) (3)
(9)
(10) (4)
( 5)
No. Item No. Item
1-9
NC30E(H)
PWR
RDY
1
SON
RIO
(1)
ETH
ALM
(7)
(2)
(8)
(3)
(9)
(10) (4)
(11)
(5)
(12)
(6)
(13)
No. Item No. Item

(1) Indicators (8) Reserved
USB port
(2) High-speed serial I/O terminal (9) (Used to connect mouse,
keyboard, or flash drive)
VGA
(3) High-speed G31 terminal (10)
(Used to connect the screen)
(4) MPG connector (11) Ethernet terminal
(5) Spindle terminal (12) DMCNET terminal
(6) 24 VDC controller power (13) Engineering knob
(7) CF slot - -
1-10
1.4 B series product model explanation

 Nameplate information
Model name
1
Input power
Barcode and
serial number
 Model explanation
NC series controller (MOP integrated)
NC3 0 0 B – M I – A E
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

(1) Series name
0: 8” screen
(2) Display
1: 10” screen
0: horizontal
(3) Screen orientation
1: vertical
B: B series
(4) Series type
BH: multi-axis B series
M: milling
(5) Model
L: lathe
I: integrated (machine operation panels integrated)
(6) Type P: separated type (machine operation panels not included)
S: separated type (machine operation panel A included)
(7) Version A: standard
Blank: Traditional Chinese
(8) Language S: Simplified Chinese
E: English
OPENCNC series controller
NC30 EB
(1) (2)

(1) Series name NC30: 3 series controller
EB: embedded B series
(2) Series type
EBH: embedded multi-axis B series
1-11
1.5 Product interface of B series NC controller

NC300B(H)-MI-A_
1 (1) (2)
(6)
(7)
(8) (3)
(9)
(10) (4)
( 5)
No. Item No. Item
1-12
NC300B-MS-A_
(1) (2)
1
(3)
(4)
No. Item
(1) Screen
(3) USB port
(4) Function keys
1-13
NC301B-MS-A_
1 (3) (1)
( 4)
(2)
No. Item
(1) Screen
(3) USB port
(4) Function keys
1-14
NC311B-MS-A_
1
(3) (1)
( 4)
(2)
No. Item
(1) Screen
(3) USB port
(4) Function keys
1-15
NC310B-MS-A_
(1) (2)
1
(3)
(4)
No. Item
(1) Screen
(3) USB port
(4) Function keys
1-16
NC200B-MI-A_
(1) (2)
1
(6)
(7)
(8) (3)
(9)
(10) (4)
(5 )
No. Item No. Item

1-17
NC30EB(H)
(12) (13) (14)
1 (6)
(7)
(1)
(8)
(2)
(9)
(3)
(10)
(4)
(5) (11)
No. Item No. Item

(1) CF slot (8) MPG connector
USB port
(2) (Used to connect mouse, (9) Spindle terminal
keyboard, or flash drive)
VGA
(3) (10) CN1 terminal
(Used to connect the screen)
(4) Ethernet terminal (11) 24 VDC controller power
(5) DMCNET terminal (12) Keypad I/O terminal
(6) Indicators (13) I/O 1 terminal
(7) Remote I/O terminal (14) I/O 2 terminal
1-18
Installation
This chapter provides descriptions of the outline dimensions and hardware
specifications of the product. Before installing the product, refer to the items detailed in
this chapter, such as voltage, current, temperature, or other conditions. Otherwise, it
may result in personal injuries or equipment damages.
2.1 A series product installation explanation ·················································2-2

2.1.1 Ambient storage conditions ·························································2-2
2.1.2 Ambient installation conditions ·····················································2-2
2.1.3 Mounting direction and space ······················································2-3
2.1.4 Hardware specifications ······························································2-4
2.1.5 Outline and mounting dimensions ·················································2-6
2.1.6 Operating interface installation (for OPENCNC models) ·····················2-8
2.2 B series product installation explanation ··············································· 2-10
2.2.1 Ambient storage conditions ······················································· 2-10
2.2.2 Ambient installation conditions ··················································· 2-10
2.2.3 Mounting direction and space ···················································· 2-11
2.2.4 Hardware specifications ···························································· 2-12
2.2.5 Outline and mounting dimensions ··············································· 2-13
2.2.6 Operating interface installation (for OPENCNC models) ··················· 2-16
2-1
Installation Milling Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual
2.1 A series product installation explanation

2.1.1 Ambient storage conditions
2
This product must be kept in the shipping carton before installation. To retain the warranty
coverage and ensure future maintenance, follow these instructions for storage. While the product
is temporarily not in use:
 Store the product in a dust-free and dry location.
 Store the product in an ambient temperature range of -20°C to +60°C (-4°F to +140°F).
 Store the product in a relative humidity range of 10% to 95% RH (non-condensing).
 Avoid storing the product in an environment containing corrosive gas and liquids.
 The environment should be free of devices that generate excessive heat; no water, vapor,
dust, and oily dust; no corrosive and inflammable gas or liquids; no airborne dust or metal
particles; the environment should be solid without vibration and interference of
electromagnetic noise.
2.1.2 Ambient installation conditions
Operating temperature for the NC series controller: 0°C - 55°C (32°F - 131°F). During long-term
operation, the suggested temperature of the operating environment should be below 45°C
(113°F). If the temperature is above 45°C, place the product in a distribution board which is
well-ventilated and without overheating risks. Also check if the vibration of the machine affects
the electrical devices in the distribution board.
In addition, follow these precautions when choosing the installation site to retain the warranty
coverage and ensure future maintenance for the Delta NC controller.
 The temperature and humidity of the installation site for the NC controller should be within
the range specified in the specification.
 The vibration at the location where you store the NC controller must not exceed the range
specified in the specification.
2-2
Milling Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Installation
2.1.3 Mounting direction and space
Important:

The NC controller must be installed vertically on a dry and solid platform which complies
with the requirement of NEMA.
For better ventilation and cooling, allow sufficient clearance space between the NC
2
controller and the adjacent objects and the wall (the clearance is suggested to be 50 mm
(around 2 inches)), or it may cause malfunction of the machine.
 Do not block the ventilation holes of the NC controller, or it may cause malfunction of the
machine.
2-3
2.1.4 Hardware specifications
NC3A series milling machine controller
2
Model NC300A-MI-A NC300A-MS-A NC301A-MS-A NC311A-MS-A NC310A-MS-A
Operating
10% to 95% RH [0°C to +55°C (32°F to 131°F)]
environment
Storage
10% to 95% RH [-20°C to +60°C (-4°F to +140°F)]
environment
Cooling
Natural cooling
method
Voltage DC +24V (-10% to +15%) (built-in isolated circuit)
Dielectric
withstanding Between 24 VDC and FG terminals: AC500V for 1 minute
voltage
Power
15 W (24V; 0.6 A)
consumption
3V lithium battery (CR2032) × 1
Battery Varies according to the ambient temperature and operating conditions;
approximately 3 years in room temperature of 25°C (77°F)
Dimensions
W x H x D 400 x 309 x 123 400 x 200 x 97 260 x 260 x 313 290 x 335 x 95 435 x 221 x 95
(mm)
Weight (kg) 4.1 3.1 3.3 3.8 3.8
NC200 A series milling machine controller

Model NC200A-MI-A
Operating
10% to 95% RH [0°C to +55°C (32°F to 131°F)]
environment
Storage
10% - 95% RH [-20°C to +60°C (-4°F to +140°F)]
environment
Cooling
Natural cooling
method
Dielectric
voltage
Power
15 W (24V; 0.6 A)
consumption
Dimensions
WxHxD 400 x 320 x 91
(mm)
Weight (kg) 4.5
2-4
A series OPENCNC controller
Model NC30E(H)
2
Operating
10% to 95% RH [0°C to +55°C (32°F to 131°F)]
environment
Storage
10% to 95% RH [-20°C to +60°C (-4°F to +140°F)]
environment
Cooling
Natural cooling
method
Dielectric
voltage
Power
15 W (24V; 0.6 A)
consumption
Dimensions
WxHxD 60 x 196 x 164
(mm)
Weight (kg) 0.8
2-5
2.1.5 Outline and mounting dimensions
Appearance and dimension tables of NC3 / NC200 A series
2 NC3A-MI-A / NC2A-MI-A
NC3A-MS-A
Outline dimension table

NC300A-MI-A
Model NC300A-MS-A NC301A-MS-A NC311A-MS-A NC310A-MS-A
NC200A-MI-A
A 400 mm 400 mm 260 mm 290 mm 435 mm
B 390 mm 390 mm 250 mm 280 mm -
C 309 mm 200 mm 313 mm 335.5 mm 221 mm
D 299 mm 190 mm 303 mm 325.5 mm -
E 25 mm 25 mm 21.45 mm 23 mm 23 mm
F 70 mm 70 mm 70.2 mm 70 mm 70 mm
G 130 mm 130 mm 130 mm 130 mm 130 mm
Mounting dimension table

NC300A-MI-A
Model NC300A-MS-A NC301A-MS-A NC311A-MS-A NC310A-MS-A
NC200A-MI-A
H 291 ± 0.3 mm 182.5 ± 0.3 mm 293 ± 0.3 mm 315.5 ± 0.3 mm 191 ± 0.3 mm
H1 299 mm 190 mm 303 mm 325.5 mm 210.4 mm
W 378 ± 0.3 mm 378 ± 0.3 mm 244 ± 0.3 mm 270 ± 0.3 mm 423 ± 0.3 mm
W1 130 mm 130 mm 250 mm 280 mm 141.47 mm
W2 130 mm 130 mm - - 141.47 mm
W3 130 mm 130 mm - - 141.47 mm
I Φ4 mm Φ4 mm Φ4 mm Φ4 mm Φ4.5 mm
2-6
Appearance and dimension tables of A series OPENCNC
NC30E(H) dimension drawing

Model NC30E(H)
A 60 mm
B 19 mm
C 196 mm
D 213 mm
E 164 mm
G 70 mm

Model NC30E(H)
H1 201 ± 0.3 mm
W1 19 ± 0.3 mm
I M5
2-7
2.1.6 Operating interface installation (for OPENCNC models)
 Operating interface installation
2 A. Connect the controller to standard operating interfaces, including: (1) Delta HMI screen, (2)
keyboard (functions the same as machine operation panel A), and (3) machine operation
panel B.
B. Connect the controller to non-Delta operating interfaces, including: (4) screen and (5)
keyboard.
Note: the installation methods above are applicable to all NC series models, and the OPENCNC model is
taken as an example in the following diagram.
The NC series controllers can connect to (6) ASDA series AC servo drives, (7) ASDA-S spindle
servo drive, (8) ECMA series servo motors, and (9) ECMS series spindle servo motor.
2-8
 Connection through computer and network
Connect the controller to (3) ASDA series AC servo drives, (4) ASDA-S spindle servo drive, (5)
2
ECMA series servo motors, and (6) ECMS series spindle servo motor through the computer and
network, including (1) PC-based controller and (2) mouse and the public software for Delta
OPENCNC.
2-9
2.2 B series product installation explanation

2.2.1 Ambient storage conditions
2
This product must be kept in the shipping carton before installation. To retain the warranty
coverage and ensure future maintenance, follow these instructions for storage. While the product
is temporarily not in use:
 Store the product in a dust-free and dry location.
 Store the product in an ambient temperature range of -20°C to +60°C (-4°F to +140°F)..
 Store the product in a relative humidity range of 10% to 95% RH (non-condensing).
 Avoid storing the product in an environment containing corrosive gas and liquids.
2.2.2 Ambient installation conditions
Operating temperature for the NC series controller: 0°C - 50°C (32°F - 131°F). During long-term
operation, the suggested temperature of the operating environment should be below 45°C
(113°F). If the temperature is above 45°C, place the product in a distribution board which is
well-ventilated and without overheating risks. Also check if the vibration of the machine affects
the electrical devices in the distribution board.
In addition, follow these precautions when choosing the installation site to retain the warranty
coverage and ensure future maintenance for the Delta NC controller.
 The temperature and humidity of the installation site for the NC controller should be within
the range specified in the specification.
 The vibration at the location where you store the NC controller must not exceed the range
specified in the specification.
2-10
2.2.3 Mounting direction and space
Important:

The NC controller must be installed vertically on a dry and solid platform which complies
with the requirement of NEMA.
For better ventilation and cooling, allow sufficient clearance space between the NC
2
controller and the adjacent objects and the wall (the clearance is suggested to be 50 mm
(around 2 inches)), or it may cause malfunction of the machine.
 Do not block the ventilation holes of the NC controller, or it may cause malfunction of the
machine.
2-11
2.2.4 Hardware specifications
NC3B series milling machine controller / NC200B series milling machine controller
2
Model NC300B-MI NC300B-MS NC301B-MS NC310B-MS NC311B-MS NC200B-MI
Operating
10% to 95% RH [0°C to +50°C (32°F to 131°F)]
environment
Storage
10% to 95% RH [-20°C to +60°C (-4°F to +140°F)]
environment
Cooling
Natural cooling
method
Dielectric
voltage
Power
15 W (24V; 0.6 A)
consumption
USB
supported FAT16 / FAT32
format
CF card
supported FAT16 / FAT32 / EXT4 (Only for Linux)
format
Dimensions
400 x 309 x 400 x 309 x
WxHxD 400 x 200 x 97 260 x 313 x 95 435 x 221 x 95 290 x 335 x 95
123 123
(mm)
Weight (kg) 4.1 3.1 3.4 3.8 3.8 4.3
B series OPENCNC controller

Model NC30EB(H)
Operating environment 10% to 95% RH [0°C to +50°C (32°F to 131°F)]
Storage environment 10% to 95% RH [-20°C to +60°C (-4°F to +140°F)]
Cooling method Natural cooling
Dielectric withstanding
Between 24 VDC and FG terminals: AC500V for 1 minute
voltage
Power consumption 19.2 W (24V; 0.8 A)
Dimensions
60 x 196 x 164
W x H x D (mm)
Weight (kg) 1.8
2-12
2.2.5 Outline and mounting dimensions
Appearance and dimension tables of NC3B series / NC200B series
NC300B-MI-A / NC200B-MI-A
2
F
NC300B-MS-A
NC301B-MS-A
2-13
NC310B-MS-A
2
NC311B-MS-A

NC300B-MI-A
Model NC300B-MS-A NC301B-MS-A NC310B-MS-A NC311B-MS-A
NC200B-MI-A
A 400 mm 400 mm 260 mm 435 mm 290 mm
B 390 mm 390 mm 250 mm - 280 mm
C 309 mm 200 mm 313 mm 221 mm 335.5 mm
D 299 mm 190 mm 303 mm - 325.5 mm
E 25 mm 25 mm 21.45 mm 23 mm 23 mm
F 130 mm 130 mm 130 mm 130 mm 130 mm

NC300B-MI-A
Model NC300B-MS-A NC301B-MS-A NC310B-MS-A NC311B-MS-A
NC200B-MI-A
H 291 ± 0.3 mm 182.5 ± 0.3 mm 293 ± 0.3 mm 191 ± 0.3 mm 315.5 ± 0.3 mm
H1 299 mm 190 mm 303 mm 210.4 mm 325.5 mm
W 378 ± 0.3 mm 378 ± 0.3 mm 244 ± 0.3 mm 423 ± 0.3 mm 270 ± 0.3 mm
W1 130 mm 130 mm 250 mm 141.47 mm 280 mm
W2 130 mm 130 mm - 141.47 mm -
W3 130 mm 130 mm - 141.47 mm -
I Φ4 mm Φ4 mm Φ4 mm Φ4.5 mm Φ4 mm
2-14
Appearance and dimension tables of B series OPENCNC B
NC30EB
A
B
F G
W1
2
C D E H1

Model NC30EB
A 65 mm
B 25 mm
C 205 mm
D 220 mm
E 236 mm
F 70 mm
G 191 mm

Model NC30EB
H1 220 ± 1.0 mm
W1 25 ± 0.3 mm
I M4
2-15
2.2.6 Operating interface installation (for OPENCNC models)
 Operating interface installation
2 A. Connect the controller to standard operating interfaces, including: (1) Delta HMI screen, (2)
keyboard (functions as the same as machine operation panel A), and (3) machine operation
panel B.
B. Connect the controller to non-Delta operating interfaces, including: (4) screen and (5)
keyboard.
Note: the installation methods above are applicable to all NC series models, and the OPENCNC model is
taken as an example in the following diagram.
The NC series controllers can connect to the following: (6) ASDA series AC servo drives, (7)
ASDA-S spindle servo drive, (8) ECMA series servo motors, and (9) ECMS series spindle servo
motor.
2-16
 Connection through computer and network
Connect the controller to (3) ASDA series AC servo drives, (4) ASDA-S spindle servo drive, (5)
2
ECMA series servo motors, and (6) ECMS series spindle servo motor through the computer and
network, including (1) PC-based controller and (2) mouse and the public software for Delta
OPENCNC.
2-17
2-18
Wiring
This chapter illustrates the wiring and connectors of the controller, and provides the
wiring diagrams for each function.
Wiring
3.1 A series product ················································································3-3

3.1.1 A series system interface ······························································3-3
3.1.2 A series controller connectors ······················································ 3-10
3.1.2.1 NC3 series connectors ···················································· 3-10
3.1.2.2 NC2 series connectors ···················································· 3-13
3.1.2.3 OPENCNC series connectors ··········································· 3-16
3.1.3 Wiring for power connector ·························································· 3-18
3.1.4 Wiring for RS-485 connector ························································ 3-19
3.1.5 Wiring for Axis 1 - 4 input connector ·············································· 3-21
3.1.6 Wiring for spindle feedback input connector ···································· 3-24
3.1.7 Wiring for spindle analog output connector ······································ 3-26
3.1.8 Wiring for HSI connector ····························································· 3-29
3.1.9 Wiring for emergency stop ··························································· 3-32
3.1.10 Wiring for MPG connector ··························································· 3-34
3.1.11 Wiring for remote I/O connector ···················································· 3-39
3.1.11.1 NC-EIO-R2010 ······························································ 3-43
3.1.11.2 NC-EIO-R3216 ······························································ 3-46
3.1.11.3 NC-EIO-R3232 ······························································ 3-49
3.1.11.4 NC-EIO-T3232 ······························································· 3-52
3.1.12 Wiring for local I/O connector ······················································· 3-55
3.1.13 Wiring for I/O connector on machine operation panel B of NC300 / NC310
series models ··········································································· 3-57
3.1.14 Wiring for I/O connector on machine operation panel B of NC311 series
models ···················································································· 3-60
3.2 B series product ·············································································· 3-63
3.2.1 B series system interface ···························································· 3-63
3.2.2 B series controller connectors ······················································ 3-73
3.2.2.1 NC3□□B series connectors ··············································· 3-73
3.2.2.2 NC200B series connectors ··············································· 3-76
3.2.2.3 OPENCNC series connectors ··········································· 3-78
3.2.3 Wiring for power connector ·························································· 3-80
3-1
Wiring Milling Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual
3.2.4 Wiring for spindle pulse output connector ······································· 3-81

3.2.5 Wiring for RS-485 connector ························································ 3-84
3.2.6 Wiring for spindle analog feedback connector ·································· 3-86
3 3.2.7
3.2.8
3.2.9
Wiring for spindle analog output connector ······································ 3-88
Wiring for HSI connector ····························································· 3-91
Wiring for emergency stop ··························································· 3-93
3.2.10 Wiring for MPG connector ··························································· 3-94
3.2.11 Wiring for remote I/O connector ···················································· 3-98
3.2.11.1 NC-EIO-R2010 ·····························································3-102
3.2.11.2 NC-EIO-R3216 ·····························································3-105
3.2.11.3 NC-EIO-R3232 ·····························································3-108
3.2.11.4 NC-EIO-T3232 ······························································3-111
3.2.12 Wiring for local I/O connector ······················································3-114
3.2.13 Wiring for I/O connector on machine operation panel B of NC3□□ series
models ···················································································3-119
3-2
Milling Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Wiring
3.1 A series product

3.1.1 A series system interface
3
 NC3 series
NC300A_-MI-A_
NC300A_-MS-A_
3-3
Detailed description of each connector

No. Connector Description
3
Connects to high-speed serial I/O module: each module has 32 DI
(1) Remote I/O and 32 DO points. The maximum distance between stations is 20 m
and the total length can be up to 160 m (= 20 m x 8).
Connects to an external MPG (powered by the built-in 5 VDC power).
(2) MPG
8 DI points are available.
One set of spindle encoder input signal.
(3) Spindle One set of analog output signal.
G31 analog output signal.
(4) Axis 1 - 4 Limit and home inputs of four axes.
(5) RS-485 RS-485 serial port for communication with external devices.
I/O 1: 16 DI / 16 DO points.
(6) Local I/O
(7) CF card For storing G-code programs.
(8) DMCNET High-speed communication network connector.
(9) Ethernet For DNC control and system monitoring.
When the button is pressed, the IES circuit is open, causing the
(10) Emergency stop
system to stop immediately.
(11) Battery holder -
(12) 24 VDC power 24 VDC power input for supplying 24 VDC power to the controller.
CYCLE START /
(13) -
FEED HOLD
(14) 24 VDC power For supplying 24 VDC power to machine operation panel B.
Cable slot for machine
(15) －
operation panel B
Safety precautions for installation:

1. Check if the wiring for 24 VDC power is correct.
2. Both local I/O and remote I/O require an additional 24 VDC power supply to drive X input and
Y output.
3. Short-circuit EMG (emergency stop) to have the controller ready for use.
4. If an alarm occurs or the emergency stop signal is on, power off the servo drive by
disconnecting the power at the magnetic contactor (MC) with Y output.
3-4
NC301A-MS-A_
NC310A-MS-A_
3-5
NC311A-MS-A_

(2) MPG
G31 analog output signal.
(4) Axis 1 - 4 Limit and home inputs of four axes.
(5) RS-485 RS-485 serial port for communication with external devices.
(6) Local I/O
(12) －
operation panel B
Y output.
3-6
 NC2 series
NC200A-MI-A_

(2) HSI High-speed counter and emergency stop input signal.
One set of RS-485 serial communication signal.
(4) MPG
7 DI points and 1 DO point are available.
(10) Local I/O input terminal 5 input points.
(11) Local I/O output terminal 3 output points.
2. Remote I/O requires an additional 24 VDC power supply to drive X input and Y output.
3. Short-circuit IES (emergency stop) to have the controller ready for use.
3-7
 OPENCNC series
NC30E(H)

(1) Indicators -
(3) HSI High-speed counter and emergency stop signal input.
(4) MPG
One set of RS-485 serial communication signal.
(8) PAN One USB connector for connecting to machine operation panel B.
Three USB host connectors for connecting to the mouse, keyboard,
(9) USB
and flash drive.
(10) VGA For connecting to a screen.
(11) Ethernet Ethernet connector.
(13) MODE For switching the debugging mode.
3-8
Debugging mode description

Setting
Mode
value
3
Standard mode
Indicator description:
PWR Green: system power on
Flashing green: system ready
RDY
Orange: in modes 1 - 3
0
SON Green: system ready
RIO Green: remote I/O connection is normal
ETH Green: network communication is normal
Red: system alarm occurs
ALM
Flashing green: software updating
1 System update mode
2 Default mode
Reset IP to default setting
Default IP:
3 Controller IP 192.168.1.11
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0
Remote PC IP 192.168.1.10
3-9
3.1.2 A series controller connectors

3.1.2.1 NC3 series connectors
3
Symbol Function Description
Connects to the 24 VDC power (15 W at 0.6 A).
Symbol Cable color Description
Power input for +24V Red +24 VDC power
0V, +24V,
controller
0V White 0 VDC power
Green Power grounding
DI/DO range: X0 - X15, Y0 - Y15.

Pin No. Description
P1 - P16 DI points X0 - X15, 16 points in total (8 - 25 mA)
1st set P19 - P34 DO points Y0 - Y15, 16 points in total (< 120 mA)
I/O 1
local I/O P18 DI COM point; connects to +24 VDC or 0V
P17 DO COM point; fixed at 0V
Power specifications:
voltage < 24 VDC, current < 60 mA.
DI/DO range: X16 - X27, Y16 - Y27.
Pin No. Description
2nd set P19 - P30 DO points Y16 - Y27, 12 points in total (< 120 mA)
I/O 2
local I/O P18 DI COM point; connects to +24 VDC or 0V
Power specifications:
Each axis (1 - 4) has positive / negative limit and home sensor
input terminals, 12 points in total (operating current: 8 - 25 mA).
Pin No. Description
Positive limit, negative limit, and home point inputs of
P1 - P3 the 1st axis
(Special M [M2144], [M2145], [M2146])
Limit and home P4 - P6 the 2nd axis
Axis 1 - 4
sensor of each axis (Special M [M2148], [M2149], [M2150])
P7 - P9 the 3rd axis
(Special M [M2152], [M2153], [M2154])
P10 - P12 the 4th axis
(Special M [M2156], [M2157], [M2158])
P13 - P15 DI COM point; connects to +24 VDC or 0V
3-10

Includes spindle feedback, analog output, and 2 high-speed
inputs.
3
Pin No. Description
P1 HSI_COM; connects to +24 VDC or 0V
P2 HSI_1 (Counter C78, enter [M2142])
P4 SP_OUT
P5 SP_GND
P6 EMG_GND
SPINDLE Spindle connector
P7 EMG_IN
P8 SP_A+
P9 SP_A-
P10 DC +5V_OUT
P11 SP_B+
P12 SP_B-
P13 SP_Z+
P14 SP_Z-
P15 GND
6 DI points and 1 set of differential type MPG signal input.
Pin No. Description
P1 DI_COM; connects to +24 VDC or 0V
P2 - P9 DI (X28 - X35)
P10 DC +5V_OUT (< 200 mA)
MPG MPG connector
P11 XA+
P12 XA-
P13 XB+
P14 XB-
P15 GND
Remote I/O module communication signals, including X256 -
X511 and Y256 - Y511. Each module has 32 X inputs and 32 Y
outputs, and the controller can connect to up to 8 modules.
Pin No. Description
Remote I/O module
P1 TX+
serial
REMOTE I/O P2 TX-
communication
terminal P3 RX-
P4 RX+
P5 GND
P6 SHIELD
3-11
Connects to PC with an RJ45 connector and a network cable.

Pin definition of both ends:
3
Pin No. / color of end A Pin No. / color of end B
1: orange & white 1: orange & white
2: orange 2: orange
ETHERNET Ethernet connector 3: green & white 3: green & white
4: blue 4: blue
5: blue & white 5: blue & white
6: green 6: green
7: brown & white 7: brown & white
8: brown 8: brown
Connects to Delta's DMCNET servo drive with standard RJ45
DMCNET DMCNET connector connector. The wiring method is the same as that of the
Ethernet connector.
EMG Emergency stop Press to make an open circuit during emergencies.
Power On Power On connector Power On button contact.
Power Off Power Off connector Power Off button contact.
The emergency stop contact. The EMG flag is enabled in a

Emergency stop
IES broken circuit. (Wired to the normally-closed contact of the
contact
emergency stop button.)
RS-485 serial Connects to external devices using RS-485 serial
RS-485
communication port communication.
3-12
3.1.2.2 NC2 series connectors
3
Symbol Description
Power input for +24V +24 VDC power
0V, +24V,
controller
0V 0 VDC power
Power grounding

Power Symbol Description
0V, +24V input for machine
operation panel B +24V +24 VDC power
0V 0 VDC power
Power specifications for DI points:
voltage < 24 VDC, current: 8 - 25 mA.
MI series
Pin No. Description
DI X112 - X116 DI points X112 - X116, 5 points in total.
LI series
Pin No. Description
X112 - X119 DI points X112 - X119, 8 points in total.
I/O
Power specifications for DO points:
MI series
Pin No. Description
DO Y112 - Y114 DO points Y112 - Y114, 3 points in total.
LI series
Pin No. Description
Y112 - Y116 DO points Y112 - Y116, 5 points in total.
Includes spindle feedback, analog output, and 1 set of RS-485
serial communication input.
Pin No. Description
P1 RS485_GND
P2 RS485_D+
P3 RS485_D-
P4 SP_OUT
P5 SP_GND
P6 Reserved
P7 EMG_IN; connects to +24 VDC
P8 SP_A+
P9 SP_A-
P10 DC +5V_OUT
P11 SP_B+
P12 SP_B-
P13 SP_Z+
P14 SP_Z-
P15 GND
3-13

7 DI points, 1 DO point, and 1 set of differential type MPG input
signal.
3
Pin No. Description
P2 - P7 DI (X28 - X33)
P8 DI (X26)
MPG MPG connector P9 DO (Y27)
P10 DC +5V_OUT (< 200 mA)
P11 XA+
P12 XA-
P13 XB+
P14 XB-
P15 GND
2 sets of high-speed and 1 set of emergency stop input signals.
Pin No. Description
P1 EMG_IN
High-speed counter P2 EMG_GND
HSI and emergency
stop input signal P3 HSI_1 (Counter C78, enter [M2142])
P6 HSI_COM; short-circuit P4 and P6
Remote I/O module communication terminal, including X256 -
Pin No. Description
Remote I/O module
P1 TX+
serial
REMOTE I/O P2 TX-
communication
terminal P3 RX-
P4 RX+
P5 GND
P6 SHIELD
3-14

3
Pin No. / color of end A Pin. No. / color of end B
2: orange 2: orange
4: blue 4: blue
6: green 6: green
8: brown 8: brown
Connect to Delta's DMCNET servo drive with standard RJ45
Ethernet connector.
Emergency stop
IES broken circuit. (Wire it to the normally-closed contact of the
contact
Note:
1. The IES connector is the input contact of the emergency stop signal. Enable the EMG flag in a broken
circuit.
2. The power for the lights of Power On and Power Off buttons is 24 VDC.
3-15
3.1.2.3 OPENCNC series connectors
3
Symbol Description
Power input for +24V +24 VDC power
0V, +24V,
controller
0V 0 VDC power
Power grounding
Includes spindle feedback, analog output, and 1 set of RS-485

serial communication input.
Pin No. Description
P1 RS485_GND
P2 RS485_D+
P3 RS485_D-
P4 SP_OUT
P5 SP_GND
P6 Reserved
P7 Reserved
P8 SP_A+
P9 SP_A-
P10 DC +5V_OUT
P11 SP_B+
P12 SP_B-
P13 SP_Z+
P14 SP_Z-
P15 GND
Pin No. Description
P2 - P9 DI (X28 - X35)
P10 DC +5V_OUT (< 200 mA)
MPG MPG connector
P11 XA+
P12 XA-
P13 XB+
P14 XB-
P15 GND
3-16

2 sets of high-speed and 1 set of emergency stop input signals.
Pin No. Description
3
P1 EMG_IN (DC+ 5V output)
High-speed counter P2 MODE_ENABLE (DC+ 5V output)
HSI and emergency P3 HSI_1 (Counter C78, enter [M2142])
stop input signal
P4 GND

X511 and Y256 - Y511. Each module has 32 X inupts and 32 Y
outputs, and of the controller can connect to up to 8 modules.
Pin No. Description
Remote I/O module
P1 TX+
serial
REMOTE I/O P2 TX-
communication
terminal P3 RX-
P4 RX+
P5 GND
P6 SHIELD
Connector for
The USB host connector for connecting to machine operation
PAN2 machine operation
panel B. No connection to USB devices.
panel B
USB connectors for connecting to USB devices, such as USB
USB USB connector flash drive, mouse, and keyboard. Connection in series is not
supported by this connector.
Connects to an external monitor (only monitors with the refresh
VGA VGA connector
rate of 60 Hz is supported).
Pin No. / color of end A Pin No. / color of end B
2: orange 2: orange
4: blue 4: blue
6: green 6: green
8: brown 8: brown
Ethernet connector.
MODE Debugging mode Debugging mode switch.
3-17
3.1.3 Wiring for power connector
The wiring for the power of the NC series controller is divided into two types: power supply
3
control with Power On / Off switches and direct power supply.
 Power supply control with Power On / Off switches
As shown in the following figure, Power On is the NO contact and Power Off is the NC
contact; MC (electromagnetic contactor) is the power relay.
R S T (220V)
Circuit breaker Connect to

(connect to Power On switch) Power Off
switch
24 VDC power ON OFF

supply
DCOUT
ACIN
GND
MC
MC
24 VDC power
supply
DCOUT 24 VDC
ACIN
GND
 Direct power supply
24 VDC power
supply
DCOUT 24 VDC
AC
power ACIN
supply
FG
FG
3-18
3.1.4 Wiring for RS-485 connector
The NC series controller has one RS-485 connector for serial communication with external
3
devices.
Pin assignment for NC3 series models
(1) RS-485 connector (female); (2) RS-485 connector (male)
Model Symbol Pin No. Function description

1 D+
NC3_ _ RS-485
6 D-

2 D+
NC2_ _ SPINDLE
3 D-
3-19
Pin assignment for OPENCNC series models

2 D+
NC30E_ SPINDLE
3 D-
3-20
3.1.5 Wiring for Axis 1 - 4 input connector
The NC controller provides input points of hardware positive / negative limits and home signal for
3
the servo axes; there are 12 input points in the Axis 1 - 4 terminal block. The COM terminals can
connect to +24 VDC or 0V, and the corresponding input point signal must be changed to 0V or
+24 VDC.
(1) Axis 1 - 4 input connector (female); (2) Axis 1 - 4 input connector (male)

1 OT0+ Axis 1 positive limit
2 OT0- Axis 1 negative limit
3 DOG0 Axis 1 home signal
NC3_ _ Axis 1 - 4 8 OT2- Axis 3 negative limit
13 COM COM
14 COM COM
15 COM COM
3-21
For six-axis servo applications, you can set parameter Pr49 to 1, and then Pin 10 is the Home
point (DOG3) of Axis 4, Pin 11 is the Home point (DOG4) of Axis 5, and Pin 12 is the Home point
(DOG5) of Axis 6.
3 Descriptions of related special M relays
Pin P1 - P3
Positive limit, negative limit, and home point input of the 1st axis (M2144, M2145,
M2146)
Positive limit, negative limit, and home point input of the 2nd axis (M2148, M2149,
Pin P4 - P6
M2150)
Positive limit, negative limit, and home point input of the 3rd axis (M2152, M2153,
Pin P7 - P9
M2154)
Positive limit, negative limit, and home point input of the 4th axis (M2156, M2157,
Pin P10 - P12
M2158)
The wiring for using voltage as the input signal (allowable voltage: 17 - 32 VDC; surge current:
under 50 mA) with an external power is as follows:
NPN transistor (SINK mode)
CNC Axis 1 - 4
COM1 2.4 kΩ
DC24V
DI
PNP transistor (SOURCE mode)
CNC Axis 1 - 4
DI 2.4 kΩ
DC24V
COM1
3-22
Wiring for the Axis 1 - 4 connector and the NC-EXM-S01 inverter card
(1) DI wiring method when 0V is connected to COM1;
(2) DI wiring method when +24 VDC is connected to COM1
3-23
3.1.6 Wiring for spindle feedback input connector
The NC series controller has one set of spindle feedback input.
3 Pin assignment for NC3 series models
(1) Spindle feedback input connector (female); (2) Spindle feedback input connector (male)
3-24

8 SP_A+ Spindle encoder A+ pulse input
9 SP_A- Spindle encoder A- pulse input
10 DC +5V_OUT Spindle encoder power output (+5 VDC)
11 SP_B+ Spindle encoder B+ pulse input
ALL SPINDLE
12 SP_B- Spindle encoder B- pulse input
13 SP_Z+ Spindle encoder Z+ pulse input
14 SP_Z- Spindle encoder Z- pulse input
15 GND Spindle encoder power output (0V)
3-25
3.1.7 Wiring for spindle analog output connector
The NC series controller has one set of spindle analog output for controlling the spindle speed.
(1) Spindle analog output connector (female); (2) Spindle analog output connector (male)

4 SP_OUT Spindle analog output
ALL SPINDLE
5 SP_GND Ground for spindle analog output signal
3-26
Settings for analog spindle are as follows:
1. Pr399 setting
3
Description Servo control Analog control
Spindle function
1 1
0: off; 1: on
Closed-loop control flag
0: off 1 0 or 1
1: on (feedback encoder is required)
Spindle output mode
0 2
0: communication (DMCNET); 1: pulse (B series); 2: analog voltage
Speed control mode
1 1
1: PUU
Spindle encoder magnification
0 1
0: 1000 times; 1: 4 times
Analog spindle speed source
0 1
0: command; 1: encoder
Analog spindle feedback encoder source
0 0
0: spindle; 1: motor
Spindle voltage output mode
0: -10V to +10V 0 0 or 1
1: 0V to +10V (only effective in open loop control)
2. In the channel setting screen (CONFIG), enable SP1 and set its port number to 10.
Note: port number 10 is dedicated for analog output.
3. When analog spindle output is used, the corresponding pins are Pin 4 and Pin 5 of the
SPINDLE connector. The analog voltage resolution is 14-bit.
Pr399 [Spindle output voltage] = 0; -10V to +10V voltage control.

Output voltage value Corresponding rotation speed
+10 VDC Maximum rotation speed (forward)
0 VDC Zero speed
-10 VDC Maximum rotation speed (reverse)
Note: this control mode can be used for closed loop and open loop controls, and can satisfy the tapping
and threading functions.
Pr399 [Spindle output voltage] = 1; 0V to +10V voltage control.

+10 VDC Maximum rotation speed
0 VDC Zero speed
Note: this control mode is only applicable to open loop control and is unable to control spindle forward /
reverse rotation. If there is encoder feedback signal, the threading function can be used but not
the tapping function.
3-27
Controller
SP_OUT/pin 4
Delta Analog output
SP_GND/pin 5
3
Inverter
Inverter card (NC-EXM-S01)
3-28
3.1.8 Wiring for HSI connector
The NC series controller has two sets of hardware high-speed counter signal input. For the
3
wiring of high-speed counter input (bi-directional coupling), the maximum input bandwidth is up
to 5 MHz; voltage: 22 - 26V; permissible current: 8 - 20 mA; surge current: below 50 mA.
The corresponding special M relay for HSI_1 is M2142, which is also applicable to G31 Skip
command.
Settings of relevant parameters:

Parameter
Parameter name Function
address
G31 high speed input 1
Bit 0 0: NC; 1: NO
contact
Pr25
Bit 1 0: NC; 1: NO
contact
Bit 4 0: off; 1: on
switch
Pr46
Bit 5 0: off; 1: on
switch
Pr307 Bit 4 - 5 G31 input source 0: off; 1: HSI 1; 2: HSI 2; 3: HSI 1 & 2
Controller
24V
Controller
24V
Note: the connection direction of the external power input for HSI does not affect the operation.
3-29
(1) HSI connector (female); (2) HSI connector (male)
1 HSI_COM High-speed counter COM; connects to +24 VDC or 0V
NC3_ _ SPINDLE 2 HSI_1 High-speed counter input 1 (10 mA)
3 HSI_2 High-speed counter input 2 (10 mA)
3-30
3

The high-speed counter COM; connects to +24 VDC
4 HSI_COM
or 0V
NC2_ _ HSI
The high-speed counter COM; short-circuit P4 and
6 HSI_COM
P6

4 GND GND
NC30E_ HSI 5 HSI_2 High-speed counter input 2 (10 mA)
High-speed counter COM; connects to +24 VDC
6 HSI_COM
or 0V
Note: HSI_1 and HSI_2 can output +5V power, so both of them can form a circuit with GND and for
immediate use.
3-31
3.1.9 Wiring for emergency stop
The NC series controller has one set of emergency stop signal input.
(1) EMG pins; (2) Power supply; (3) Emergency stop button

6 EMG_GND Emergency stop input
NC3_ _ SPINDLE
7 EMG_IN +24 VDC input
(1) Spindle connector EMG pins; (2) HSI connector EMG pins; (3) Emergency stop button
7 EMG_IN Emergency stop power input (+24 VDC)

SPINDLE
15 GND Emergency stop power input (0 VDC)
NC2__
1 EMG_IN Emergency stop input
HSI
2 EMG_GND Emergency stop input
3-32
3
(1) EMG pins; (2) Emergency stop button
1 EMG_IN EMG (+5 VDC output)

NC30E_ HSI
4 GND GND
3-33
3.1.10 Wiring for MPG connector
The NC series controller has one MPG connector for receiving MPG pulses. This connector
3
supplies +5 VDC power which directly supplies power to the MPG.
(1) MPG connector (female); (2) MPG connector (male)

1 EXT_24 DI COM point; connects to +24V or 0V
X28; recommended for the X axis selection
2 DI_1
input
X29; recommended for the Y axis selection
3 DI_2
input
X30; recommended for the Z axis selection
4 DI_3
input
X31; recommended for magnification x1
5 DI_4
selection input
6 DI_5
selection input
NC3_ _ MPG X33; recommended for magnification x100

7 DI_6
selection input
X34; recommended for the A axis selection
8 DI_7
input*
X35; recommended for the B axis selection
9 DI_8
input*
10 5V_OUT 5 VDC_OUT
11 XA+ XA+
12 XA- XA-
13 XB+ XB+
14 XB- XB-
15 5V_GND 5 VDC GND
Note: pins 8 and 9 of the NC300 / NC301 / NC310 / NC311 models with the production week of T1751 in the
serial number are reserved and are short-circuited internally with Pin 15.
3-34

X28; recommended for the X axis selection
2 DI_1
input
X29; recommended for the Y axis selection
3 DI_2
input
X30; recommended for the Z axis selection
4 DI_3
input
5 DI_4
selection input
6 DI_5
selection input
NC2_ _ MPG X33; recommended for magnification x100
7 DI_6
selection input
X26; recommended for the A axis selecdtion
8 DI_7
input
9 DO_8 Y27
10 5V_OUT 5 VDC_OUT
11 XA+ XA+
12 XA- XA-
13 XB+ XB+
14 XB- XB-
15 5V_GND 5 VDC_GND
3-35

2 DI_1 X0
3 DI_2 X1
4 DI_3 X2
5 DI_4 X3
6 DI_5 X4
7 DI_6 X5
NC30E_ MPG 8 DI_7 X6
9 DI_8 X7
10 5V_OUT 5 VDC_OUT
11 XA+ XA+
12 XA- XA-
13 XB+ XB+
14 XB- XB-
15 5V_GND 5 VDC_GND
3-36
The signal type determines the wiring for MPG, including single-ended type (EHDW-BA6SI) and
differential type (EHDW-BE6SI).
3
Single-ended MPG pulse signal wiring diagram
MPG contact on CNC MPG contact
5V_OUT P10 DC 5V
XA+ P11 DC 0V
XA- P12 A
XB+ P13 B
XB- P14
5V_GND P15
5V_OUT P10 DC 5V
XA+ P11 DC 0V
XA- P12 A
XB+ P13 B
XB- P14
5V_GND P15
Differential type MPG pulse signal wiring diagram
5V_OUT P10 DC 5V
XA+ P11 A
XA- P12 A-
XB+ P13 B
XB- P14 B-
5V_GND P15 DC 0V
3-37
MPG switch wiring diagram
 The 5V power is supplied from the MPG contact
3 MPG
Axis X P2 (X28)
Circuit of MPG contact
Internal circuit
Axis Y
Axis Z EXT_24V
X1
5V_OUT
X 10
X 100
5 VDC
5V_GND
COM
 The 24V power is supplied externally; EXT_24 can connect to +24V or 0V
MPG Circuit of MPG contact MPG Circuit of MPG contact
Axis X P2 (X28) Axis X P2 (X28)

Internal circuit
Internal circuit
Axis Y Axis Y
Axis Z EXT_24V Axis Z EXT_24V
X1 X1
5V_OUT 5V_OUT
X 10 X 10
24 VDC 24 VDC
X 100 X 100
5 VDC 5 VDC
5V_GND 5V_GND
COM COM
3-38
3.1.11 Wiring for remote I/O connector
After the remote I/O module is connected to the NC series controller, there are 256 output and
3
256 input points available. For every additional station, its I/O address will offset backwards for
32 points. Up to 8 modules can be connected simultaneously, providing a maximum of 256
output points and 256 input points.
RS422
X256 X288 X320 X352

Y256 Y288 Y320 Y352
X384 X416 X448 X480

Y384 Y416 Y448 Y480
Remote I/O connector and pin definitions
Pin No. Function description

1 TX+
2 TX-
3 RX-
4 RX+
5 GND
6 SHIELD
3-39
Wiring diagram for remote I/O connector
The remote I/O module is mainly divided into two types: optical coupling type and relay type; the
definitions of their model names are as follows:
NC - EIO - T 32 32
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
(1) Series name
(2) Product name
(3) Type:
T: optical coupling type (allowable current: under 50 mA; surge current: under 100mA).
R: relay type (according to relay specifications; allowable current: 5A or 16A).
(4) Number of available input points for this model
(5) Number of available output points for this model
(6) Allowable current value for this model:
None: 5A (G2R relay)
A: 16A (G2R relay)
B: 16A (IDEC relay)
3-40
The remote I/O modules are as follows:

Model Description Remark
G2R relay
3
Relay type IO module with 20 input points and 10 output
NC-EIO-R2010 Allowable current:
points
5A
G2R relay
NC-EIO-R2010A Allowable current:
points
16A
IDEC relay
NC-EIO-R2010B Allowable current:
points
16A
G2R relay
points
5A
G2R relay
points
16A
IDEC relay
points
16A
Allowable current:
NC-EIO-R3232 Relay type IO module with 32 input and 32 output points
5A
Optical coupling type IO module with 32 input and 32 output Allowable current:
NC-EIO-T3232
points 50mA
3-41
Precautions for wiring the remote I/O module are as follows:
(1) The COM point of the input terminal is used for signal current; DC 24V or 0V power input is
3
strictly prohibited.
(2) Users can choose whether the input signal is H (PNP) or L (NPN) type with the H / L switch
according to the specifications of the external sensor. When H (PNP) is selected, the COM
point will provide +24V; when L (NPN) is selected, the COM point will be 0V.
L (NPN)
VDD
COM +
GND
GND
COM
VDD
H (PNP)
SW1 = H (PNP) SW1 = L (NPN)

COM COM
Direction of current Direction of current
X256 X257 X258 X259
COM+ R COM+ R
R R
Internal circuit
(3) Up to 8 remote I/O modules can be connected at the same time; the station number of the
module can be switched by using the knob on the circuit board. 0 = station 1, 1 = station 2,
2 = station 3 and so on, to a maximum of 7 = station 8.
When the knob of the module is set to 8 (= station 9) and 9 (= station 10), the setting of 8 is
regarded as the setting of 0 (= station 1), and the setting of 9 is regarded as the setting of 1
(= station 2). Do not rotate the knob to the same numbers for different modules
simultaneously.
Station number knob
3-42
3.1.11.1 NC-EIO-R2010
X256 X258
3
GND GND
24V 24V
X257 X259
Y256 Y257
DI wiring example description
Wiring example for the proximity switch of NPN two-wire system:
(1) Switch the H / L switch to L (NPN), and short-circuit the GND (common specification: blue
wire) of the sensor with the GND (0V) of the same power system.
(2) Simply connect the Vcc (common specification: brown wire) to the input contact.
NPN 2 wire proximity sensor

Brown
Direction of current
Blue
GND
X257 X259
24V 24V
3-43
Wiring example for the proximity switch of PNP two-wire system:
(1) Switch the H / L switch to H (PNP), and short-circuit the Vcc (common specification: brown
3
wire) of the sensor with the +24V of the same power system.
(2) Simply connect the GND (common specification: blue wire) to the input contact.
PNP 2 wire proximity sensor

Blue
X256 X258
GND GND
Brown
X259
24V
Wiring example for the proximity switch of NPN three-wire system:
(1) Switch the H / L switch to L (NPN).
(2) Connect the Vcc (common specification: brown wire) of the sensor to +24V.
(3) Connect the GND (common specification: blue wire) of the sensor to GND (0V).
(4) Connect the signal wire (common specification: black wire) of the sensor to the input
contact.

Brown
Black
Blue
GND
X257 X259
24V 24V
3-44
Input wiring example for the proximity switch of PNP three-wire system:
(1) Switch the H / L switch to H (PNP).
3
contact.
Blue
Black
Brown
X256 GND
X257 X259
24V 24V
Output wiring example description:
The output contacts of the remote I/O module are in pairs; please use them as dry contacts.
(1) Connect +24V to one of the output contacts, and the other contact will be DO.
(2) Connect DO to the Vcc (+) of the external device, and connect the GND (-) of the external
device to the 0V of the external power to form a circuit.
(3) When the controller sets the output contact to on, the circuit is closed and the device will
start operating.
Y256 Y257
DC
R Lamp
3-45
3.1.11.2 NC-EIO-R3216
COM COM
3
COM COM
X256 X258 X259

X257
Y256 Y257
DI wiring example description:
Proximity switch of NPN two-wire system:
(1) Switch the H / L switch to L (NPN), the COM point will provide 0V; connect the GND
(common specification: blue wire) of the sensor with COM, or short-circuit the GND of the
sensor with the GND (0V) of the same power system.

Brown
Blue
COM
X256 X258
X257 X259
3-46
Proximity switch of PNP two-wire system:
(1) Switch the H / L switch to H (PNP), the COM point will provide +24V; connect the Vcc
3
(common specification: brown wire) of the sensor with COM, or short-circuit the Vcc of the
sensor with the +24V of the same power system.

Blue
Brown
COM
X256 X258
X257 X259
Input wiring example for the proximity switch of NPN three-wire system:
(3) Connect the GND (common specification: blue wire) of the sensor to COM (0V).
contact.

Brown
VDC+24V
Black
Blue
COM
X256 X258
X257 X259
3-47
3
(3) Connect the GND (common specification: blue wire) of the sensor to 0V.
contact.

Blue
Black GND (0V)
Brown
COM
X256 X258
X257 X259
(3) When the controller set the output contact to on, the circuit is closed and the device will
start operating.
Y256 Y257
DC
R Lamp
3-48
3.1.11.3 NC-EIO-R3232
SW3
X256 ~ X263
L H L NPN H PNP
3
L H L H L H L H
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4
Y256 ~ Y263
Y256 ~ Y263
(1) Switch the short circuit jumper to L (NPN), and short-circuit the GND (common specification:
blue wire) of the sensor with the GND (0V) of the same power system.

Brown
Blue
GND (0V)
X256 X263
3-49
(1) Switch the short circuit jumper to H (PNP), and short-circuit the Vcc (common specification:
3
brown wire) of the sensor with the +24V of the same power system.

Blue
Brown
VDC+24V
X256 X263
(1) Switch the short circuit jumper to L (NPN).
(2) Connect the Vcc (common specification: brown wire) of the sensor to +24V (same power
system).
(3) Connect the GND (common specification: blue wire) of the sensor to 0V (same power
system).
contact.

Brown
VDC+24V
Black
Blue
GND (0V)
X256 X263
3-50
(1) Switch the short circuit jumper to H (PNP).
3
system).
system).
contact.
Blue
Black GND (0V)
Brown
VDC+24V
X256 X263
start operating.
Y256
Y256
DC
R Lamp
3-51
3.1.11.4 NC-EIO-T3232
COM COM
3
COM COM
X256 X258
X257 X259
Y257 Y259
Y256 Y258
G0 G2
G1 G3
Brown
Blue
COM
X256 X258
X257 X259
3-52
3

Blue
Brown
COM
X256 X258
X257 X259
contact.

Brown
VDC+24V
Black
Blue
COM
X256 X258
X257 X259
3-53
3
contact.
Blue
Black GND (0V)
Brown
COM
X256 X258
X257 X259
(1) Connect 0V to one of the output contacts, and the other contact will be DO.
(2) Connect DO to the GND (-) of the external device, and connect the Vcc (+) of the external
device to the +24V of the external power to form a circuit.
start operating.
Y256
G0
DC
R Lamp
3-54
3.1.12 Wiring for local I/O connector
For providing a more flexible I/O configuration, some NC series controllers have the local I/O
3
connector.
NC300A-MI-A
(1) Local I/O connector (female); (2) Local I/O connector (male)
I/O 1 I/O 2
Pin 1 X0 Pin 2 X1 Pin 1 X16 Pin 2 X17
Pin 13 X12 Pin 14 X13 Pin 13 NC Pin 14 NC
Pin 15 X14 Pin 16 X15 Pin 15 NC Pin 16 NC
Pin 17 OUTCOM Pin 18 COM2 Pin 17 OUTCOM Pin 18 COM3
Pin 19 Y0 Pin 20 Y1 Pin 19 Y16 Pin 20 Y17
Pin 31 Y12 Pin 32 Y13 Pin 31 NC Pin 32 NC
Pin 33 Y14 Pin 34 Y15 Pin 33 NC Pin 34 NC
3-55
NC200A-MI-A
DI DO
Pin 1 X112 Pin 2 X113 Pin 1 Y112 Pin 2 Y113
Pin 3 X114 Pin 4 X115 Pin 3 Y114 - -
Pin 5 X116 - -
DI wiring; connect to an external power supply.
COM
2.4kΩ
DC 24V
DI
3-56
DO wiring; connect to an external power supply.
DC 24V
R
DO
Fuse
OUTCOM
3.1.13 Wiring for I/O connector on machine operation panel B of NC300 /

NC310 series models
NC300A-MI-A / AE (All-in-one machine)
NC-PAN-300AM-F (P) / NC-PAN-310AM-F (P)
3-57
NC-PAN-300AM-F(P)E / NC-PAN-310AM-F(P)E
Wiring of the Power On / Power Off switches
3-58
(1) Description of the connector
The power indicator requires a 24 VDC power system; to ilght up the Power On indicator,
3
+24 VDC power must be inputted to the ONL+ pin and 0V must be inputted to the ONL- pin;
to light up the Power Off indicator, +24 VDC must be inputted to the OFFL+ pin and 0V must
be inputted to the OFFL- pin.
24 VDC
Power Supply
ON OFF
DCOUT
MC
ACIN
GND
M
C
MC
When the Power On key is pressed, the circuit between ONA1 and ONA2 is closed; when
the Power Off key is pressed, the circuit between OFFB1 and OFFB2 is open.
(2) Front view diagram of Power On / Off
NC-PAN-300AM-P is equipped with I/O, and the wiring is as follows:
DI signal input (allowable current: 8 - 25 mA; surge current: under 40 mA)
TB2
24 VDC
X115 ...
X114
X107
DO drive general load (allowable current: under 40 mA; surge current: under
100 mA). TB3

24 VDC
Y116 R ...
Y115
Y114
Y113
Y112
3-59
3.1.14 Wiring for I/O connector on machine operation panel B of NC311

series models
3
NC-PAN-311AM-F (P)
3-60
NC-PAN-311AM-F (P) E
3-61
Wiring of the connector
DO drive general load
(allowable current: under 40 mA; surge current: under 100mA).

TB2
24VDC
Y100 R ...
Y101
Y102
Y103
DI signal input
(allowable current: 8 - 25 mA; surge current: under 40 mA)
TB2
24VDC
X107 ...
X114
X115
X116
X119
3-62
3.2 B series product

3.2.1 B series system interface
3
 NC3□□ B series
NC300B_-MI-A_
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
(7)
(8)
(12)
(9)
(13) DC
24V (10)
ON
(14) (11)
OFF
(15)

Connects to high-speed serial I/O module: each module has 32 DI and
(1) Remote I/O 32 DO points.The maximum distasnce between stations is 20 m, and
the total length can be up to 160 m (= 20 m x 8).
(2) MPG
(3) Spindle 1
One set of spindle pulse output signal.
(4) Spindle 2
RS-485 serial port for communication with external devices.
Two sets of DA analog voltage output.
(5) CN1
Two sets of high-speed counter input.
Emergency stop contact.
(6) Local I/O
(7) USB For storing G-code programs.
3-63

When the button is pressed, the IES circuit is open, causing the
(11) Emergency stop
system to stop immediately.
3
CYCLE START /
(14) -
FEED HOLD
Y output.
NC300B_-MS-A_
( 1) (2) ( 3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
(8)
(11)
(9)
(12) (10)
(13)
3-64

3
(1) Remote I/O 32 DO points. The maximum distance between stations is 20 m, and
the total length can be 160 m (= 20 m x 8).
(2) MPG
(3) Spindle 1
(4) Spindle 2
(5) CN1
(6) Local I/O
(13) -
operation B
Y output.
3-65
NC301B-MS-A_
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
3 (7)
(8)
(11)
(9)
(12) (10)
(13)

Connects to high-speed serial I/O module: each module has 32 DI 32
(1) Remote I/O DO points. THhe maximum distance between stations is 20 m, and
(2) MPG
(3) Spindle 1
(4) Spindle 2
(5) CN1
(6) Local I/O
(12) -
operation panel B
3-66
Y output.
3
NC310B-MS-A_
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(11) (12) (10)

(1) Remote I/O 32 DO points.The maximum distance between stations is 20 m, and
(2) MPG
(3) Spindle 1
(4) Spindle 2
(5) CN1
(6) Local I/O
(12) -
operation panel B
3-67
3
Y output.
3-68
NC311B-MS-A_
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
3
(7)
(10)
(8)
(12) (9)
(11)

Connects to high-speed serial I/O module: each module has 32 DI 32
(1) Remote I/O DO points. The maximum distance between stations is 20 m, and the
total length can be up to 160 m (20 m x 8).
(2) MPG
8 DI points are available
(3) Spindle 1
(4) Spindle 2
(5) CN1
(6) Local I/O
(12) -
operation panel B
Y output.
3-69
3
 NC200 series
NC200B-MI-A_
(1) (2) (3) (4)
(5)
(6)
(9)
(7)
(8)
(10)
(11) (12) (13)

(2) CN1
(3) Spindle
(4) MPG
(11) Local I/O input terminal 5 input points.
3-70

Local I/O output
(12) 3 output points.
terminal
3
(13) 24 VDC power 24 VDC power input for supplying 24 VDC power to panel B.
3. Short-circuit IES (emergency stop) to have the controller ready for use.
 OPENCNC series
NC30EB(H)
(12) (13) (14)
(6)
(7)
(1)
(8)
(2)
(9)
(3)
(10)
(4)
(5) (11)

Three USB host connectors for connecting to the mouse, keyboard,
(2) USB
and flash drive.
(3) VGA For connecting to a screen.
(6) Indicators -
3-71

the total length can be up to 160 m (20 m x 8).
3 (8)
(9)
MPG
Spindle
(10) CN1
(12) Keypad I/O Connects to machine operation panel B.
(13) I/O 1 16 DI / 16 DO points.
(14) I/O 2 16 DI / 16 DO points.
3-72
3.2.2 B series controller connectors

3.2.2.1 NC3□□B series connectors
3
Connects to the 24 VDC power (24 W at 1 A).
Cable
Symbol Description
color
Power input for
0V, +24V, +24V Red +24 VDC power
controller

Pin No. Description
1st set
I/O 1 P19 - P34 DO points Y0 - Y15, 16 points in total (< 120 mA)
local I/O
P18 DI COM point; connects to +24 VDC or 0V
Power specifications: voltage < 24 VDC, current < 60 mA.
DI/DO range: X16 - X20, Y16 - Y20.

Pin No. Description
2nd set
local I/O
P18 DI COM point; connects to +24 VDC or 0V
Pin No. Description
P1 RS485_D+
P2 RS485_D-
P3 RS485_GND
P4 HIS 1
P5 HIS 2
CN1 terminal
CN1 P6 HIS COM
connector
P7 EMG
P8 GND
P9 DAC1
P10 DAC1_GND
P11 DAC2
P12 DAC2_GND
3-73

Includes Spindle 1 pulse output and pulse feedback.
Pin No. Description
3
P1 Feedback A+
P2 Feedback A-
P3 Feedback B+
P4 Feedback B-
P5 Feedback Z+
P6 Feedback Z-
SPINDLE 1 Spindle 1 connector P7 +24V_IN
P8 ALM_DI_IN
P9 SERVO_ON_DO_OUT
P10 DC +5V_OUT
P11 Command A+
P12 Command A-
P13 Command B+
P14 Command B-
P15 GND
Includes Spindle 2 pulse output and pulse feedback.
Pin No. Description
P1 Feedback A+
P2 Feedback A-
P3 Feedback B+
P4 Feedback B-
P5 Feedback Z+
P6 Feedback Z-
SPINDLE 2 Spindle 2 connector P7 +24V_IN
P8 ALM_DI_IN
P9 SERVO_ON_DO_OUT
P10 DC +5V_OUT
P11 Command A+
P12 Command A-
P13 Command B+
P14 Command B-
P15 GND
3-74

8 DI points and one set of differential type MPG signal input.
Pin No. Description
3
P2 - P9 DI (X32 - X39)
P10 DC +5V_OUT (< 200 mA)

MPG MPG connector
P11 XA+
P12 XA -
P13 XB+
P14 XB -
P15 GND
outupts, and the controller can connect to up to 8 modules.
Pin No. Description
P1 TX+
Remote I/O module
REMOTE I/O P2 TX-
connector
P3 RX-
P4 RX+
P5 GND
P6 SHIELD
Uses a RJ45 connector and can be used to connect to a PC
using general network cables.
Pin No. / color of end A PIin No. / color of end B
2: orange 2: orange
4: blue 4: blue
6: green 6: green
8: brown 8: brown
Ethernet connector.
Emergency stop
IES broken circuit. (Wired to the normally-closed contact of the
contact
Note:
1. The IES connector is the input contact of the emergency stop signal. Enable the EMG flag in a broken
circuit.
2. The power for the light of Power On / Power Off buttons is 24 VDC.
3-75
3.2.2.2 NC200B series connectors
3
Cable
Symbol Description
color
Power input for
0V, +24V, +24V Red +24 VDC power
controller
Power specifications for DI points:

voltage < 24 VDC, current: 8 - 25 mA.
MI series (24V power must be supplied to the machine
DI operation panel B.)
Pin No. Description
X112 - X116 DI points X112 - X116 (NPN), 5 points in total.
I/O
Power specifications for DO points:
MI series (24V power must be supplied to the machine
DO operation panel B.)
Pin No. Description
Y112 - Y114 DO points Y112 - Y114 (NPN), 3 points in total
Pin No. Description
P1 RS485_D+
P2 RS485_D-
P3 RS485_GND
P4 HIS 1
P5 HIS 2
CN1 terminal P6 HIS COM
CN1
connector
P7 EMG
P8 GND
P9 DAC1
P10 DAC1_GND
P11 DAC2
P12 DAC2_GND
3-76

Includes spindle pulse output and pulse feedback.
Pin No. Description
3
P1 Feedback A+
P2 Feedback A-
P3 Feedback B+
P4 Feedback B-
P5 Feedback Z+
P6 Feedback Z-
SPINDLE 1 Spindle connector P7 +24V_IN
P8 ALM_DI_IN
P9 SERVO_ON_DO_OUT
P10 DC +5V_OUT
P11 Command A+
P12 Command A-
P13 Command B+
P14 Command B-
P15 GND
Pin No. Description
P2 - P9 DI (X32 - X39)
P10 DC +5V_OUT (< 200 mA)
MPG MPG connector
P11 XA+
P12 XA -
P13 XB+
P14 XB -
P15 GND
Pin No. Description
P1 TX+
Remote I/O module
REMOTE I/O P2 TX-
connector
P3 RX-
P4 RX+
P5 GND
P6 SHIELD
3-77
3.2.2.3 OPENCNC series connectors
3
Cable
Symbol Description
color
Power input for
0V, +24V, controller +24V Red +24 VDC power

Pin No. Description
1st set
local I/O
P18 COM point for DI; connects to +24 VDC or 0V
P17 COM point for DO; fixed at 0V
DI/DO range: X16 - X31, Y16 - Y31.
Pin No. Description
2nd set
local I/O
P18 COM point for DI; connects to +24 VDC or 0V
P17 COM point for DO; fixed at 0V
Pin No. Description
P1 RS485_D+
P2 RS485_D-
P3 RS485_GND
P4 HIS 1
P5 HIS 2
CN1 terminal
CN1 P6 HIS COM
connector
P7 EMG
P8 GND
P9 DAC1
P10 DAC1_GND
P11 DAC2
P12 DAC2_GND
3-78

Includes spindle pulse output and pulse feedback.
Pin No Description
3
P1 Feedback A+
P2 Feedback A-
P3 Feedback B+
P4 Feedback B-
P5 Feedback Z+
P6 Feedback Z-
SPINDLE 1 Spindle connector P7 +24V_IN
P8 ALM_DI_IN
P9 SERVO_ON_DO_OUT
P10 DC +5V_OUT
P11 Command A+
P12 Command A-
P13 Command B+
P14 Command B-
P15 GND
Pin No. Description
P2 - P9 DI (X32 - X39)
P10 DC +5V_OUT (< 200 mA)
MPG MPG connector
P11 XA+
P12 XA -
P13 XB+
P14 XB -
P15 GND
Pin No. Description
P1 TX+
Remote I/O module
REMOTE I/O P2 TX-
connector
P3 RX-
P4 RX+
P5 GND
P6 SHIELD
3-79
3.2.3 Wiring for power connector
The wiring for the power of the B series NC controller is divided into two types: power supply
3
control with Power On / Off switches and direct power supply.
 Power supply control with Power On / Off switches
As shown in the following figure, Power On is the NO contact and Power Off is the NC
contact; MC (electromagnetic contactor) is the power relay.
R S T (220V)
Circuit breaker
(connect to Power On contact ) Connect to
Power Off
contact
24 VDC power ON OFF
supply
DCOUT
ACIN
GND
MC
MC
24 VDC power
supply
DCOUT 24 VDC
ACIN
GND
 Direct power supply
24 VDC power
supply
DCOUT 24 VDC
AC
power ACIN
supply FG
FG
3-80
3.2.4 Wiring for spindle pulse output connector
The B series NC controller has the spindle pulse output for controlling the external spindle
3
speed.
Note: the NC3□□ series all support 2 pulse spindle ports; other NC200 and OPENCNC models only support
one pulse spindle port.
Pin assignment for NC3□□ series models
(1) Spindle pulse output connector (female); (2) Spindle pulse output connector (male)
Pin assignment for B series NC200 models
3-81

1 Feedback A+ Pulse feedback signal A+
2 Feedback A- Pulse feedback signal A-
3 Feedback B+ Pulse feedback signal B+
4 Feedback B- Pulse feedback signal B-
5 Feedback Z+ Pulse feedback signal Z+
6 Feedback Z- Pulse feedback signal Z-
7 +24V_IN 24V input
ALL Spindle 8 ALM_DI_IN ALM DI
9 SERVO_ON_DO_OUT Servo on signal output
10 +5 VDC_OUT 5V voltage output
11 Command A+ Pulse command A+
12 Command A- Pulse command A-
13 Command B+ Pulse command B+
14 Command B- Pulse command B-
15 GND GND
3-82
Settings for spindle pulse output are as follows:
1. Pr399 setting
3
Description Pulse control
Spindle function
1
0: off; 1: on
0: off 1
Spindle output mode
1
Speed control mode
1
1: PUU
1
0
0
0: -10V to +10V 0
2. In the channel setting screen (CONFIG), enable SP1 and set its port number to 10; enable
SP2 and set its port number to 11.
3-83
3.2.5 Wiring for RS-485 connector
The B series NC controller has one RS-485 connector for serial communication with external
3
devices.
Pin assignment for B series NC3□□ models
(1) CN1 connector (female); (2) RS-485 connector (male)

1 D+
NC3_ _ CN1 2 D-
3 RS485-GND
3-84

1 D+
NC200 CN1 2 D-
3 RS485-GND

1 D+
NC30EB_ CN1 2 D-
3 RS485-GND
3-85
3.2.6 Wiring for spindle analog feedback connector
The NC3□□ series all support 2 external device pulse feedbacks; other NC200 and OPENCNC
3
models only support one pulse spindle feedback.
3-86

1 Feedback A+ Pulse feedback signal A+
2 Feedback A- Pulse feedback signal A-
3 Feedback B+ Pulse feedback signal B+
4 Feedback B- Pulse feedback signal B-
5 Feedback Z+ Pulse feedback signal Z+
ALL Spindle 6 Feedback Z- Pulse feedback signal Z-
7 +24V_IN 24V input
8 ALM_DI_IN ALM DI
9 SERVO_ON_DO_OUT Servo on voltage signal output
10 +5 VDC_OUT 5V voltage output
15 GND GND
3-87
3.2.7 Wiring for spindle analog output connector
The B series NC controllers have 2 sets of analog voltage output, including two control methods
3
shown as follows:
Method one: controls the rotation speed with spindle S code with acceleration / deceleration
planning.
Method two: controls the voltage with special D register (range: -10V to +10V) without
acceleration / deceleration planning.
Pin assignment for NC3_ _B series models
(1) CN1 connector (female); (2) CN1 analog output connector (male)
Pin assignment for NC200 B series models
(1) CN1 connector (female); (2) CN1 analog output connector (male)
3-88
(1) CN1 analog output connector (female); (2) CN1 analog output connector (male)

9 DAC_1 1st set of analog voltage output
10 DAC_1_GND 1st set of DAC output_GND
ALL CN1
11 DAC_2 2nd set of analog voltage output
12 DAC_2_GND 2nd set of DAC output_GND
Control method one: S code analog output setting instructions are as follows:
1. Pr399 setting
Description Servo control Analog control
Spindle function
1 1
0: off; 1: on
0: off 1 0 or 1
Spindle output mode
0 2
Speed control mode
1 1
1: PUU
0 1
0 1
0 0
0：-10V to +10V 0 0 or 1
2. In the channel setting screen (CONFIG), enable SP1 and set its port number to 10.
Note: port number 10 is dedicated for analog output.
3-89
Pr399 [Spindle output voltage] = 0; -10V to +10V voltage control.

+10 VDC Maximum rotation speed (forward)
3 0 VDC
-10 VDC
Zero speed
Maximum rotation speed (reverse)
Note: this control mode can be used for closed loop and open loop controls, and can satisfy the tapping
and threading functions.
Pr399 [Spindle output voltage] = 1; 0V to +10V voltage control.

+10 VDC Maximum rotation speed
0 VDC Zero speed
Note: this control mode is only applicable to open loop control and is unable to control spindle forward /
reverse rotation. If there is encoder feedback signal, the threading function can be used but not
the tapping function.
3. In the channel setting screen (CONFIG), enable SP1 and set its port number to 10; enable
SP2 and set its port number to 11.
Note: the DAC_2 of the NC200 and OPENCNC series can only be used for open circuits; it cannot be
used for receiving rotation speed feedback.
Control method two: corresponding special D registers for controlling the voltage are as follows:
Group
Model Symbol Function description
number
DAC_1 D1125 Range: -1000 to +1000 (-10V to +10V)
ALL CN1
DAC_2 D1114 Unit: 0.01
Note: the DAC_2 pin of the NC200 and OPENCNC series can only be used for open circuits; it cannot be
used for receiving rotation speed feedback.
3-90
3.2.8 Wiring for HSI connector
The B series NC controller has two sets of hardware high-speed counter signal input. For the
3
wiring of high-speed counter input (bi-directional coupling), the maximum input bandwidth is up
to 5 MHz; voltage: 22 - 26V; permissible current: 8 - 20 mA; surge current: below 50 mA.
The corresponding special M relay for HSI_1 is M2142, which is applicable to G31 Skip
command.
Settings of relevant parameters:

Parameter
Parameter name Function
address
Bit 0 0: NC; 1: NO
contact
Pr25
Bit 1 0: NC; 1: NO
contact
Bit 4 0: off; 1: on
switch
Pr46
Bit 5 0: off; 1: on
switch
Pr307 Bit 4 - 5 G31 input source 0: off; 1: HSI 1; 2: HSI 2; 3: HSI 1 & 2
Controller
24V
Controller
24V
Note: the connection direction of the external power input for HSI does not affect the operation.
(1) CN1 connector (female); (2) CN1 high-speed counter input connector (male)
3-91
(1) CN1 connector (female); (2) CN1 high-speed counter input connector (male)
(1) CN1 high-speed counter input connector (female); (2) CN1 high-speed counter input connector (male)

ALL HSI
High-speed counter COM; connects to
6 HSI_COM
+24 VDC or 0V
3-92
3.2.9 Wiring for emergency stop
The B series NC controller has one set of emergency stop signal input.
Pin assignment for NC3□□ series, NC200, and OPENCNC series models
3
(1) CN1 connector (female); (2) CN1 pin definition

7 EMG EMG (+5 VDC output)
ALL CN1
8 GND GND
Note: EMG can output +5V power and is able to form a circuit with GND for immediate use.
3-93
3.2.10 Wiring for MPG connector
The B series NC controller has one MPG connector for receiving MPG pulses. This connector
3
supplies +5 VDC power which directly supplies power to the MPG.
Pin assignment for NC3□□ series models
3-94

X32; recommended for the X axis
2 DI_1
selection input
X33; recommended for the Y axis
3 DI_2
selection input
X34; recommended for the Z axis
4 DI_3
selection input
5 DI_4
selection input
X36; recommended for magnification
6 DI_5
x10 selection input
NC3_ _
NC200 MPG X37; recommended for magnification
7 DI_6
x100 selection input
OPENCNC
X38; recommended for the A axis
8 DI_7
selection input
X39; recommended for the B axis
9 DI_8
selection input
10 5V_OUT 5 VDC_OUT
11 XA+ XA+
12 XA- XA-
13 XB+ XB+
14 XB- XB-
15 5V_GND 5 VDC_GND
3-95
The signal type determines the wiring for MPG, including single-ended type (EHDW-BA6SI) and
differential type (EHDW-BE6SI).
3
Single-ended MPG pulse signal wiring diagram
5V_OUT P10 DC 5V
XA+ P11 DC 0V
XA- P12 A
XB+ P13 B
XB- P14
5V_GND P15
5V_OUT P10 DC 5V
XA+ P11 DC 0V
XA- P12 A
XB+ P13 B
XB- P14
5V_GND P15
Differential type MPG pulse signal wiring diagram
5V_OUT P10 DC 5V
XA+ P11 A
XA- P12 A-
XB+ P13 B
XB- P14 B-
5V_GND P15 DC 0V
3-96
MPG switch wiring diagram
 The 5V power is supplied from the MPG contact
MPG
Axis X P2 (X32)
Circuit of MPG contact
Internal circuit
Axis Y
Axis Z EXT_24V
X1
5V_OUT
X 10
X 100
5 VDC
5V_GND
COM
 The 24V power is supplied externally; EXT_24 can connect to +24V or 0V
MPG Circuit of MPG contact MPG Circuit of MPG contact
Axis X P2 (X32) Axis X P2 (X32)

Internal circuit
Internal circuit
Axis Y Axis Y
Axis Z EXT_24V Axis Z EXT_24V
X1 X1
5V_OUT 5V_OUT
X 10 X 10
24 VDC 24 VDC
X 100 X 100
5 VDC 5 VDC
5V_GND 5V_GND
COM COM
3-97
3.2.11 Wiring for remote I/O connector
After the remote I/O module is connected to the NC series controller, there are 256 output and
3
256 input points available. For every additional station, its I/O address will offset backwards for
32 points. Up to 8 modules can be connected simultaneously, providing a maximum of 256
output points and 256 input points.
RS422
X256 X288 X320 X352

Y256 Y288 Y320 Y352
X384 X416 X448 X480

Y384 Y416 Y448 Y480
3-98
Remote I/O connector and pin definitions
Pin No. Function description

1 TX+
2 TX-
3 RX-
4 RX+
5 GND
6 SHIELD
Wiring diagram for remote I/O connector
3-99
The remote I/O module is mainly divided into two types: optical coupling type and relay type; the
definitions of their model names are as follows:
3 NC - EIO - T 32 32
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
(1) Series name
(2) Product name
(3) Type:
T: optical coupling type (allowable current: under 50 mA; surge current: under 100 mA).
R: relay type (according to relay specifications; allowable current: 5A or 16A).
(4) Number of available input points for this model
(5) Number of available output points for this model
(6) Allowable current value for this model:

None: 5A (G2R relay)
A: 16A (G2R relay)
B: 16A (IDEC relay)
The remote I/O modules are as follows:

Model Description Remark
G2R relay
points
5A
G2R relay
points
16A
IDEC relay
points
16A
G2R relay
points
5A
G2R relay
points
16A
IDEC relay
points
16A
Allowable current:
NC-EIO-R3232 Relay type IO module with 32 input and 32 output points
5A
Optical coupling type IO module with 32 input and 32 output Allowable current:
NC-EIO-T3232
points 50 mA
3-100
Precautions for wiring the remote I/O module are as follows:
(1) The COM point of the input terminal is used for signal current; DC 24V or 0V power input is
3
strictly prohibited.
(2) Users can choose whether the input signal is H (PNP) or L (NPN) type with the H / L switch
according to the specifications of the external sensor. When H (PNP) is selected, the COM
point will provide +24V; and when L (NPN) is selected, the COM point will be 0V.
L (NPN)
VDD
COM +
GND
GND
COM
VDD
H (PNP)
SW1 = H (PNP) SW1 = L (NPN)

COM COM
Direction of current Direction of current
X256 X257 X258 X259
COM+ R COM+ R
R R
Internal circuit
(3) Up to 8 remote I/O modules can be connected at the same time; the station number of the
module can be switched by using the knob on the circuit board. 0 = station 1, 1 = station 2,
2 = station 3 and so on, to a maximum of 7 = station 8.
When the knob of the module is set to 8 (= station 9) and 9 (= station 10), the setting of 8 is
regarded as the setting of 0 (= station 1), and the setting of 9 is regarded as the setting of 1
(= station 2). Do not rotate the knob to the same numbers for different modules
simultaneously.
Station number knob
3-101
3.2.11.1 NC-EIO-R2010
X256 X258
3
GND GND
24V 24V
X257 X259
Y256 Y257
DI wiring example description
(1) Switch the H / L switch to L (NPN), and short-circuit the GND (common specification: blue
wire) of the sensor with the GND (0V) of the same power system.

Brown
Blue
GND
X257 X259
24V 24V
3-102
(1) Switch the H / L switch to H (PNP), and short-circuit the Vcc (common specification: brown
3
wire) of the sensor with the +24V of the same power system.

Blue
X256 X258
GND GND
Brown
X259
24V
Wiring example for the proximity switch of NPN three-wire system:
contact.

Brown
Black
Blue
GND
X257 X259
24V 24V
3-103
3
contact.
Blue
Black
Brown
X256 GND
X257 X259
24V 24V
start operating.
Y256 Y257
DC
R Lamp
3-104
3.2.11.2 NC-EIO-R3216
COM COM
COM COM
3
X256 X258 X259
X257
Y256 Y257
(1) Switch the H / L switch to L (NPN), the COM point will provide 0V, connect the GND

Brown
Blue
COM
X256 X258
X257 X259
3-105
3

Blue
Brown
COM
X256 X258
X257 X259
(3) Connect the GND (common specification: blue wire) of the sensor to COM (0V).
contact.

Brown
VDC+24V
Black
Blue
COM
X256 X258
X257 X259
3-106
3
(3) Connect the GND (common specification: blue cable) of the sensor to 0V.
contact.

Blue
Black GND (0V)
Brown
COM
X256 X258
X257 X259
start operating.
Y256 Y257
DC
R Lamp
3-107
3.2.11.3 NC-EIO-R3232
SW3
3 X256 ~ X263
L H L NPN H PNP
L H L H L H L H
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4
Y256 ~ Y263
Y256 ~ Y263
(1) Switch the short circuit jumper to L (NPN), and short-circuit the GND (common specification:
blue wire) of the sensor with the GND (0V) of the same power system.

Brown
Blue
GND (0V)
X256 X263
3-108
(1) Switch the short circuit jumper to H (PNP), and short-circuit the Vcc (common specification:
3
brown wire) of the sensor with the +24V of the same power system.

Blue
Brown
VDC+24V
X256 X263
(1) Switch the short circuit jumper to L (NPN).
system).
system).
contact.

Brown
VDC+24V
Black
Blue
GND (0V)
X256 X263
3-109
(1) Switch the short circuit jumper to H (PNP).
3
system).
system).
contact.
Blue
Black GND (0V)
Brown
VDC+24V
X256 X263
start operating.
Y256
Y256
DC
R Lamp
3-110
3.2.11.4 NC-EIO-T3232
COM COM
COM COM
3
X256 X258
X257 X259
Y257 Y259
Y256 Y258
G0 G2
G1 G3

Brown
Blue
COM
X256 X258
X257 X259
3-111
3

Blue
Brown
COM
X256 X258
X257 X259
contact.

Brown
VDC+24V
Black
Blue
COM
X256 X258
X257 X259
3-112
3
contact.
Blue
Black GND (0V)
Brown
COM
X256 X258
X257 X259
(1) Connect 0V to one of the output contacts, and the other contact will be DO.
(2) Connect DO to the GND (-) of the external device, and connect the Vcc (+) of the external
device to the +24V of the external power to form a circuit.
start operating.
Y256
G0
DC
R Lamp
3-113
3.2.12 Wiring for local I/O connector
For providing a more flexible I/O configuration, some B series NC controllers have external I/O
3
connectors.
P1 P2(X17) P1 P2(X17)
DC
DC
P18(DI_COM) P18(DI_COM)
P33 P34 P33 P34
DI wiring for local I/O
P1 P2
P17(DO_COM)
DC
Load
P33(Y14) P34
DO wiring for local I/O
3-114
I/O 1 I/O 2
3
Pin 5 X4 Pin 6 X5 Pin 5 X20 Pin 6 -
Pin 7 X6 Pin 8 X7 Pin 7 - Pin 8 -
Pin 9 X8 Pin 10 X9 Pin 9 - Pin 10 -
Pin 11 X10 Pin 12 X11 Pin 11 - Pin 12 -
Pin 13 X12 Pin 14 X13 Pin 13 - Pin 14 -
Pin 15 X14 Pin 16 X15 Pin 15 - Pin 16 -
Pin 17 DO_COM Pin 18 DI_COM Pin 17 DO_COM Pin 18 DI_COM
Pin 23 Y4 Pin 24 Y5 Pin 23 Y20 Pin 24 -
Pin 25 Y6 Pin 26 Y7 Pin 25 - Pin 26 -
Pin 27 Y8 Pin 28 Y9 Pin 27 - Pin 28 -
Pin 29 Y10 Pin 30 Y11 Pin 29 - Pin 30 -
Pin 31 Y12 Pin 32 Y13 Pin 31 - Pin 32 -
Pin 33 Y14 Pin 34 Y15 Pin 33 - Pin 34 -
3-115
DI DO
Pin 1 X112 Pin 2 X113 Pin 1 Y112 Pin 2 Y113
Pin 3 X114 Pin 4 X115 Pin 3 Y114 - -
Pin 5 X116 - -
DI wiring; connect to an external power supply.
Note: 24V power must be supplied to the machine operation panel B.
3-116
DO wiring; connect to an external power supply.
3
Note: 24V power must be supplied to the machine operation panel B.
P1 P2(X17) P1 P2(X17)
DC
DC
P18(DI_COM) P18(DI_COM)
P33 P34 P33 P34
DI wiring for local I/O
3-117
P1 P2
3 P17(DO_COM)
DC
Load
P33(Y14) P34
DO wiring for local I/O
I/O 1 I/O 2
Pin 17 DO_COM Pin 18 DI_COM Pin 17 DO_COM Pin 18 DI_COM
3-118
3.2.13 Wiring for I/O connector on machine operation panel B of NC3□□

series models
3
NC-PAN-300BM-PS
3-119
NC-PAN-301BM-PS
3 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 0
Y108
0
Y109
Y110
Y111
0 0
0 0
3-120
NC-PAN-310BM-PE
3-121
NC-PAN-310BM-PE
3-122
Wiring of the Power On / Power Off switches
Description of the connector
The power indicator requires a 24 VDC system; to light up the Power On indicator, +24 VDC power
must be inputted to the ONL+ pin and 0V must be inputted to the ONL- pin; to light up the Power
Off indicator, +24 VDC must be inputted to the OFFL+ pin and 0V must be inputted to the OFFL-
pin.
24VDC
power supply
ON OFF
DCOUT
MC
ACIN
GND
M
C
MC
When the Power On key is pressed, the circuit between ONA1 and ONA2 is closed; when the
Power Off key is pressed, the circuit between OFFB1 and OFFB2 is open.
3-123
3-124
Table of Group Function
This chapter provides tables of group function for you to quickly view all of the functions
of the NC series controller.
4.1 System group function table ································································4-2

4.2 Machine operation panel A - function of keys ········································· 4-11
4.3 Machine operation panel B - function of keys ········································ 4-13
4.4 Table of corresponding buttons (for OPENCNC models) ·························· 4-15
4-1
Table of Group Function Milling Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual
4.1 System group function table

Available in all modes
Position (POS) function
4 Layer 1
ABS
(absolute coordinates)
Layer 2
CLR ALL
Layer 3
-
Layer 4
-
CLR X - -
REL
(the clear function of the CLR Y - -
corresponding axis is CLR Z - -
available only when you CLR A - -
connect the axis)
CLR B - -
CLR C - -
MECH
- - -
(machine coordinates)
EDIT mode
Program (PRG) function_File manage
Layer 1 Layer 2 Layer 3 Layer 4
COPY F - - -
PASTE - - -
DEL (file / folder) - - -
SEL TOGL / CANCEL - - -
ALL SEL TOGL /
- - -
CANCEL
File Manage - - -
NAME - -
SORT SIZE - -
DATE - -
NEW F - - -
FOLDER - - -
RENAME - - -
FIND F - - -
MERGE - - -
MACRO - - -
INT MRO - - -
DXF Transform - -
4-2
Milling Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Table of Group Function
EDIT mode
PRG_File edit
4
COPY - -
PASTE - -
DEL - -
UNDO - -
B START - -
File edit B END - -
LABLE - -
NEXT -
PREV -
STRING
REPLACE -
Replace all -
AUTO mode
PRG
SF set - - -
START RUN - -
LOAD - -
BARCODE CLEAR - -
CLEAR ALL - -
LOAD - -
MODE CHG - -
CLEAR ALL - -
FILE QUEUE
ADD FILE - -
MOVE - -
DISP CHG - -
→ - -
← - -
SEL TOGL - -
File Manage ALL SEL TOGL - -
DEL - -
RENAME - -
FOLDER - -
SORT - -
4-3
JOG / MPG mode - Program edit

PRG
SF set - - -
4
POSITION - -
LINEAR - -
P1 -
CIRCULAR P2 -
TEACH P3 -
DEL - -
SAVE - -
NEW FILE - -
SET - -
MDI mode - Program edit

PRG
LOAD - - -
SAVE - - -
CLEAR - - -
HOME mode - Program edit

PRG
SF set - - -

OFS
CLR REL -
CLR ALL -
SET L -
AUTO Point1
SET L/2 Point2
SET
SET P -
ABS - -
INC - -
X1 -
COORD
X2 -
Y1 -
SQUARE
Y2 -
SET -
Z -
P1 -
P2 -
CIRCLE P3 -
SET -
Z -
4-4
OFS
ABS - -
INC - -
4
SET H - -
CUTTER H/D -
WEAR -
CLEAR
LIFE -
ALL -
SET -
MAGA1
(functions is Layer 3 are RST ALL -
only available in JOG LOCK -
mode)
UNLOCK -
MAGA
SET -
MAGA2
(functions is Layer 3 are RST ALL -
only available in JOG LOCK -
mode)
UNLOCK -
LOCAL - -
GLOBAL - -
HOLD - -
MACRO
EXTEND - -
MECH - -
ABS - -

GRA
CENT SET - - -
WIN RST - - -
UP - -
DOWN - -
LEFT - -
RIGHT - -
WIN SET
ZM IN - -
ZM OUT - -
OK - -
CANCEL - -
X-Y / Y-Z / X-Z / X-Y-Z - - -
GRAPHIC - - -
PREVIEW
- - -
(AUTO mode only)
CLEAR - - -

ALM
ALARM - - -
HISTORY CLR ALL - -
4-5

DGN
4
SET NR - -
PROCESS CLR TIME - -
CLR NR - -
DEL -
US DEC -
USR VAR HEX -
S DEC -
FLOAT -
USR VAR SYS VAR - -
DEL -
US DEC -
M VAR HEX -
S DEC -
FLOAT -
X -
Y -
M -
BIT
A -
T -
C -
US DEC -
HEX -
REG
S DEC -
FLOAT -
US DEC -
HEX -
DEV MON
S DEC -
FLOAT -
MLC
LD -
LDI -
LDP -
LDF -
OUT -
APP -
— -
EDITOR
(EDIT mode only) ｜ -
DEL V-LN -
ADD LN -
DEL LN -
DEL -
LABEL -
TABLE -
4-6
DGN
X
Y
4
M
A
T
C
SYMBOL
D
P
I
DEL
EDITOR COPY
PASTE
MLC SAVE -
IMPORT IMPORT
EXPORT
EXPORT
NEW FILE
JUMP TO -
SELECT -
CUT -
COPY -
PASTE -
ON -
SET
OFF -
(EDIT mode only)
RUN/STP -
JUMP TO - -
SRV MON - -
I/O MON - -
SYS VAR - -
SYS VAR -
CH VAR -
AXIS VAR -
SYS MON
IF VAR -
VAR MON MLC VAR -
US DEC -
BIN -
HEX -
S DEC -
SYSTEM - -
FW SN - -
STATUS
HW SN - -
M INFO DEL -
4-7
DGN
LOCK / UNLOCK -
S SCP
SYS CHK -
4
PWD CHG -
LOCK / UNLOCK -
RST U1 -
RST U2 -
M SCP
OK
FUN ENA CANCEL
DEFAULT
PWD
RESET -
PWD CHG -
U1 SCP
LOCK / UNLOCK -
PWD CHG -
U2 SCP
LOCK / UNLOCK -
SETTING -
RELEASE -
EXPIRE
PWD CHG
EXP SCP
LOCK / UNLOCK
NEXT AX - -
READ - -
COMPUTE - -
WR GAIN - -
WR Notch - -
RUN - -
TUNING JOG← - -
(JOG or MPG mode only) JOG→ - -
POS1 - -
POS2 - -
TAP SET(1)
TAP RIV -
TAP SET(2)
SERVO READ -
SYN MOV POS SET -
TEXT WR - - -
IMPORT - - -
EXPORT - -
EXPORT SEL ALL - -
CLR ALL - -
LOGO WR - - -
4-8

Parameter (PAR) function
4
PROCESS - - -
OPERATE - - -
MAGA - - -
SPINDLE - - -
MACHINE - - -
HOME - - -
ETH. DEFAULT - -
OK - -
um - -
COMP um+ - -
IMPORT - -
IMPORT+ - -
DEFAULT - -
SYSTEM
COLOR - -
DEFAULT - -
MLC
COLOR - -
DEFAULT - -
GRAPHIC
COLOR - -
SERVO READ - -
SEARCH - - -
CONFIG
(except AUTO and MDI OK - -
modes)
SET RIO
(except AUTO and MDI OK - -
modes)
SAVE - -
DEL PAR - -
DEL GRP - -
PAR GRP WRT PAR - -
RED PAR - -
SRT PAR - -
AVERAGE - -
4-9

Software (SOFT) function (without physical panel)
Tool magazine
Program execution MPG simulation Spindle forward
forward
4
Tool magazine
Stop execution Machine lock Spindle stop
backward
Single block Chip discharge
Panel functions Program preview Spindle reverse
execution conveyor forward
Chip discharge
Optional stop Machine lock -
conveyor reverse
Single block skip Z axis lock Air blow Spindle positioning
Coolant Light Program protect Limit release
Increase
- - -
progressively
Magnification Decrease
- - -
adjustment progressively
100% - - -
0% - - -
X← - - -
X→ - - -
Y↗ - - -
Axis operation
Y↙ - - -
Z↑ - - -
Z↓ - - -
Software (SOFT) function (with physical panel)

Chip discharge conveyor
Program preview -
forward
Chip discharge conveyor
Function lock -
reverse
Panel functions Z axis lock Automatic shutdown -
Machine lock Program protect -
Spindle positioning Customization 1 -
Air blow Customization 2 -
4-10
4.2 Machine operation panel A - function of keys

Symbol Description Supported mode / group
The POS group key. Press to display the screen

All modes and groups
4
of coordinate setting.
The PRG group key. Press to display the screen

of program editing.
The OFS group key. Press to display the screen

of coordinate setting and tool offset setting.
The DGN group key. Press to display the screen

of diagnosis, system parameter, and system All modes and groups
status.
The ALM group key. Press to display the screen

of alarm display.
The GRA group key. Press to display the screen

of graphic display.
The PAR group key. Press to display the screen

of parameter setting.
The SOFT group key. Press to display the

configured panel screen.
Reset key All modes and groups
Axis position and command code keys PRG
Numeric keys (operation symbols) PRG, OFS, DGN
Decimal point key (operation symbol) PRG, OFS
Negative sign key (operation symbol) PRG, OFS
PAGE UP and PAGE DN (page down) keys PRG, OFS, DGN
Cursor keys (operation symbols) PRG, OFS, DGN
Home (end) key PRG
Space key PRG
Shift key PRG
Delete (insert) key PRG
4-11
Symbol Description Supported mode / group
Back space key PRG
4
Enter key PRG, OFS, DGN
Exit key PRG, DGN
Parentheses key PRG
Left and right function keys All modes and groups
Function keys All modes and groups
4-12
4.3 Machine operation panel B - function of keys

Symbol Description
AUTO mode: for program execution
EDIT mode: for file management and program editing 4

JOG mode: for manual operation of the machine tool
MPG mode: for operating the axis direction of the machine tool with the MPG
MDI mode: for simple program input and execution
Home mode: for rapid homing to the machine origin
Rapid traverse mode: executes axis movements according to the set rapid
override
X axis direction: in JOG mode, manually operate the X axis towards positive or
negative direction
Y axis direction: in JOG mode, manually operate the Y axis towards positive or
negative direction
Z axis direction: in JOG mode, manually operate the Z axis towards positive or
negative direction
Rotation axis direction: in JOG mode, manually operate the rotation axis in
forward or reverse direction
Spindle forward: manually run the spindle in forward direction
Spindle stop: manually stop the spindle rotation
Spindle reverse: manually run the spindle in reverse direction
Feedrate / JOG override: increment / decrement

Feedrate / JOG
Rapid override: increment / decrement

Rapid override
Spindle override: increment / decrement

Spindle override
Single block execution: execute one single block at a time and then stop
Limit cancellation: the operation key for clearing the alarm when the limit
protection is triggered
Single block skip: skip one single block when there is a “/” symbol in the block
4-13
Symbol Description
Tool magazine forward: press this button to rotate the tool magazine for one
position in the forward direction
4
Tool magazine reverse: press this button to rotate the tool magazine for one
position in the reverse direction
Optional stop: stop at the specified block if there is an M01 command in the block
MPG simulation: during program execution, enable this function to control the
execution speed with MPG
Coolant switch: coolant ON / coolant OFF
Light switch: light ON / light OFF
4-14
4.4 Table of corresponding buttons (for OPENCNC models)

NC key PC keyboard Description
F1 - F8 (Function Key) F1 - F8 Function keys
4
► (Function Key) Tab Next page (of the function bar)
◄ (Function Key) Ctrl + Tab Previous page (of the function bar)
POS Ctrl + F1 The POS group key
PRG Ctrl + F2 The PRG group key
OFS Ctrl + F3 The OFS group key
DGN Ctrl + F4 The DGN group key
ALM Ctrl + F5 The ALM group key
GRA Ctrl + F6 The GRA group key
PAR Ctrl + F7 The PAR group key
SOFT Ctrl + F8 The SOFT group key
Numeric keys Numeric keys -
Alphabetic keys Alphabetic keys -
Symbol keys Symbol keys -
Direction keys Direction keys -
PAGE UP / PAGE DN Page Up / Page Down -
BACK SPACE Backspace -
SPACE Space -
DEL / INS Delete / Insert -
SHIFT Shift -
HOME / END Home / End -
ENTER Enter -
EXIT Esc -
RESET Ctrl + Esc -
- F12 Help (function descriptions for keys)
SHIFT + GRA \ Screen capturing
4-15
4-16
Introduction to
NC System Modes
This chapter introduces the seven system modes supported by the NC controller.
5.1 Auto mode (AUTO) ·············································································5-2

5.2 Program edit mode (EDIT) ···································································5-2
5.3 Manual input mode (MDI) ·····································································5-2
5.4 MPG mode (MPG) ··············································································5-2
5.5 Jog mode (JOG) ················································································5-3
5.6 Rapid mode (RAPID) ··········································································5-3
5.7 Homing mode (HOME) ········································································5-3
5.8 Group screen overview ········································································5-4
5-1
Introduction to NC System Modes Milling Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual
5.1 Auto mode (AUTO)

To execute a program, you have to open the file, switch the system to AUTO mode, and then
5
press CYCLE START. In this mode, you can verify the machining program, cutting conditions,
and position coordinates before execution as well as avoid unexpected execution by accidentally
pressing CYCLE START in other modes. This mode is only for program execution rather than
program editing or manual axis movement.
5.2 Program edit mode (EDIT)

You can edit a program in EDIT mode. In this mode, the editing functions in PRG group are
available for you to edit the program. In addition, program execution and manual axis movement
are not available in this mode.
5.3 Manual input mode (MDI)

In MDI mode, you can enter and execute a single block of program in the PRG group screen. In
this mode, you can enter up to 14 program blocks in the PRG screen. General program editing,
program execution, and manual axis operation are not available in this mode.
5.4 MPG mode (MPG)

In MPG mode, you can use the external MPG to manually operate the axes promptly and
accurately. Program editing, program execution, and jog operation are not available in this mode.
5-2
Milling Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Introduction to NC System Modes
5.5 Jog mode (JOG)

In JOG mode, press the axis direction keys on machine operation panel B to have the axes jog.
5
Set the jog speed and moving distance with the JOG override key. You can move the work platform
in high speed with the rapid traverse override key and axis direction keys; the axis moving speed is
determined by the rapid override setting. Program execution and editing are not available in this
mode.
5.6 Rapid mode (RAPID)

When in JOG mode, pressing RAPID during operation can switch the JOG speed to the set rapid
traverse override.
5.7 Homing mode (HOME)

In HOME mode, you can return the axes to the machine origin by simply pressing the
corresponding axis direction keys on machine operation panel B. After restarting the controller,
you should set the system to HOME mode to have each axis return to the machine origin before
executing the program. If you do not perform homing after starting the controller, program
execution is prohibited.
5-3
5.8 Group screen overview

A full range of information is provided on the screens of function groups of this controller. The
5
following introduces some functions in the group screens.
 Position (POS) group
(3) (1) (2)
(4)
(5)
(6) (11)
(7) (8) (9) (10)
Figure 5.8.1
(1) Name of current program (6) Current system mode

(2) Currently executed program line (7) Alarm display
(3) Current group function (8) Rapid traverse override
(4) Current coordinates (9) Feedrate override
(5) Machining information: (10) Spindle override
Spindle speed: command value (11) System status
Cutting feedrate: command value
Spindle load rate: %
Actual speed: rpm
Actual feedrate: mm/min
Dwell time: G-code dwell time
Command tool number: tool number specified in
G-code
Spindle tool number: number of the tool on the spindle
Standby tool number: system standby tool number
(11) displays the current status of the system for your reference. There are 7 system statuses with
the display priority as follows: MLC stop > SV NO RDY (servo not ready) > Emg Stop (emergency
stop) > PROC (in progress) > RUN (in execution) > STOP (program stops) > Ready.
5-4
 Program (PRG) group
AUTO mode:
5
(3) (1) (2)
(8)
(4)
(9)
(5)
(6)
(7)
Figure 5.8.2
(1) Name of current program (8) F.act: actual feedrate

(2) Currently executed S.act: actual spindle speed
program line D: tool radius compensation
(3) Current group function number
(4) Currently executed H: tool length compensation
program content number
(5) Coordinate information T: tool number
during program execution F: feedrate
(6) Current system mode S: spindle speed
(7) Current override settings t: dwell time
CYC: cycle time
(9) Current command status
5-5
EDIT mode:
5 (1)
(2)
Figure 5.8.3
(1) File list: displays folders and program files
(2) File information: displays the size and modification date and time
of the file or folder
(1)
Figure 5.8.4
(1) File content: displays the content of the program file
5-6
MDI mode
(3)
5
(1)
(4)
(2)
Figure 5.8.5
(1) MDI program

(2) Information of cutting feedrate, spindle speed, and compensation number
(3) Coordinate information: absolute / residual coordinates
(4) Status of currently executed commands
 Offset (OFS) group
Coordinate information:
(2)
(1)
Figure 5.8.6
(1) Workpiece coordinate setting: offset coordinates, G54 - G59 coordinate system
(2) Coordinate information display: machine / relative / absolute coordinates
5-7
Tool information:
5
(1)
(3)
(4)
(2)
Figure 5.8.7
(1) Compensation number (H / D)

(2) Input field for compensation data
(3) Compensation information: tool length, tool radius, length compensation,
and radius compensation
(4) Auxiliary display: actual position of the current Z axis machine coordinate
 Diagnosis (DGN) Group

Servo Tuning:
(4)
(1)
(5)
(2) (3)
Figure 5.8.8
(1) Servo parameter: numbers and names of servo parameters

(2) Results after gain tuning: displays the calculation results of auto tuning
(3) System settings: displays the current servo settings
(4) Position setting: Position 1 / Position 2
(5) Tuning conditions
5-8
MLC Operation / Edit:
(1)
(2)
Figure 5.8.9
(1) MLC program
(2) Input field for command name
 Alarm (ALM) Group

(1)
(2)
(3)
Figure 5.8.10
(1) Alarm message

(2) Sequence of alarm occurrence
(3) Alarm code
5-9
 Graph (GRA) Group
5 (1)
(2)
Figure 5.8.11
(1) Path diagram: displays the program path

(2) Coordinate information: machine / absolute coordinates
5-10
Position (POS) Group
POS group displays the axes positions, which are represented in absolute, relative,
and machine coordinates.
6.1 Absolute coordinates ······································································6-3

6.2 Relative coordinates ·······································································6-3
6.3 Machine coordinates·······································································6-3
6-1
Position (POS) Group Milling Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual
POS group displays the axes positions, which are represented in absolute, relative, and machine
coordinates. It can display the coordinates of up to three linear axes and one rotation axis
according to the axis setting.
6 Note: bold function names in a box (such as POS) mean the keys on machine operation panel A; bold function
names (such as CLR ALL) mean the function keys of F1 - F6.
(1) (2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(11)
(6) (7) (8) (9) (10)
(1) Name of current program (6) Current system mode

(2) Currently executed program line (7) Alarm display
(3) Current group function (8) Rapid traverse override
(4) Current coordinates (9) Feedrate override
(5) Machining information: (10) Spindle override
Spindle speed: command value (11) System status
Cutting feedrate: command value
Spindle load rate: %
Actual speed: rpm

Actual feedrate: mm/min
Dwell time: G-code dwell time
Command tool number: tool number
specified in G-code
Spindle tool number: number of the
tool on the spindle
Standby tool number: system standby
tool number
6-2
Milling Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Position (POS) Group
6.1 Absolute coordinates

Absolute coordinates refer to the program origin of G-code, which you can use to check whether
6
the movement specified in a program block is identical to the actual movement. The operation
steps are as follows.
(1) Press POS to display the POS group screen and the available functions include absolute
coordinates (ABS), relative coordinates (REL), and machine coordinates (MECH).
(2) Press ABS to enter the absolute coordinate screen.
6.2 Relative coordinates

Relative coordinates indicate the moving distance from the origin. The operation steps are as
follows.
(2) Press REL to enter the relative coordinate screen.
(3) The functions available in the 2nd layer function bar include:
CLR ALL: clears the relative coordinate values of all axes.
CLR X: clears the relative coordinate value of X axis.
CLR Y: clears the relative coordinate value of Y axis.
CLR Z: clears the relative coordinate value of Z axis.
CLR A: clears the relative coordinate value of A axis.
CLR B: clears the relative coordinate value of B axis.
CLR C (next page): clears the relative coordinate value of C axis.
Note: the clear functions for the axes X, Y, Z, A, B, and C are available only when you connect the axes.
6.3 Machine coordinates

Machine coordinates are defined according to the mechanism. The coordinate data is neither
removable nor changeable due to the selected workpiece coordinate system. The operation
(2) Press MECH to enter the machine coordinate screen.
6-3
Position (POS) Group Milling Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual
6-4
Program (PRG) group
The PRG group provides functions of file management and program editing for G-code
and macro files. In addition, some functions are dedicated to particular system modes.
7.1 Ethernet setting ···············································································7-3

7.2 Create a new file (NEW F) ·································································7-8
7.3 Copy files (COPY F) ·········································································7-9
7.4 Paste files (PASTE) ··········································································7-9
7.5 Delete files and directories (DEL) ························································7-9
7.6 Select / cancel selection of multiple files (ALL SEL TOGL / CANCEL) ········ 7-10
7.7 Rename files (RENAME) ································································· 7-12
7.8 Create directories (FOLDER) ··························································· 7-13
7.9 Search for files (FIND F)·································································· 7-14
7.10 File merging (MERGE) ···································································· 7-14
7.11 Sequencing (SORT) ······································································· 7-15
7.12 Convert DXF files (Transform) ·························································· 7-16
7.13 Macro files (MACRO) ····································································· 7-17
7.14 Save macros in the bottom layer (INT MRO) ········································ 7-17
7.15 File editing (File edit) ······································································ 7-17
7.15.1 Line search (LABLE) ······························································· 7-19
7.15.2 String search (STRING) ··························································· 7-19
7.15.3 Edit a section of program (B START / B END) ······························· 7-21
7.15.4 Delete lines and sections (DEL) ················································· 7-22
7.15.5 Copy lines and sections and paste (COPY and PASTE) ·················· 7-22
7.15.6 Undo (UNDO) ········································································ 7-22
7.16 Program function in other modes ······················································· 7-23
7-1
Program (PRG) Group Milling Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual
You can manage and edit G-code and macro files with PRG group functions. File manage
includes three layers: (1) CF (CF card), INTER (internal memory), USB (USB disk), and
NETWORK; (2) folders and G-code files; (3) G-code files.
7 Some dedicated functions are available in particular system modes. For example, you can use
the function of break line search in AUTO mode or you can enter and execute a program in MDI
mode.
Note: bold function names in a box (such as POS) mean the keys on machine operation panel A; bold
function names (such as CLR ALL) mean the function keys of F1 - F6.
(1) (2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(1) Name of current program

(2) Currently executed program line
(3) Current group function
(4) Disk options
(5) Current system mode
Set the system to EDIT mode and press PRG on machine operation panel A to display the PRG
screen. In the File manage screen, you can press and or PAGE UP and PAGE DN to
move the cursor, press ENTER to enter the second or third layer, and then select a G-code file.
After selecting the G-code file, press ENTER to open the file and enter the edit screen. Press
and (scroll the screen up or down by 1 line), and PAGE UP and PAGE DN (scroll the
screen up or down by 20 lines) to display the file content.
Note: the suggested specifications for the USB disk is as follows.
USB disk specification

Disk format FAT32
Disk capacity As required
7-2
Milling Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Program (PRG) Group
7.1 Ethernet setting

You can use Ethernet to connect the system to the PC to enable remote communication. You
7
can use the CNCNetwork software to manage the online files of multiple NC controllers with one
PC, enabling data sharing and file management with the PC, and transmission-along-with-
machining (DNC).
Set the communication protocol between the NC system and PC before using the network
connection function. Refer to section 12.7.1 for the setting method. The following gives simple
instructions.
Set the protocol of the NC system by going to PAR > ETH.
Figure 7.1.1
Network setting parameter

Number Name Setting range or format
Character length: 1 - 8
10030 Host name
Actual setting: 1 - 8 characters
Character length: ×××.×××.×××.×××
10031 IP address
Actual setting: 192.168.0.2
10032 Subnet mask
10033 Default gateway
10034 Network function switch
Actual setting: 1
10035 DHCP switch
Actual setting: 0
10036 Remote PC IP address 1
7-3
Network setting parameter

Number Name Setting range or format
7
Shared remote directory IP Character length: 0 - 5
10041
address Actual setting: 0
Set the protocol of PC by setting Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties on the PC operating
system (as shown in Figure 7.1.2) or going to CNCNetwork > Options.
Network setting on PC:
Figure 7.1.2
Steps:
(1) Select the check box for Use the following IP address and enter the following in
sequence:
IP address: 192 . 168 . 0 . 1
Subnet mask: 255 . 255 . 255 . 0
(2) Click OK to finish the setting.
7-4
Network settings with CNCNetwork:
Figure 7.1.3
Steps:
(1) Execute CNCNetwork software and go to the Options tab.
(2) Click Search CNC to connect to the CNC with the above settings.
7-5
DNC operation:
Execute CNCNetwork, open the file to be shared in the File Sharing screen, and then you can
7
execute the G-code file while it is being processed (DNC operation) using Ethernet.
No additional disk space is required for file storage as only the path of the shared files is
recorded. The connection steps are as follows.
(1) Use Ethernet communication to set the Internet connection between PC and NC.
(2) Execute CNCNetwork.
(3) Click the DNC tab.
Figure 7.1.4
(4) Set the system to EDIT mode and go to File manage > NETWORK.
Figure 7.1.5
(5) The screen displays the shared files. Select and open the G-code file that has been set to
be shared.
7-6
(6) Set the system to AUTO mode, press CYCLE START, and the system executes the G-code
file by DNC operation. The execution method is the same as that for general files.
(7) During DNC operation, file information is displayed in the DNC screen of CNCNetwork.
The information includes name of the connecting system, name of the file executed by
DNC, total number of lines, number of line being executed, and file content (the content is
scrolled down along with the execution progress, as shown in Figure 7.1.6).
7
Figure 7.1.6
7-7
7.2 Create a new file (NEW F)

In EDIT mode, you can use this function to create a new G-code file from the controller
7
interface. The operation steps are as follows.
(1) Set the system to EDIT mode.
(2) Press PRG to switch to the PRG screen.
(3) In the File manage screen, press and or PAGE UP and PAGE DN to move the
cursor to the destination of the disk for file creation (for example, the 2 nd or 3rd layer of CF or
USB directory).
(4) Press to display the function bar on the next page.
(5) Press NEW F and a dialog box appears for you to enter the file name.
(6) Enter alphanumeric characters (no symbols) in the dialog box, press ENTER, and a new
file is created.
File format specifications

No restrictions on the format of main program names (names of
Format of machining file each file should be unique in the same directory)
name (G-code)
O + 0001 to 8999 (for subprogram call)
Format of macro file name
O + 9000 - 9999
(O macro)
Remarks in file name Suffix ‘-’ and alphanumeric characters in sequence to the file name
Valid format of file extension .NC .ANC .CNC .PIM .TAP .PTP .UOO .DEMO
Format of M macro file name M + 10000 - 29999
Format of G macro file name G + 30000 - 49999
Maximum allowable character
31
length of file name
Storage location 2nd or 3rd management layer
Invalid symbols in file name */\|<>?“
Note:
1. Names of each file should be unique in the same directory. For example, O0001 and O1 are regarded
as the same.
2. The File manage screen only displays general machining files. Macro files can be displayed by setting
the parameter Pr50 Macro file display.
3. Multiple dots can be used in the file name of a G-code file whereas the last one should come with a
valid format of file extension, such as “1.1.1.1.NC”.
7-8
7.3 Copy files (COPY F)

You can use this function to copy the existing files from all disk drives.
7
The operation steps are as follows.
cursor to the destination of the disk for file copying (for example, the 2 nd or 3rd layer of CF or
USB directory).
(4) Move the cursor to the file to be copied.
(5) Press COPY F and then PASTE to validate the execution.
7.4 Paste files (PASTE)

As described in Section 7.3, you should use this function together with the copy function to
complete file copying. It is one of the functions of File manage in PRG group. The operation
steps follow the descriptions in Section 7.3.
(1) Press and or PAGE UP and PAGE DN to move the cursor to the location of the disk,
directory, or layer for pasting the file.
(2) Enter the directory, press PASTE, and a dialog box appears for you to enter the file name.
Enter a new file name or use the original one, and press ENTER to complete the execution
of file copying and pasting.
Note:
1. The specification of file naming for this function is the same as that of the file creation function. That is,
file names of each file should be unique.

2. If you do not execute COPY F before using the PASTE function, an error dialog box appears to
remind you to copy a file first, and thus the paste execution is invalid.
3. Follow the same operation steps to copy the files from the USB disk to the CF card.
7.5 Delete files and directories (DEL)

You can use this function to delete the G-code files and directories in the second layer of File
manage.
cursor, and press ENTER to enter the 2nd or 3rd layer of the disk.
(4) Move the cursor to the directory or file to be deleted.
7-9
(5) Press DEL and a dialog box appears for you to confirm the execution. Enter “Y” and press
ENTER to delete the file or directory.
7
Note: the file or directory cannot be recovered once deleted.
7.6 Select / cancel selection of multiple files (ALL SEL TOGL /

CANCEL)
In addition to copying or deleting a single file, you can use SET TOGL / CANCEL to select or
cancel the selection of multiple files for copying, pasting, or deleting the files.
The operation steps for copying and pasting multiple files are as follows.
(3) Enter the directory where you want to select the files.
cursor to the file to be selected. To select a file, press SEL TOGL (as shown in Figure
7.6.1). To cancel the selection, press CANCEL. To select all files, press ALL SEL TOGL.
To cancel the selection of all files, press CANCEL.
Figure 7.6.1
(5) After completing the selection, press COPY F.

(6) Go to another directory and press PASTE to paste the selected files, as shown in Figure
7.6.2.
7-10
Figure 7.6.2
The operation steps for deleting multiple files are as follows.

(3) Enter the directory where you desire to select the files.
cursor to the file to be selected. To select a file, press SEL TOGL. To cancel the selection,
press CANCEL.
(5) After selecting multiple files, press DEL, and a dialog box appears for you to confirm the
execution (as shown in Figure 7.6.3). Enter “Y” and press ENTER to delete.
Figure 7.6.3
Note:
1. After copying multiple files, you should paste them to another directory. If you paste the files in the
same directory, a dialog box appears to remind you to select another directory, and the execution is
invalid.
2. When the names of the files to be pasted are identical to those of the original files, a dialog box
appears for you to decide whether to overwrite the original files. Enter “Y” to replace the original files
with the new ones; enter “N” or press EXIT to keep the original files.
7-11
7.7 Rename files (RENAME)

You can use this function to rename the file after creating the file. The operation steps are as
7
follows.
(3) In the File manage screen, press and or PAGE UP and PAGE DN to move the cursor
to the destination of the disk (for example, the 2nd or 3rd layer of CF or USB directory).
(5) Move the cursor to the file to be renamed, press RENAME, and a dialog box appears for
you to enter the file name.
(6) Enter a name that is not identical to the file names in the directory, and press ENTER to
complete renaming the file.
Note:
1. You can only create G-code files in the 2nd and 3rd layers of File manage but not in the 1st layer.
2. The format specification of file name for file renaming is the same as that of file creation. If you enter a
name that is already used for another file in the directory when renaming, an error dialog box appears,
and the execution is invalid.
7-12
7.8 Create directories (FOLDER)

This function is for creating a directory for G-code files in the 2nd layer of File manage, which
7
is only available in the 2nd layer of File manage. Accordingly, the 2nd layer of File manage
can contain both directories and G-code files. The operation steps are as follows.
(4) In the 2nd layer of File manage, press FOLDER, and a dialog box appears for you to enter
the directory name.
Figure 7.8.1
(5) After entering the directory name, press ENTER to complete creating the directory.
By following the steps above, you can create a new directory in the 2 nd layer of File manage,
and create and edit G-code files in this directory (the 3rd layer).
Directory format specifications

Format of directory name Not limited to alphanumeric characters
Maximum number of characters of
31
directory name
Storage location 2nd management layer
7-13
7.9 Search for files (FIND F)

You can use this function to quickly search for and open the target file when there are a number
7
of G-code files in the directory. If you know the file name, this function enables you to quickly
search for and open the file. The operation steps are as follows.
(5) Press FIND F and a dialog box appears for you to enter the file name to be searched. After
entering the file name, press ENTER to search for and open the file.
Note:
1. You can only search for files in the same directory with this function.
2. Enter the complete file name to accurately search for and open the file.
7.10 File merging (MERGE)

You can use this function with the file copying function to merge the program content of two
different G-code files. The operation steps are as follows:
(4) Select the G-code file to be copied.
(5) Press COPY F and the content is saved to the system’s clipboard.
(6) Move the cursor to the directory which contains the file to be merged.
(8) Press MERGE and a dialog box appears for you to enter the name of the merged file. After
entering the name, press ENTER to open the file.
(9) Move the cursor to the line where you want to paste the program content, and press PASTE
to paste and merge the file programs.
(10) To save the merged file, switch to different system modes, open another file, or press
RESET.
7-14
7.11 Sequencing (SORT)

This function is for sequencing the directories or files in a directory by a specified order,
7
facilitating the operation of file search or management.
(5) Press SORT to display the function bar in the 2nd layer.
(6) Press NAME, and the directories and files are displayed by the sequence of number >
English letters (from top to bottom). Press NAME again, and they are displayed by the
sequence of English letters > number (from top to bottom).
(7) Press SIZE to display the directories and files by the file size from small to large (from top to
bottom). Press SIZE again to display them by the file size from large to small (from top to
bottom).
(8) Press DATE to display the directories and files by the date from most recent to earlier (from
top to bottom). Press DATE again to display them by the date from earlier to most recent
(from top to bottom).
7-15
7.12 Convert DXF files (Transform)

You can find this function from the function bar in the File manage screen. After selecting the
7
DXF file, enter relevant parameter settings to convert them into an executable G-code file.
(3) Press twice to display the function bar on the third page.
(4) Press DXF to display the DXF file manage screen.
cursor, and press ENTER to select the DXF file to be converted.
(6) After selecting the DXF file, you are redirected to the screen for setting the relevant
parameters, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 7.12.1
(7) After finishing setting the parameters, press Transform, a dialog box appears for you to
enter the new file name.
(8) After entering the file name, press ENTER to convert the DXF file into a G-code file, and
the G-code file is stored in the CF directory.
(9) Then, you can execute the G-code file in AUTO mode.
7-16
7.13 Macro files (MACRO)

In response to the application requirements, this is a dedicated function of managing the macro
7
files for the equipment. Upon accessing the security authorization, you can use all the editing
functions described in Section 7.14. Otherwise, you can only browse the existing macro files
rather than open and edit them. Contact the local distributor for authorization settings.
7.14 Save macros in the bottom layer (INT MRO)

In response to the application requirements, this function allows you to copy the macro
programs in the internal memory or CF card to the bottom layer of the system, speeding up the
file access.
Note:
(1) Pr50 Display O macro file must be set to 0.
(2) The number of macro program files must be no more than 50.
(3) Example: Z-axis tool calibration with tool setter.
7.15 File editing (File edit)

You can use this function to modify or delete the content of the G-code files. After you open the
file in the File manage screen, the system switches to the File edit screen. Move the cursor to
any position in the program and use the alphabetic, numeric, and editing keys on machine
operation panel A to edit the program. To save the file after editing the program, switch to
different system modes, press RESET, or open another file. The operation steps for entering
the File edit screen are as follows.
(3) Press and or PAGE UP and PAGE DN to move the cursor, and press ENTER to
enter the 2nd or 3rd layer of the disk.
(4) Select the G-code file to be edited, and press ENTER to open the file and enter the edit
screen.
(5) Press , , , and to move the cursor to any position in the program.
(6) Edit the content by pressing the alphabetic, numeric, and editing keys on machine operation
panel A.
7-17
(7) To save the file after editing, switch to different system modes, open another file, or press
RESET.
7
Specifications for editing
Maximum number of characters of a single line 255
Supported mode EDIT mode
Allowable file size Below 3 MB
Note:
1. When using the File manage or File edit function, you have to set the system to EDIT mode to display
the corresponding function bar. Otherwise, the PRG screen is only for viewing the currently opened
program file and displays the coordinate information.
2. You can insert “( )” (parentheses) at the end of each program block in the G-code file for making
notes. Do not insert parentheses in the beginning of the program block, or the block may be taken as
a note and be skipped.
7-18
7.15.1 Line search (LABLE)
This function is for searching the specific line of program in the G-code file. The operation steps
7
are as follows.
screen.
(6) Press LABEL and a dialog box appears for you to enter the line number (by pressing the
numeric keys 0 - 9).
(7) After entering the line number, press ENTER, and the cursor jumps to the specified line,
completing the action.
Requirements for line search

Maximum number of characters of searching string 62
Format of searching string Specify the program line number
7.15.2 String search (STRING)
The line search function is only for searching the specific line while you can use this function to
search for specific strings. The accuracy of the searching result depends on how precise the
input string is. The string search function contains the function of string replacing. You can
determine whether to replace a string when searching for a string, which enables you to directly
replace the string on the panel screen. The operation steps are as follows.
screen.
7-19
(6) Press STRING and a dialog box appears for you to enter the string to be searched, as
shown in the following figure.
Figure 7.15.2.1
(7) After entering the string to be searched and the string to be replaced, press ENTER to search
the string.
(8) After that, the searched string is highlighted. At the same time, “NEXT”, “PREV”,
“REPLACE”, and “Replace all” are displayed on the function bar.
(9) Press NEXT to search for the next match or press PREV to search for the previous match.
(10) Press REPLACE when you want to replace one single string. You can press Replace all
to batch replace the matches with the new string.
(11)Press to exit the string search function and go back to the function bar of File edit.
(12) After replacing the string, ensure to save the results (by switching to different system
modes, opening another file, or pressing RESET).
Requirements for string replacing

Modes that allow the string replacement function EDIT mode
Allowable file size for editing and replacing Below 3 MB
7-20
7.15.3 Edit a section of program (B START / B END)
To edit a section of a program, you can use the B START / B END functions to specify the start
7
and end of the content to be edited. Then, you can delete, copy, and paste the selected
program content as required, which simplifies the editing process The operation steps are as
follows.
screen.
(5) Press , , , and to move the cursor to the start of the section to be edited and
press B START.
(6) Move the cursor to the end of the section to be edited and press B END. See the following
figure for the selected section.
Figure 7.15.3.1
(7) Follow Steps (5) - (6) then press DEL, and you can delete the selected content.
(8) Follow Steps (5) - (6) then press COPY to copy the selected content. Move the cursor to
where you wish to paste the copied content and press PASTE to insert the content.
7-21
7.15.4 Delete lines and sections (DEL)
You can use this function to delete a single line of program where the cursor is located. And you
7
can use this function with B START and B END to delete a whole section of the program. The
operation steps are as follows.
screen.
(5) Move the cursor to the line to be deleted and press DEL to delete the line of program.
(6) Follow Step (7) in Section 7.15.3 to delete a whole section of a program.
7.15.5 Copy lines and sections and paste (COPY and PASTE)
Move the cursor to the specified line and press COPY, which takes effect when used with
the PASTE function. You can use this function to copy a single line or a section of the
program content. The operation steps are as follows.
screen.
(5) Move the cursor to the line of program to be copied and press COPY.
(6) Move the cursor to the position to paste the copied content, and press PASTE to paste
the line of program to that position.
(7) Follow Step (8) in Section 7.15.3 to copy a whole section of a program.
7.15.6 Undo (UNDO)
During program editing, use this function to undo the previous edit. You can repeatedly use
this function for undoing up to 7 previous steps. The operation steps are as follows.
screen.
(4) After editing the program, press UNDO to undo the previous edit one time.
7-22
7.16 Program function in other modes

AUTO mode:
7
The PRG screen displays the content of the opened G-code file. In the screen, you can view
the status information about the opened or executed file and the block being executed. The
PRG screen in AUTO mode displays information about the program and the coordinates of
motion trajectory during program execution. The operation steps are as follows.
(1) In AUTO mode, press PRG to display the program execution screen. Refer to the following
figure.
Figure 7.16.1
7-23
(2) Continued from Step (1), press PRG again, and the screen displays the information of both
program content and coordinates, as shown in the following figure.
7
(1) (2)
(3)
(7)
(4)
(8)
(5)
(6) (9)
Figure 7.16.2
(1) Name of current program (7) F.act: actual feedrate

(2) Currently executed S.act: actual spindle speed
program line D: tool radius compensation number
(3) Current group function H: tool length compensation number
(4) Currently executed T: tool number
program content F: feedrate
(5) Coordinate information S: spindle speed
during program execution t: dwell time
(6) Current system mode CYC: cycle time
(8) Current command status
(9) Current override settings
7-24
AUTO mode also includes the START (break line search) function. When the program execution
is interrupted, the system records the line number where it is interrupted (break line). You can
go to the PRG screen in AUTO mode to enable the break line search function.
When the system searches the break line, the cursor quickly moves to the line/label number you
searched for and the system quickly computes and executes the program before the specified
block to ensure the machining status is ready (including the spindle speed, feedrate, M code,
7
and coordinates) when the execution resumes, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 7.16.3

(1) In AUTO mode, press PRG to enter the program execution screen.
(2) Press START to display the corresponding screen.
(3) Refer to the information of break line number, enter the line or label number of the program
to be searched, and then press ENTER to complete the setting.
(4) Press RUN, and the system executes the program until reaching the specified line or label
of the program.
(5) The controller executes and records the execution status of the program blocks prior to the
specified line. Then the controller stops at the break line for execution.
(6) Press CYCLE START to execute the program.
Note:
1. When finding the target block, the system stops and remains unexecuted. Press CYCLE START to
resume executing the program.
2. Supported formats for searching: line number and label (N number) of the program.
3. During program execution or the break line search function is used, any request for break line search
will be ignored as the system regards it is in execution.
7-25
When the G-code program is executed, you can use the SF set function to change the cutting
feedrate (F command) and spindle speed (S command) specified in the G-code program, as
shown in Figure 7.16.4. Enter a new command value in the SF set dialog box to change the
7 speed command during execution.
Figure 7.16.4

(2) Press SF set and a dialog box appears for you to enter the command value.
(3) Enter the S value or F value and press ENTER to complete changing the speed command
setting.
Note:
1. The SF set function is a one-shot function with the S and F settings effective for one time in a single
execution, which do not change the command settings in the G-code program.
If requiring to execute this SF setting for multiple times, you are suggested to edit the command in
EDIT mode to ensure the speed command is correct.
2. After the S value is set, the current spindle speed in the G-code program is changed immediately.
After the F value is set, the system executes with the new feedrate (F command) after the data in the
system buffer is completely processed.
3. If there is no S or F command in the G-code program, you cannot use this function to change the
speed command.
4. When using the SF set function, set Pr10017 [Bit 3] SF speed setting to enable or disable the F
setting.
7-26
The BARCODE function is for using the barcode scanner to load the machining files named by
barcode into the file queue and execute them, which greatly saves the time for file searching.
You can connect the barcode reader to the USB slot in the front size of the controller.
Figure 7.16.5

(2) Press BARCODE to enter the screen as shown in Figure 7.16.5.
(3) Use the barcode scanner to scan the barcode to obtain the name of the machining file.
(4) To load the file content, press LOAD. To delete the file which is on the top of the FILE
QUEUE list, press CLEAR. To delete all the files on the FILE QUEUE list, press CLR ALL.
Note:
1. To use this function, you must first create the machining files in the CF card and the file names have to
be consistent with their barcodes.
2. When loading multiple files, the system executes each file in sequence. It automatically deletes the file
name from the list once completing the execution.
JOG and MPG modes:
The operation steps for SF setting are as follows.

(1) In JOG or MPG mode, press PRG to enter the program execution screen.
(2) Press SF set and a dialog box appears for you to enter the command value.
(3) Enter the S value or F value and press ENTER to complete changing the speed command
setting.
7-27
With the TEACH function, you can manually move the axis to any position and use the
programming function keys, and the system can convert the final position (coordinates of the
three axes) into a motion block with coordinates specified. Set the system to JOG or MPG
7 mode, and you can use the TEACH function in the PRG screen for programming the existing or
new files. Functions in the TEACH screen include: rapid traverse (POSITION), linear
interpolation (LINEAR), circular interpolation (CIRCULAR), delete (DEL), file creating (NEW
FILE), file saving (SAVE), and SET (selection of plane, coordinate, and axis). This TEACH
function automatically generates corresponding command formats according to the different
function options. See the following table for the generated command formats.
Function Auto-generated command format

NEW FILE G90 G40 G49 G98 G50 G64 G80 G17 G69 G21
(generate a new
file when teach G54 G15 S3000 M03 F1000
programming is Note: this function generates the corresponding G21 or G20 command according to the
parameter setting of the size unit.
enabled)
POSITION
G00 + X_Y_Z_
(rapid traverse)
LINEAR
(linear G01 + X_Y_Z_
interpolation)
CIRCULAR G02 + X_Y_Z_ + I_ J_ or G03 + X_Y_Z_ + I_ J_
(circular Note: this function generates G17+I_ J_, G18+K_ I_, or G19+J_K_ corresponding to the
interpolation) X-Y, Z-X, or Y-Z plane.
ABS
(absolute G90 G00 (or G01 / G02 / G03) + X_Y_Z_
coordinates)
MECH
(machine G53 G00 (or G01/G02/G03) + X_Y_Z_
coordinates)
The operation steps for the TEACH function are as follows.

(1) In JOG or MPG mode, press PRG to enter the program execution screen.
(2) Press TEACH to enter the teach screen.
(3) Select the file to be programmed from the existing files or create a new file. If desiring to do
programming in the existing file, open the file in EDIT mode. If you want to do programming
in a new file, press NEW FILE, and a dialog box appears for you to enter the file name.
Enter the file name, press ENTER, and you can create a new file in the current directory.
(4) Specify the data type of coordinates. For example, if you desire to display absolute
coordinates, press ABS on the second page of the function bar. Or press MECH to switch to
machine coordinates.
(5) Move the axis to the specified position in JOG or MPG mode, press POSITION or LINEAR
according to the requirement of the mode, and the coordinate command is inserted to the
position where the cursor is located. The coordinate command is generated according to the
data type of the coordinate values.
(6) Continued from Step (5), to specify a circular motion, press CIRCULAR to display the
corresponding function bar.
7-28
(7) Continued from Step (6), to specify the plane of the arc, press SET to select X-Y, Y-Z, or Z-X.
(8) Move the axes in sequence and set the start, intermediate, and end points of the arc by
pressing P1, P2, and P3 respectively. After P3 is set, the values are automatically converted
into a circular cutting command. The system determines the direction of the arc (G02 or
G03) and the radius according to the trajectory of P1 - P3.
(9) If the coordinate command is incorrect, move the cursor to the block and press DEL (on the
7
function bar of the 1st layer in the teach screen) to delete the block.
(10) After completing the programming, in addition to the given auto-saving mechanism (press
RESET, switch to different system modes, or open another file), you can press SAVE to
save the programming results.
Note:
1. The TEACH function is only available in JOG or MPG mode. It is not displayed in other modes.
2. The allowable file size for the teach function is the same as that for file editing (below 3 MB).
3. The name of the created file for the teach function must comply with the file name specification.
4. If you repeatedly enter two sets of coordinate with the same values, the system ignores the 2 nd
coordinate command to avoid generating an invalid motion block.
5. Set the coordinates of P1, P2, and P3 for the arc command in sequence. The direction and radius for
the circular command is determined by the positions of P1, P2, and P3.
6. If you enter the teach screen without opening a file, the system automatically generates a blank file
named “TEACH.NC” in the directory where the cursor is located (the default setting is to generate a
file in the root directory of CF), so you can directly use the teach function.
7. When using the SF set function, set Pr10017 [Bit 3] SF speed setting to enable or disable the F
setting.
7-29
MDI mode
In MDI mode, you can enter simple programs and save, delete, or execute the content in the
7
PRG screen, as shown in the following figure. You can enter up to 14 program blocks in the
screen. After finishing editing the program, press LOAD to reload and then execute the
program. Otherwise, the program cannot be executed.
Figure 7.16.6
Figure 7.16.7
7-30
In addition, the SAVE function is for saving the program content entered in MDI mode as a file in
the current directory. The naming method is the same as that in Section 7.2 Create a new file.
That is, the file name has to follow the naming convention and be unique. The CLR function is
for deleting all the program content in the screen in MDI mode, which functions the same as
pressing and holding RESET (you can press and hold RESET for 3 seconds to delete all the
content in the program screen).
7
Note:
1. In MDI mode, the RESET key has a two-stage function. Press RESET once to interrupt the
execution and return to the first line of the manual input program. Press and hold RESET
for 3 seconds to clear all the manual input program contents.
2. In MDI mode, after M30 is executed, the cursor returns to the first line of the program. You
can resume the execution without reloading the program.
3. In MDI mode, if there is no M30 (Program end) command, the program runs to the last line.
To resume the execution, press LOAD to reload the program.
4. in MDI mode, after M02 is executed, the cursor stops at the block of M02 and the program
status restores to the default. And you can resume the execution from the block of M02
without reloading the program.
7-31
7-32
Offset (OFS) group
The OFS group provides functions for setting the workpiece coordinates, tool length
compensation, tool radius compensation, and macro variables.
8.1 Coordinate setting (COORD) ·······························································8-2

8.1.1 Auto set (AUTO) ·········································································8-3
8.1.2 Absolute input (ABS)····································································8-7
8.1.3 Incremental input (INC) ································································8-9
8.1.4 Center of rectangle (SQUARE) ···················································· 8-10
8.1.5 Center of circle (CIRCLE) ··························································· 8-12
8.2 Tool setting (CUTTER) ····································································· 8-14
8.2.1 Milling machine system ······························································ 8-14
8.3 Tool magazine management (MAGA) ·················································· 8-17
8.3.1 Multi-magazine management ······················································· 8-22
8.4 Macro variables (MACRO)································································· 8-23
8.4.1 Local variables (LOCAL) ····························································· 8-23
8.4.2 Global variables (GLOBAL) ························································· 8-24
8.4.3 Non-volatile variables (HOLD) ······················································ 8-24
8.4.4 Extension variables (EXTEND) ···················································· 8-24
8-1
Offset (OFS) Group Milling Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual
The OFS group provides functions for setting the workpiece coordinates, tool length
compensation, tool radius compensation, and macro variables.
8
Note: bold function names in a box (such as POS) mean the keys on machine operation panel A; bold
function names (such as CLR ALL) mean the function keys of F1 - F6.
8.1 Coordinate setting (COORD)

G54 - G59 allow you to set multiple workpiece coordinate systems. With commands G54 - G59,
you can simplify the calculation of coordinates during programming as well as change the
coordinate values at any time, achieving more flexible machining process. You can specify the
coordinate values in the coordinate setting screen with one of the workpiece coordinate
commands (G54 - G59), as shown in the following figure.
(2)
(1)
Figure 8.1.1
(1) Workpiece coordinate setting: offset coordinates, G54 - G59 coordinate systems
(2) Coordinate information: machine (MECH) / relative (REL) / absolute coordinates (ABS)

(1) Press OFS to enter the OFS screen.
(2) Press COORD to display the corresponding function bar.
Note:
1. Set the coordinate systems only when there is no machining program being executed. Otherwise, data
entry is prohibited.
2. If you press FEED HOLD during program execution, the system status remains “RUN”. If you press
(Single block execution) during program execution, the execution stops after the current block is
finished, and the system status becomes “Ready”.
8-2
Milling Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Offset (OFS) Group
8.1.1 Auto set (AUTO)
This function is for automatically entering the current position of each axis to the coordinate
8
system (G54 - G59) where the cursor is located. The auto set function includes three options:
setting single axis (SET), setting multiple axes (SET P), and setting coordinate system center
(SET L/2). The option of setting the coordinate system center must be used with the function of
clearing relative coordinates (CLR REL). The function of clearing coordinate values of a
coordinate system (CLR ALL) is also provided.
 CLR ALL (all clear): clears all the axis values of the current coordinate system to 0 while the
values in other systems remain unchanged.
(3) Press AUTO to display the corresponding function bar.
(4) Press , , , and to move the cursor to a specific coordinate system.
(5) Press CLR ALL to delete all the data of the coordinate system.
 CLR REL (relative clear): clears the relative coordinates of the axis which the cursor is
pointing to. This function is not used for clearing the actual workpiece coordinates but for
clearing the displayed relative coordinates.
 SET L/2 (set center): this function is for setting the central position of an object as the
center of a coordinate system. The NC system automatically calculates and enters the
central position coordinates to the field, so you do not need to do it manually. The following
operation steps take the X axis as an example.
(1) Set the system to JOG or MPG mode and move the machine axis to the initial contact
point of the workpiece in X-axis direction.
(5) Press , , , and to move the cursor to the X-coordinate field of a specific
coordinate system.
(6) Press SET L/2 to enter its setting screen.
8-3
(7) Press X1 and the circle on the left side of the rectangle becomes red, as shown in
Figure 8.1.1.1, meaning the machine coordinates of the first point is recorded.
Figure 8.1.1.1
(8) Continue to move the machine axis to the other contact point of the workpiece in
X-axis direction.
(9) Press X2 and the circle labeled as X2 in Figure 8.1.1.1 becomes red, meaning the
machine coordinates of the second point is recorded.
(10) Press SET and the system automatically calculates the central point between the
machine origin and the workpiece position in X-axis direction and sets this point as
the center of X axis in the coordinate system, which is the workpiece origin of X axis.
8-4
 SET L (set single axis): this function is for automatically entering the current machine
coordinate of a single axis. When you move the cursor to the X, Y, or Z field of a specific
coordinate system and press SET L, the current machine coordinate is automatically
entered to the field where the cursor is located. This function is for entering the data of a
single axis at one time. The operation steps are as follows.
8
(5) Press , , , and to move the cursor to the X-coordinate field of a specific
coordinate system.
(6) Press SET L to automatically enter the axis coordinate value in the field where the
cursor is located.
Example of setting single axis
This example illustrates setting the X-axis value by moving the machine axis to a specific
position (workpiece origin in X-axis direction as shown in Figure 8.1.1.2).
X-axis workpiece origin
Workpiece
Machine origin Set the moving distance in

X-axis direction
Figure 8.1.1.2
Then, the coordinate values are displayed in the machine coordinate fields as shown in Figure
8.1.1.3. Move the cursor to a specific coordinate system such as G54 as shown in Figure 8.1.1.3
and press SET L to automatically enter the X-axis value of the machine coordinates to the X-axis
field in G54 coordinate system, completing the data entry for single axis.
8-5
Figure 8.1.1.3
 SET P (set multiple axes): this function is for automatically entering the coordinates of
multiple axes. After completing the calibration of workpiece center, you can use this function
to enter the machine coordinates of multiple axes (including X, Y, Z, and other axes)
simultaneously. The operation steps are as follows.
(6) Press SET P to automatically enter the coordinate values of multiple axes in the
coordinate system field where the cursor is located.
Note: if you have set the coordinates of other axes, do not press CLR ALL to clear the axis values, or
the coordinate values are all cleared.
Example of setting multiple axes
Move the machine axis to the specified position as the workpiece origin shown in Figure 8.1.1.4
(the figure illustrates the position of X and Y axes except Z axis).
Workpiece origin
Set the moving Workpiece

distance in Y-axis
direction
Machine origin Set the moving distance in

X-axis direction
Figure 8.1.1.4
8-6
After completing the calibration of workpiece origin, the coordinate values are displayed in the
machine coordinate fields as shown in Figure 8.1.1.5. Move the cursor to the G54 coordinate
system and press SET P to automatically enter the values of X-, Y-, and Z-axis of the machine
coordinate to the X-, Y-, and Z-axis fields in G54 coordinate system, completing the data entry
for multiple axes. 8
Figure 8.1.1.5
8.1.2 Absolute input (ABS)
One of the manual input function for coordinate values, which includes absolute and incremental
settings. The following operation steps illustrate the absolute setting.
(4) To enter positive values, simply press 0 - 9; to enter negative values, you have to press
before using the numeral keys. After entering the values, press to determine the number
of decimal places.
(5) Press ABS to enter absolute coordinates to the coordinate system.
Note:
1. The displayed values are in the unit of mm. If you enter values without specifying the decimal points,
they are in the unit of μm. For example: when you enter 123456, it refers to 123456 μm, so the result is
123.456 mm.
2. In Step (5), you can press either ABS or ENTER to enter the coordinates.
8-7
Example of absolute setting
Move the tool center from the machine origin to the workpiece origin (X, Y). Then, enter the
8
machine coordinates of X- and Y-axis corresponding to the workpiece origin to the coordinate
system (G54 - G59) in the OFS group.
Workpiece origin (0, 0)
Set the moving Workpiece

distance in X-axis
direction
Machine origin (0, 0) Set the moving distance in

X-axis direction
Figure 8.1.2.1
Figure 8.1.2.2
8-8
8.1.3 Incremental input (INC)
One of the manual input function for coordinate values, usually used for fine adjustment of the
8
original value. That is, you change the values incrementally. For example, when the original
value is 150.000, if you enter 5.000 by incremental setting, the newly-set value is 155.000.
(3) Press , , , and to move the cursor to the X, Y, or Z axis field of a specific
coordinate system.
before using the numeral keys. After entering the values, press to determine the number
of decimal places.
(5) Press INC to increment the coordinate values.
Note: make sure you use the correct mode (ABS or INC) and enter the correct coordinates to avoid danger
caused by incorrect axis movement.
8-9
8.1.4 Center of rectangle (SQUARE)
The rectangular diagram on the screen can guide users in setting the coordinates for the center
8
of rectangular objects. After the system converts the data of the four set endpoints, it calculates
the coordinates for the actual center of the object. The function screen is as shown in the
following figure.
Figure 8.1.4.1

(3) Press , , , and to move the cursor to the data field of a specific coordinate
system.
(4) Press SQUARE to display the corresponding function screen.
(5) Follow the instructions on the schematic and move the center of the spindle to the
mechanical positions of X1, X2, Y1, and Y2. Press the X1, X2, Y1, and Y2 function keys to
set the coordinates of each point.
(6) After setting the coordinates of the 4 points on the rectangle, press SET and the system will
calculate the coordinate data for the center of the rectangle, and enter it into the coordinate
system automatically.
(7) Move the Z axis and confirm the coordinate position, and then press Z to complete the Z axis
coordinate settings for that workpiece coordinate group.
8-10
Center of rectangle application examples
First, specify the coordinate group field; move the spindle to the 4 endpoint positions of the
8
object manually, and enter the X and Y data for the 4 positions respectively using the
corresponding function keys as shown in Figure 8.1.4.2.
Figure 8.1.4.2
After completing the coordinate settings for the 4 endpoints of the rectangle, press SET, and
the system will calculate the actual machine coordinate values that corresponds to the center
of the rectangular object automatically, and complete the data setting for the specified
coordinate system automatically as shown in Figure 8.1.4.3.
Figure 8.1.4.3
8-11
8.1.5 Center of circle (CIRCLE)
This function can set the coordinate data for the center of a round object. You can use this
8
function to select any three positions on a round object and set the coordinate data of those
three points at the same time; then the coordinates for the center of that object are calculated
automatically. The function screen is as shown in the following figure.
Figure 8.1.5.1

(3) Press , , , and to move the cursor to the data field of a specific coordinate
system.
(4) Press CIRCLE to display the corresponding function screen.
(5) Follow the schematic and move the center of the spindle to the mechanical positions of P1,
P2, and P3 in sequence, and then press P1, P2, and P3 function keys to set them in
sequence.
(6) After setting the coordinates of the three points on the circle, press SET, and the system will
calculate the coordinate data for the center of the circle, and enter it into the coordinate
system automatically.
(7) Move the Z axis and confirm the coordinate position, press Z to complete the Z axis
coordinate settings for that workpiece coordinate group.
8-12
Center of circle application examples
You can use the CIRCLE function when the workpiece is a round object. Operate the spindle
8
manually to touch any 3 points on the circumference, and set the coordinates of these 3 points
individually using the corresponding function keys as shown in Figure 8.1.5.2.
Figure 8.1.5.2
After entering the coordinates of any 3 points on the circumference, press SET, and the system
will calculate the machine coordinates for the center of the circle automatically and enter this
data into the specific coordinate system group as shown in Figure 8.1.5.3.
Figure 8.1.5.3
8-13
8.2 Tool setting (CUTTER)

8.2.1 Milling machine system
8
The tool setting function must be used with G code command to specify whether to
compensate the tool length (compensate with G43 or G44; cancel with G49) or whether to
compensate the tool radius (compensate with G41 or G42; cancel with G40). Functions of
tool setting for the milling machine system include tool length compensation, tool radius
compensation, tool length wear compensation, tool radius wear compensation, and tool life
management.
The data fields correspond to the H and D numbers specified in the machining program. H
represents tool length compensation and D represents tool radius compensation. With the tool
setting function, you can specify the tool length or tool radius data freely and generate the
planned machining path and dimensions without modifying the program path. The value setting
functions include ABS, INC, SET H, and CLEAR. The tool compensation function screen is as
(3)
(1)
(2) (4)
Figure 8.2.1.1
(1) Compensation number (H / D)

(2) Input field for compensation data
(3) Compensation information: tool length, tool radius, length wear
compensation, radius wear compensation, and tool life
(4) Auxiliary display: current machine coordinates of the Z axis
Tool setting data value range
Tool length data -2000.0 to +2000.0 mm
Tool radius data -150.0 to +150.0 mm
Compensation data for tool length wear -2000.0 to +2000.0 mm
Compensation data for tool radius wear -150.0 to +150.0 mm
Tool life data 0 to 99999999 times
8-14
 ABS (absolute input): one of the manual input function for coordinate values. You can use
this function to set absolute values for tool length, tool radius, tool wear compensation, or
tool life. You can also press ENTER to set absolute values. The operation steps are as
follows.
(2) Press CUTTER to enter the corresponding function screen.
8
(3) Use , , and to move the cursor to specific data field of tool length, tool
radius, tool wear, or tool life.
before using the numeral keys. After entering the values for the tool compensation
data, press to confirm the unit of the values. If it is the data value for tool life, the
set value must be positive integers.
(5) Press ABS to set the value using absolute data.
Note: the tool data fields correspond to different compensation data. For example: when the cursor is
on the length field, the data entered is the tool length compensation data.
 INC (incremental input): one of the manual input function for coordinate values. You can
use this function to set incremental values for tool length, tool radius, tool wear
compensation, and tool life.
(3) Use , , and to move the cursor to specific data field of tool length, tool
radius, tool wear, or tool life.
before using the numeral keys. After entering the values for the tool compensation
data, press to confirm the unit of the values. If it is the data value for tool life, the
set value must be positive integers.
(5) Press INC to increase or decrease the value of that field.
8-15
 SET H: a dedicated function for automatically entering the tool length compensation value
(H). The Z axis height of the current machine coordinates can be entered automatically to
the specified tool length compensation data field. This function avoids the risk of entering
8 incorrect values and shortens the setting time. The operation steps are as follows.
(1) In JOG or MPG modes, operate and move the Z axis of the machine to the specified
coordinate height.
(4) Press , , , and to move the cursor to the tool length field of a specific
number.
(5) Press SET H to set the Z axis machine coordinate values in the specified data field
automatically.
Note:
1. The SET H function is only valid for the tool length data field; it has no effects on other fields.
2. During program execution, changing the values in the OFS group is prohibited. Values can only
be entered when the program is stopped, such as the conditions of when no program is in
execution, when the block with the single block execution function is complete, and when
RESET is pressed.
3. When SET H is used to enter tool length data, the length wear value of that row will be cleared to
0.
 CLEAR: the clear function is used to clear the tool compensation data. The clear function
includes options such as H/D, WEAR, LIFE, and ALL.
H/D: clears all tool length and radius data.
WEAR: clears all length wear and radius wear data.
LIFE: clears all tool life data.
ALL (clear all): clears all tool setting data.

(3) Press CLEAR to display the corresponding function bar.
(4) Press H/D to clear tool length and tool radius data. Press WEAR to clear the tool wear
compensation data. Press LIFE to clear all tool life data. Press ALL to clear all data
fields.
8-16
8.3 Tool magazine management (MAGA)

This function is for managing the tool positions and their corresponding tool pot numbers after
8
tool change. When a different tool is used, the tool pot positions and the corresponding tool
numbers are recorded in the tool magazine data table.
You can view the recorded tool number corresponding to the tool pot positions and also change
the sequence of the tool number in the tool magazine data table. With parameter settings, you
can enable the multi-magazine management function. The function of tool magazine
management is only available in JOG mode, as shown in the following figure.
(1) (2)
(3)
(7)
(4)
(5) (8)
(6)
Figure 8.3.1
(1) Name of current program (7) Number of tool magazine system

(2) Currently executed Tool number for current command
program line Current standby tool number
(3) Current group function Current standby tool pot number
(4) Sequence of tool number
(5) Tool number input field (8) Spindle tool number
(6) Current override settings
The operation steps for tool magazine setting are as follows.

(1) Set the system to JOG mode.
(3) Press MAGA to enter the tool magazine data setting screen.
(4) Press , , , and to move the cursor to a specific field.
(5) Enter the tool number and press SET (or ENTER) to change its corresponding tool pot.
8-17
Example of changing tool number
When you specify a number that already exists in the data table, the system automatically
8
exchanges the one to be replaced with the one that is repeated. This is for ensuring that the tool
numbers in each address of the tool magazine do not overlap, preventing the tool call error.
Workflow description:
(1) Initial status of the tool

magazine. Tool numbers are
arranged in sequence in
accordance with the tool pot
numbers.
(2) If you set the tool number of

tool pot 1 to 2, then the tool
number of tool pot 2 becomes
1. That is, the tool numbers for
tool pots 1 and 2 are
exchanged.
(3) If you set the tool number of

tool pot 3 to 5, then the tool
number of tool pot 5 becomes
3. That is, the tool numbers for
tool pots 3 and 5 are
exchanged.
According to the above examples, the mechanism of tool number change can avoid the
possibility of mistakenly calling the incorrect tool number.
8-18
 RST ALL (reset all): the tool magazine management provides the function of resetting the
tools by rearranging the tool numbers. After resetting, the records of changes in tool
number are cleared. The tool numbers are arranged in sequence according to the tool pot
numbers. With this function, you can restore the data to default setting for troubleshooting
tool number misplacement or for tool number resetting. The operation steps are as follows.
8
(4) Press RST ALL to reset the tool magazine data table.
 LOCK (tool pot lock): use this function to lock the spare tool pots. Tools in the locked pots
cannot be called. If you use a command in the program to call a locked tool, the system
enables the protection mechanism and displays an error message to stop the execution.
This function is a preventive mechanism for checking the tool status during program
execution, avoiding errors caused by incorrect tool call, such as damage to the latch of the
tool magazine or interference to the magazine due to adjacent tools of large diameter. The
data fields of the locked pots are highlighted with different colors. The operation steps are
as follows.
(4) Press , , , and to move the cursor to a specific tool number data field.
(5) Press LOCK to lock that pot, as shown in Figure 8.3.2.
Figure 8.3.2
8-19
Example of locking the tool pot
This function is used for preventing the tool of large diameter from damaging its adjacent tools by
8
blocking the adjacent pots, ensuring the machine will not be damaged due to misoperation by
personnel. By blocking the pots adjacent to the pot which carries a tool of large diameter, you
can avoid executing inappropriate tool call program and thus prevent the possible collision
caused by placing tools into the adjacent pots.
Figure 8.3.3
Assume that T1 is a tool of large diameter and the adjacent tools are T2 and T16, you can
prevent T1 from interfering with the adjacent tools by locking T2 and T16, as shown in the above
figure.
Figure 8.3.4
If T1 is a tool of large diameter, its interference with adjacent tools is as shown in the figure
above. With T2 and T16 locked, you cannot call tools in the two tool pots.
8-20
 UNLOCK (tool pot unlock): you can use this function to unlock the pots. The operation
(4) Press , , , and to move the cursor to the tool pot data field which has been
8
locked.
(5) Press UNLOCK to unlock the tool pot. Or you can enter the same tool number to the
data field of the locked pot and press ENTER to unlock.
8-21
8.3.1 Multi-magazine management
In response to the application needs for managing multiple tool magazines, you can enable this
8
function with tool magazine parameters after accessing the security authorization. You can
specify the number of tool pots for each tool magazine system according to the tool magazine
specification as well as the tool numbers after resetting the tool magazine. The items MAGA1
and MAGA2 on the function bar are for dividing the management of the two different tool
magazine systems. Contact the distributors for services of the multi-magazine management
function.
Figure 8.3.1.1
Note:
1. You can set the tool numbers only when the system is in JOG mode. Otherwise, the corresponding
function bar is not displayed.
2. You have to access the security authorization in advance before setting or resetting the tool numbers.
3. Tool numbers in the same tool magazine system cannot be repeated. If you specify a number which
already exists in the magazine, the system automatically changes the existing one with a
non-repeating number. This is for ensuring the tool numbers in each address of the magazine do not
overlap, preventing the tool call error.
4. The default spindle tool number is T0. Once tool T0 is placed into the tool magazine, its position in the
magazine is recorded as T0 and cannot be locked. That is, when the displayed tool number is “0”, the
LOCK function is disabled, and a dialog box appears and displays “T0 can’t be locked!”.
8-22
8.4 Macro variables (MACRO)

Using commands with variables, you can modify values, perform conditional operations, and
8
input or output MLC data during program execution. There are four types of macro variables:
local, global, non-volatile, and extension variables, with the data type as double word.
Figure 8.4.1
8.4.1 Local variables (LOCAL)
In macro programs, local variables (#1 - #50) are available in the current program.
(2) Press MACRO to display the variable entry screen.
(3) Press LOCAL and the screen is automatically switched to display the variable table starting
with number 1.
(4) Press , , , and to move the cursor to a specific variable data field.
(5) Enter the value and press ENTER to complete the setting.
8-23
8.4.2 Global variables (GLOBAL)
Global variables (#51 - #250) are shared by main programs, subprograms, and macro programs.
8
(3) Press GLOBAL and the screen is automatically switched to display the variable table
starting with number 51.
8.4.3 Non-volatile variables (HOLD)
Non-volatile variables (#1601 - #1800) are for retaining the system status when power is off.
(3) Press HOLD and the screen is automatically switched to display the variable table starting
with number 1601.
8.4.4 Extension variables (EXTEND)
Up to 500 extension variables (#10001 - #10500) are available for the system.
(3) Press EXTEND and the screen is automatically switched to display the variable table starting
with number 10001.
8-24
Diagnosis (DGN) Group
The DGN group provides functions of machining information, user variables, system
monitoring, and parameter importing / exporting,
which help you to optimize the system.
9.1 Machining information (PROCESS) ·······················································9-2

9.2 User variable (USR VAR) ····································································9-4
9.3 MLC ·······························································································9-5
9.3.1 Bit (BIT) ····················································································9-5
9.3.2 Register (REG) ··········································································9-7
9.3.3 Device monitoring (DEV MON) ······················································9-8
9.3.4 Line search (JUMP TO) ······························································ 9-10
9.3.5 Editor (EDITOR) ······································································· 9-10
9.3.6 Operation (SET) ······································································· 9-13
9.4 System monitoring (SYS MON) ·························································· 9-14
9.4.1 Servo monitoring (SRV MON) ······················································ 9-14
9.4.2 I/O monitoring (I/O MON)···························································· 9-14
9.4.3 Variable monitoring (VAR MON) ··················································· 9-15
9.5 Password setting (PWD) ··································································· 9-17
9.5.1 System security (S SCP) ···························································· 9-17
9.5.2 Machine security (M SCP) ·························································· 9-18
9.5.3 User security (User SCP) ··························································· 9-21
9.5.4 Expiration time (EXPIRE) ··························································· 9-22
9.6 System information (STATUS) ···························································· 9-25
9.7 Gain tuning (TUNING) ······································································ 9-26
9.8 Import (IMPORT) ············································································· 9-29
9.9 Export (EXPORT) ············································································ 9-31
9.10 Multi-language (TEXT WR) ································································ 9-33
9.11 LOGO (LOGO WR) ·········································································· 9-33
9-1
Diagnosis (DGN) Group Milling Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual
The DGN group includes a variety of functions. Machining information, user variables, system
monitoring, gain adjustment, and system information are for optimizing the system. MLC
diagnosis is for monitoring the current status of the MLC devices in the system. Password
9
setting allows you to assign security authorization for different system functions. In addition,
system parameters can be imported and exported.
Note: Function names in a box (such as POS) mean the keys on machine operation panel A;
bold function names (such as CLR ALL) mean the function keys of F1 - F6.
9.1 Machining information (PROCESS)

You can set the number of machined workpiece and number of workpiece to be machined, as
well as clear the machining time and number of machined workpieces. The screen of
PROCESS is as shown in the following figure.
Figure 9.1.1

(1) Press DGN to enter the DGN screen.
(2) Press PROCESS to enter the machining information screen.
(3) Press SET NR and a dialog box appears for you to enter the number of machining
workpiece as shown in the following figure.
9-2
Milling Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Diagnosis (DGN) Group
Figure 9.1.2
(4) Press and to move the cursor to a specific field.

(5) Enter a value within the range of 0 - 9999. Press ENTER to complete the setting.
In addition, you can clear the current machining time and number of machined workpiece on the
machining information screen. The operation steps for clearing the machining time are as
follows.
(3) Press CLR TIME and a dialog box appears for confirmation.
(4) Enter “Y” and press ENTER to clear the machining time for a single workpiece on the
screen.
The operation steps for clearing the number of machined workpiece are as follows.
(3) Press CLR NR and a dialog box appears for confirmation.
(4) Enter “Y” and press ENTER to clear the number of machined workpiece on the screen.
9-3
9.2 User variable (USR VAR)

The functions of user variable include system variable (SYS VAR), user variable (USR VAR),
and machine variable (M VAR). You can use the function of system variable to monitor specific
9 variables, and use the functions of user variable and machine variable to enter the names of
registers (D512 - D1023) and display the corresponding data on the screen. With the displayed
types of registers, you can easily control the corresponding devices by monitoring and changing
the setting values of the registers (D512 - D1023).
Figure 9.2.1
The operation steps for user variable and machine variable are as follows:
(2) Press USR VAR to enter the variable monitoring screen.
(3) Press USR VAR or M VAR to enter the setting screen.
(4) Press and or PAGE UP and PAGE DN to move the cursor to a specific field.
(5) Enter the specified register number (D512 - D1023) and press ENTER to load the data in
the register of the specified number.
(6) Move the cursor to the value field of the specified register, enter a value, and press ENTER
to complete the value setting for that register device.
(7) Press US DEC, HEX, S DEC, or FLOAT to select the data format display.
(8) To delete data, move the cursor to the data field and press DEL to delete the data.
9-4
9.3 MLC
This function displays the current status of each MLC device, so you can monitor and force On
or Off each device. You can also check the system status, drive a certain MLC device, or edit
the MLC. See Figure 9.3.1 for the MLC screen. MLC-related diagnostic functions include bit
status, register status, device monitoring, MLC status switching, and MLC editing. The operation
steps for these functions are described in the following sections.
9
Figure 9.3.1
9.3.1 Bit (BIT)
MLC programs require a number of commands to trigger the devices On / Off. Status of these
devices is shown on the MLC Bit Device screen. This function is for displaying the bit type MLC
devices, searching the device, and forcing the device to On or Off. The following operation steps
take the M devices as an example.
(2) Press MLC to display the function bar in the second layer.
(3) Press BIT to enter the bit device status display screen.
9-5
(4) Press M to switch to the status display for M devices as shown in the following figure. Move
the cursor to a specific device field or search for the device. by following Step (5).
Figure 9.3.1.1
(5) Enter the device name, such as 107, and press M to search for the specified device, M107.
To change the status of this device, set the system to non-AUTO mode. Refer to Step (6) for
the operation steps.
(6) Specify the device which status is to be changed. Depending on its current status, enter “1”
to force it to On and press ENTER, or “0” to force it to Off and then press ENTER.
9-6
9.3.2 Register (REG)
Most of the CNC system functions are enabled by MLC programs. MLC devices are divided into
bit type and word type. The following operation steps take the word type MLC device and T
registers as an example.
9
(3) Press REG to enter the register device screen.
Figure 9.3.2.1
(4) Press T to enter the register T setting screen.

(5) Enter the device name, such as 10, and press T to search for the device, T10.
(6) Enter the value in the input field and press ENTER to complete the setting.
(7) Go to the last page of the function bar and press US DEC,HEX, S DEC, or FLOAT to select
the data format display.
9-7
9.3.3 Device monitoring (DEV MON)
Up to 45 sets of device data can be monitored with this function. The operation steps are as
follows.
9 (1) Press DGN to enter the DGN screen.

(3) Press DEV MON to display the device name input screen as shown in Figure 9.3.3.1.
Figure 9.3.3.1
(4) Enter the name of the device to be monitored as shown in Figure 9.3.3.2. You can enter up
to 45 device names.
Figure 9.3.3.2
Dev (device): when the cursor is located in this field, you can enter the name of the device
to be monitored.
Value: move the cursor to this field to set the data of the device.
Status: enter “0” or “1” to set the device status.
9-8
In addition, you can switch the data format display according to the requirements by using the
functions of US DEC, HEX, S DEC, and FLOAT. The data in Figure 9.3.3.3 are in hexadecimal
format and the data in Figure 9.3.3.4 are in floating format.
Figure 9.3.3.3
Figure 9.3.3.4
9-9
9.3.4 Line search (JUMP TO)
Use this function to search for a specific line according to the entered line number of the MLC
program.
9 (1) Press DGN to enter the DGN screen.

(3) Enter a specific line number of the MLC program and press JUMP TO to go to the target
line.
9.3.5 Editor (EDITOR)
Use this function to manage and edit the MLC programs.

You can directly edit the MLC programs on the controller interface with the system set to EDIT
mode.
 Basic MLC commands

Basic MLC commands, including LD, LDI, LDP, LDF, OUT, APP, —, and ︱, are created
with the function of MLC editing, as shown in Figure 9.3.5.1.
Figure 9.3.5.1
The operation steps for creating command LD are as follows.

(3) Press EDITOR to enter the MLC Edit screen as shown in Figure 9.3.5.1.
(4) Press , , , and to move the cursor to the field to be edited.
(5) Enter the device name and press LD to complete creating the device.
The above steps are also applicable for creating LDI, LDP, LDF, OUT, and APP commands.
9-10
To specify the values for the basic commands, press TABLE to display the MLC table as
Figure 9.3.5.2
 Editing (CUT, COPY, PASTE)

These editing functions are MLC-specific, with which you can delete, cut, or copy a single
line of program. Or you can use the SELECT function to delete, cut, or copy a certain
section of the MLC program. After completing the editing, use the SAVE function to
recompile and save the edited MLC program. The operation steps for editing MLC
programs are as follows.
(5) Press repeatedly to display the function bar on the last page in this layer.
(6) Press the corresponding function key. For example, press CUT to perform related edit
operations.
When editing MLC programs, press the corresponding function keys according to the
editing requirements, including SELECT, DEL, CUT, COPY, PASTE, ADD LN, and DEL
LN.
9-11
 SYMBOL
Use this function to search, delete, copy, and paste the MLC devices. MLC program
devices are represented with the symbols X, Y, M, A, T, C, D, P, and I. The operation steps
9
are as follows.
(5) Press to display the function bar on the third page.
(6) Press SYMBOL to display the corresponding function bar.
(7) Press the function key, such as X, to display the list of corresponding devices.
and use the functions of delete, copy, or paste as required.
Note: the above steps are applicable to other device symbols.
 Save, import, and export MLC

After editing the MLC program, use the SAVE function to recompile and save the program.
Then restart the system to update the MLC program. In addition, use the corresponding
function keys (IMPORT / EXPORT) to import or export MLC files.
9-12
9.3.6 Operation (SET)
The system runs the MLC program right after starting. To manually switch the execution status,
use this function to stop the MLC program. This function is for switching the MLC program
status to On or Off, which is usually used for testing or checking the MLC devices in the system.
9
(3) Press SET to switch to the screen of MLC execution status.
(4) Press RUN / STP to force switch the MLC program execution status.
Note: after stopping the MLC program, you can see the status of “MLC Stop” in the system
status field.
In addition, you can force the MLC device to On or Off using the corresponding functions.
 The operation steps for forcing the device status to On are as follows.
(4) Press , , , and to move the cursor to a specific device.
(5) Press ON to switch the device status to On.
 The operation steps for forcing the device status to Off are as follows.
(4) Press , , , and to move the cursor to a specific device.
(5) Press OFF to switch the device status to Off.
9-13
9.4 System monitoring (SYS MON)

This system monitoring function categorizes the various calculation results of the system and
displays them according to their types for your reference.
9 9.4.1 Servo monitoring (SRV MON)
This function displays the servo drive status on the screen of the system, from which you can
check the information about the channel port number and servo status of each axis. As shown
in Figure 9.4.1.1, both the spindle and Z axis are in the Off status and both X and Y axes are in
the On status.
Figure 9.4.1.1

(2) Press SYS MON to switch to the system monitoring screen.
(3) Press SRV MON to display the servo monitoring screen.
9.4.2 I/O monitoring (I/O MON)
The NC series system can add the control switches for external devices with the I/O extension
modules. You can monitor the status of the I/O extension control board connected to the system
on the I/O monitoring screen. The operation steps are as follows.
(3) Press I/O MON to display the I/O extension module status monitoring screen.
9-14
9.4.3 Variable monitoring (VAR MON)
 System variables (SYS VAR): VS0 - VS31 and VS100 - VS131. The operation steps are
as follows.
(3) Press to display the function bar on the second page.
9
(4) Press VAR MON to display the variable monitoring screen.
(5) Press SYS VAR to display the system variable monitoring screen.
(6) Press PAGE UP and PAGE DN to scroll to the page with the specified variable.
(7) You can also enter the full name of a specific system variable and press ENTER, or
enter the variable number and press SYS VAR to search for and display the specified
system variable.
Figure 9.4.3.1
 Channel variables (CH VAR): the variable range include VC0 - VC31, VC100 - VC131, and
VC200 - VC231.
(5) Press CH VAR to display the channel variable screen.
(7) You can also enter the full name of a specific channel variable and press ENTER, or
enter the variable number and press CH VAR to search for and display the specified
channel variable.
9-15
 Axis variables (AXIS VAR): variable range includes VA0 - VA31, VA100 - VA131, and
VA200 - VA231.
9
(5) Press AXIS VAR to display the axis variable screen.
(7) You can also enter the full name of a specific axis variable and press ENTER, or enter
the variable number and press AXIS VAR to search for and display the specified axis
variable.
 Interface variables (IF VAR): variable range includes VH0 - VH31, VH200 - VH231, VH400 -
VH431, and VH800 - VH863.
(5) Press IF VAR to display the interface variable monitoring screen.
(7) You can also enter the full name of a specific axis variable and press ENTER, or enter
the variable number and press IF VAR to search for and display the specified interface
variable.
 MLC variables (MLC VAR): variable range include VM0 - VM49. The operation steps are
as follows.
(5) Press MLC VAR to display the MLC variable monitoring screen.
(7) You can also enter the full name of a specific MLC variable and press ENTER, or
enter the variable number and press MLC VAR to search for and display the specified
MLC variable.
9-16
9.5 Password setting (PWD)

In order to effectively control the operation security of the system functions, you can use this
function to assign different levels of authorization for the system (system maintenance),
machine (mechanical devices), and user (operation).
This prevents unauthorized users from changing the system settings and thus affecting the
system operation.
9
9.5.1 System security (S SCP)
This function includes security lock (LOCK), security unlock (UNLOCK), and system check (SYS
CHECK). The password must be four characters containing at least one letter and one number
(no special characters). The operation steps for locking and unlocking the system security are
as follows.
(2) Press PWD to switch to the function bar of password setting.
(3) Press S SCP to display the corresponding function bar.
(4) When the system security is in the unlocked status, press LOCK to immediately lock all
system-related functions.
(5) When the system security is in the locked status, press UNLOCK, and a dialog box appears
for you to enter the valid password.
(6) After entering the password, press ENTER to unlock the system.
The operation steps for system check are as follows.

(3) Press S SCP to display the corresponding function bar.
(4) When the system is in unlocked status, press SYS CHECK to check the status of the items.
If the check box for an item is selected, it means that item is in error.
9-17
9.5.2 Machine security (M SCP)
This function includes password change (PWG CHG), security lock / security unlock (LOCK /
UNLOCK), and user reset (RST U1 and RST U2).
9 The password must be four characters containing at least one letter and one number (no
special characters). The operation steps for changing the machine security are as follows.
(3) Press M SCP to switch to the function bar of machine security.
(4) Press PWD CHG and a dialog box appears as shown in Figure 9.5.2.1. Enter the old
password, new password, and retype the new password for confirmation.
(5) Press ENTER to complete changing the password.
Figure 9.5.2.1
The operation steps for unlocking the machine security are as follows.
(4) When the machine security is in the locked status, press UNLOCK and a dialog box
appears for you to enter the valid password.
(5) Enter the valid password and press ENTER to unlock the machine security.
Note: The default password for machine security is 0000 which is not assigned to any authorization level,
meaning that users of any level can access the machine-related functions. You need to change the
default password of 0000 to enable the machine security, and only users with the authorization can
access the machine-related functions.
9-18
The operation steps for locking the machine security are as follows.
9
(4) When the machine security is in the unlocked status, press LOCK to immediately lock all
machine-related functions.
The function of user reset allows the equipment supplier to reset the user’s password. When
customers forgot their user passwords, they can ask
the equipment vendor to reset the password to the factory default password. This function is
only available when the password is changed from the default.
(4) Press RST U1 or RST U2 to reset the user’s password.
Function enabling (FUN ENA) allows the equipment supplier to enable or disable the group
functions. Once the selected group function check box is cleared, the group function is disabled
after restarting. The operation steps are as follows.
(4) Press FUN ENA to enter the setting screen for enabling or disabling the group functions.
(5) Press and to move the cursor to the check box of the group function to be cleared
and press ENTER to clear the check box. Then press OK and restart the system for the
changes to take effect.
(6) Continued from Step (5), to maintain the original settings, press CANCEL to exit the screen
and discard the previous settings.
(7) To restore to the system default setting, press DEFAULT.
Figure 9.5.2.2
9-19
The function of restoring to default (DEFAULT) allows users to restore the system with the
system backup file when the system is in error or the system data is seriously damaged. In the
Default screen, if the check box is selected, it means the data of that item is damaged. You can
9
use this function to restore the data of that item. This function is available only when you have
the proper authorization. The operation steps are as follows.
(4) Press DEFAULT to enter the corresponding screen and press , , and to move
the cursor. Press ENTER to select the item to be restored.
(5) Clear the check box: move the cursor to the selected item and press ENTER to clear the
check box.
(6) Press OK to restore the system.
9-20
9.5.3 User security (User SCP)
This function includes U1 SCP and U2 SCP. The functions of user security include password
change (PWD CHG), security lock (LOCK), and security unlock (UNLOCK). The password must
be four characters containing at least one letter and one number (no special characters). Take
U1 SCP for example, the operation steps for changing the user password are as follows.
9
(3) When U1 SCP is locked, press U1 SCP and a dialog box appears for you to enter the
password for U1 SCP.
(4) Enter the valid password for U1 SCP, then press ENTER, and U1 SCP is unlocked and the
corresponding function bar is displayed.
(5) Press PWD CHG and a dialog box appears. Enter the old password, new password, and
retype the new password for confirmation.
(6) Press ENTER to complete changing the password.
The operation steps for unlocking the user security are as follows.
(3) When U1 SCP is locked, press U1 SCP and a dialog box appears for you to enter the
(4) Enter the valid password for U1 SCP, then press ENTER, and U1 SCP is unlocked and the
corresponding function bar is displayed.
The operation steps for locking the user security are as follows.
(3) When U1 SCP is unlocked, press U1 SCP and a dialog box appears for you to enter the
(4) Press LOCK to lock U1 SCP.
Note: the function of user security is the same as that of machine security. The default
password for user security is 0000 which is not assigned to any authorization level. You
need to change the default password of 0000 to enable the user security.
9-21
9.5.4 Expiration time (EXPIRE)
For specific situations that require a time limit on usage, you can set the operation time for the
controller by security authorization. After the time limit is set, the available duration (hours /
9 days) is automatically controlled by the system. When this function is enabled, you can only
remove or reset the time limit with the proper authorization. When the time limit is not set or
disabled, no expiration date is displayed in the Deadline field on the screen, as shown in
Figure 9.5.4.1. Once you set the time limit and do not disable it, the expiration date is
displayed in the Deadline field, as shown in Figure 9.5.4.2.
Figure 9.5.4.1
Figure 9.5.4.2
9-22
You can see the controller’s operation expiration date and time on this screen. When the duration
is up, the system will be locked, meaning that any execution of G-code program (in both AUTO
and MDI modes) is prohibited. The execution will not resume until the time limit setting is disabled
9
or extended. If the time limit expires, contact the distributor or equipment supplier for entering the
valid password to remove the time limit.
You can set the time limit only when the function is not enabled. The operation steps for setting
the time limit are as follows:
(3) Press EXPIRE to display the expiration information.
(4) Press SETTING to display the setting screen of time limit.
(5) Enter a valid password to set the time limit for the controller’s operating duration.
The operation steps for removing the time limit are as follows (contact the distributor or
equipment supplier for services).
(4) Press RELEASE and a dialog box appears for you to enter the activation code as shown in
Figure 9.5.4.3.
Figure 9.5.4.3
(5) After being authorized legally, enter the activation code, press ENTER to reconnect power
to the NC system to remove the time limit.
Note: after the time limit is removed, no expiration date is displayed in the Deadline field as
shown in Figure 9.5.4.1, which means no time limit is set for the system.
9-23
The proper authorization is required to lock or unlock the EXP SCP function. When the function
is locked, enter the valid security password to unlock it. When the function is unlocked, you can
use all the functions for the time limit setting. The functions include password change (PWD
9
CHG), security lock (LOCK), and security unlock (UNLOCK). The password must be four
characters containing at least one letter and one number (no special characters). The operation
The operation steps for changing the password for EXP SCP are as follows.
(4) When EXP SCP is locked, press EXP SCP and a dialog box appears for you to enter the
password for EXP SCP.
(5) Enter the valid password, press ENTER, and EXP SCP is unlocked and the corresponding
function bar appears.
(6) Press PWD CHG and a dialog box appears. Enter the old password, new password, and
retype the new password for confirmation.
(7) Press ENTER to complete changing the password for EXP SCP.
The operation steps for unlocking the expiration security are as follows.
(4) When EXP SCP is locked, press EXP SCP and a dialog box appears for you to enter the
password for EXP SCP.
(5) Enter the valid password, press ENTER, and EXP SCP is unlocked and the corresponding
function bar appears.
The operation steps for locking the expiration security are as follows.
(4) When EXP SCP is unlocked, press EXP SCP to display the corresponding function bar.
(5) Press LOCK to lock EXP SCP.
9-24
9.6 System information (STATUS)

This function provides information about the firmware and hardware versions of the system. You
can maintain and optimize the system according to the version information displayed on the
screen. The functions include system status, firmware serial number, hardware serial number,
and equipment information.
The operation steps for system status display are as follows.

9
(2) Press STATUS to enter the system information screen.
(3) Press SYSTEM to display the system status screen.
The firmware serial number display includes the firmware version of the system. The operation
steps for displaying the firmware serial number are as follows.
(3) Press FW SN to display the firmware versions of the system as shown in the following
figure.
Figure 9.6.1
The operation steps for displaying the hardware serial number are as follows.
(3) Press HW SN to display the hardware version.
The operation steps for displaying the device information are as follows.
(3) Press M INFO to display the device information screen.
(4) You can enter the device information on the screen or press DEL to delete the information
in the field where the cursor is located.
9-25
9.7 Gain tuning (TUNING)

The auto tuning function enables the NC system and servo drive to provide optimized motion
control for meeting different machine characteristics. The NC series controller reads the initial
9 servo parameters and calibrates the motion control with the gain tuning function. The results of
gain tuning are returned to the servo drive, so the control parameters of the controller and drive
are consistent. This facilitates the gain tuning procedure and maintains high-precision control of
the system. The Servo Tuning screen is as shown in the following figure and the operation steps
for each subordinate function are as follows.
(4)
(1)
(5)
(2) (3)
(1) Servo parameter: number and name of (4) Position setting: Position 1 / Position
servo parameters 2
(2) Results after gain tuning: displays the (5) Tuning conditions
calculation results of auto tuning
(3) System settings: displays the current
servo settings
 Next axis (NEXT AX): for switching to another axis for gain tuning setting. You need to
perform auto tuning for each axis separately, so after completing the setting of one axis,
use this function to switch to another axis and continue auto tuning. The operation steps
are as follows.
(3) Press TUNING to enter the auto tuning setting screen.
(4) If you need to set the gain parameters for other axes, press NEXT AX to switch to the
specified axis.
 Read servo parameters (READ): Accesses the parameter values from the servo and
writes them in the Calculate fields. The operation steps are as follows.
(4) Press READ to read the servo parameters back to the controller.
9-26
 RUN, JOG←, JOG→, POS1, POS2: These functions are for setting the operation of auto
tuning. Use these functions to enable auto tuning, and set and operate the positioning
direction. The operation steps for the continuous operation of a single axis are as follows.
9
(5) Press JOG← to move to the left positioning point.
(6) Press POS1 to set the left positioning point.
(7) Press JOG→ to move to the right positioning point.
(8) Press POS2 to set the right positioning point. The movement is now limited to between
Position 1 and Position 2.
(9) Press RUN to start auto tuning.
(10) During auto tuning, press STOP to compete tuning. The system automatically
calculates the best gain value.
 Gain calculation (COMPUTE): To change the parameter values of rigidity, bandwidth, or

inertia to accommodate the machine characteristics, you can use this function to calculate
and generate the results of gain tuning. The operation steps for calculating the gain value of
a single axis are as follows.
(4) Press and to move the cursor to the fields of Rigidity, BW, and JL/Jm to set the
parameters.
(5) Press COMPUTE to calculate the tuning results.
 Gain value writing (WR GAIN), resonance value writing (WR NOTH): The system
automatically calculates the gain values after auto tuning is finished and the motion stops. If
the values after auto tuning meet the expectation, you can use these functions to write the
new parameter values to the servo. The operation steps are as follows.
(4) After tuning, the results are automatically calculated.
(5) Press WR GAIN to write the corresponding gain parameters to the servo. Press WR
NOTH to write the parameter values for resonance suppression to the servo.
Note:
1. You have to write the results of auto tuning to the servo for the values to take effect.
2. After writing the gain values and resonance values, the servo parameters are updated and the
previous settings cannot be restored. Thus, double check before writing the values.
9-27
 Calibration for tapping (TAP RIV): In tapping applications, calibrate the machine and
servo with this function.
If you use Delta servo products for the spindle, the operation steps for TAP SET(1) are as
9 follows.
(4) Complete the gain tuning for the servo axes X, Y, and Z, and the spindle.
(5) Press to switch to the function bar on the last page.
(6) Press TAP RIV to switch to the corresponding screen.
(7) Press TAP SET (1) and a confirmation window appears. Enter “Y” and press ENTER
to complete calibrating the machine for tapping applications.
If you use Delta AC inverters or third-party servo for the spindle, the operation steps for
TAP SET (2) are as follows.
(4) Complete the gain tuning for the servo axes X, Y, and Z, and the spindle.
(5) Press to switch to the function bar on the last page.
(6) Press TAP RIV to switch to the corresponding screen.
(7) Next, press TAP SET (2) and a confirmation window appears. Enter “Y” and press
ENTER . Next, the spindle control ratio gain input window will appear; enter the correct
value and then press ENTER, and the system will adjust the tap setting of the machine
according to this value.
 Servo parameters (SERVO): For displaying and setting servo parameters in the Servo
Tuning screen. The operation steps are as follows.
(4) Press repeatedly to switch to the function bar on the last page.
(5) Press SRV MON to display the servo parameter screen.
(6) Move the cursor to the field of the parameter to be edited, enter the value, and press
ENTER to complete the setting for that parameter field.
9-28
9.8 Import (IMPORT)

You can use this function to import the backup parameters to the NC system with security
authorized. The operation steps for importing parameters are as follows:
(3) Press IMPORT to display the file manager (FILE) window as shown in Figure 9.8.1. Press
9
and , select the directory for importing, and press ENTER to read the files in the folder.
Figure 9.8.1
(4) After entering the parameter selection screen, press , , and to move the
cursor to the system parameter to be imported, press ENTER to select it or cancel
selection.
(5) To select all the check boxes, press SEL ALL. To clear all the selected check boxes, press
CLR ALL.
Figure 9.8.2
9-29
(6) Press IMPORT and a dialog box for confirmation appears. Enter “Y” and press ENTER to
import the data of the files to the system. Then, a progress bar of the importing process is
displayed. Cycle power to the system after completing importing the files.
Figure 9.8.3
9-30
9.9 Export (EXPORT)

Use this function to back up the parameters of the system. The exported files are divided into
three types: parameter files, MLC, and software panel. You have to access the security
authorization to use this function.
Type
Parameter files
Filename
PAR.ncp
Description
NC information, servo parameters, and alarms
9
MLC MLC.gmc MLC programs
MLC MLC.lad Image codes for MLC Ladder
MLC MLC.lcm Remarks for MLC Ladder

Screen information and element properties for software
Software panel HMI.cin
panel
Software panel HMI.img Graphic files for software panel
Software panel HMI.sci Project files for software panel
The operation steps for exporting parameters are as follows:

(3) Press EXPORT to enter the parameter export selection screen.
(4) After entering the parameter selection screen, press , , and to move the
cursor to the system parameter to be exported, press ENTER to select it or cancel selection.
To select all the check boxes, press SEL ALL. To clear all the selected check boxes, press
CLR ALL.
Figure 9.9.1
9-31
(5) Press EXPORT and the file manager (FILE) window appears as shown in Figure 9.9.2.
Press and to select the directory for saving the exported files, or directly enter the
folder name and press ENTER to save the exported files to the specified folder.
Figure 9.9.2
(6) Then, the screen displays a progress bar showing the exporting process until the
exporting is finished.
(7) If you want to save the exported file to a new created folder, name the folder, then press
FOLDER to save the exported file in the folder, as shown in Figure 9.9.2.
(8) If you save the exported file to a folder where an exported file already exists, a confirmation
window appears. Enter “Y” and press ENTER to replace the existing file with the newly
exported file.
Figure 9.9.3
9-32
9.10 Multi-language (TEXT WR)

The default display languages for the group screens and corresponding function bars are
Traditional Chinese, Simplified Chinese, and English. If there is a need for other languages, use
this function to switch the interface to other languages. Contact the distributors or equipment
suppliers for related information. 9
9.11 LOGO (LOGO WR)
Use LOGO WR to set the startup screen of the NC system with user-defined pictures for
displaying the trademark or for other purposes. This function is available only when you have
the proper authorization. The operation steps are as follows.
(2) Press repeatedly to display the function bar on the 2 nd page.
(3) Insert the USB disk with the correct system startup screen file (SYSLOGO.bin) in it to the
controller.
(4) Press LOGO WR and a dialog box appears for confirmation.
(5) Enter “Y”, press OK, and the system automatically reads and loads the startup screen file
from the USB disk.
(6) After the LOGO image file is updated, restart the system to display the updated startup
screen.
9-33
9-34
Alarm (ALM) Group
The ALM group displays the alarm messages issued by the system in real time.
10.1 Alarm (ALARM) ············································································· 10-2

10.2 Alarm history (HISTORY)································································· 10-3
10-1
Alarm (ALM) Group Milling Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual
If an alarm occurs due to execution error or incorrect command format, the Alarm screen is
automatically displayed.
This group shows the alarm messages issued by the system in real time for you to troubleshoot
10 the errors according to the displayed alarm information. In addition to displaying the current
alarms, the ALM group also records the previous alarms.
10.1 Alarm (ALARM)

When an alarm occurs, troubleshoot the issue first, and then press RESET to clear the alarm
and set the system to the initial status. The alarm display screen is as shown in the following
figure and the sections with indicators show information about the alarms.
(1)
(2)
(3)
Figure 10.1.1
(1) Alarm message (3) Alarm code
(2) Sequence of alarm occurrence
The operation steps for displaying and clearing the alarm messages are as follows.
(1) Press ALM to enter the ALM screen.
(2) Press ALARM to enter the alarm message screen.
(3) Press RESET to clear the alarm messages shown on the screen.
10-2
Milling Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Alarm (ALM) Group
10.2 Alarm history (HISTORY)
This function records all the issued alarm messages and history information. In the History
screen, you can access the error history during system execution as well as troubleshoot and
analyze the errors according to the occurrence time and types of alarms. The alarm history
records the occurrence time and names of the alarms. It can record up to 512 sets of data. In
10
addition to displaying the alarm information, you can also delete the alarm history with this
function.
Figure 10.2.1
The operation steps for clearing all the alarm history are as follows.
(1) Press ALM to enter the ALM screen.
(2) Press HISTORY to enter the alarm history screen.
(3) Press CLR ALL and a confirmation window appears.
(4) Press Y and then ENTER to clear all the alarm history.
10-3
Alarm (ALM) Group Milling Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual
10
10-4
Graph (GRA) Group
The GRA group displays the real-time motion trajectory when the program is executing
or checks the machining program when the program is not executing.
11.1 Trajectory display ··········································································· 11-3

11.2 Program simulation ········································································ 11-4
11-1
Graph (GRA) Group Milling Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual
The GRA group provides two functions, trajectory display and program simulation (preview).
Trajectory display: displays the current processing trajectory during processing.
Program simulation: for checking whether the program format and path are correct before
11 processing.
11-2
Milling Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Graph (GRA) Group
11.1 Trajectory display

When a machining program is executing, switch the system to GRA mode, and the system
11
automatically draws the motion trajectory of the current program on the screen, with which you
can check if the actual machining path is correct.
Function descriptions of the keys are as follows.

(1) GRA: enters the GRA screen.
(2) CENT SET (center setting): displays the current motion trajectory in the center of the
display area.
(3) WIN RST (window reset): scales the graph to a moderate size and locate it in the middle of
the screen.
(4) WIN SET (window adjustment): press UP, DOWN, LEFT, RIGHT, ZM IN, and ZM OUT in
the WIN SET screen to adjust the display of the path graph.
(5) Clear: clears the content of the tool path display area.
11-3
Graph (GRA) Group Milling Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual
11.2 Program simulation

This function draws the complete path of the G-code program for you to check if the program
11
format is correct before the machining starts. This function can be further divided into GRAPHIC
(graphic preview) and PREVIEW (machining preview).
Function descriptions of the keys are as follows.

(1) Press the GRA button to enter the GRA screen.
(2) CENT SET (center setting): displays the current motion trajectory in the center of the
display area.
(3) WIN RST (window reset): scales the graph to a moderate size and locate it in the middle of
the screen.
(4) WIN SET (window adjustment): press UP, DOWN, LEFT, RIGHT, ZM IN, and ZM OUT in
the WIN SET screen to adjust the display of the path graph.
(5) PV (Step Preview): draws the path of one single block when this key is pressed.
(6) GRAPHIC: checks the program format without referring to the software limit and draws the
complete path according to the program.
(7) PREVIEW: checks the program format by referring to the software limit. The settings of the
coordinate system and the tool compensation should match the actual application so the
complete path can be correctly drawn.
(8) Clear: clears the content of the tool path display area.
Pay attention to the following when using the functions of GRA:

1. When the Preview function is enabled, machining execution is prohibited.
2. When the Preview function is enabled, switching the system mode will force close this
function.
3. If you cancel the preview during previewing, you need to start from the initial block if
desiring to preview again.
4. Graphs drawn by the function of GRAPHIC or PREVIEW may exceed the display area
because of the workpiece coordinate settings. If so, press GRAPHIC or PREVIEW again,
and the system automatically displays a moderate preview graph in the center of the display
area.
5. Use Pr14003 to set the default display of the graph.
11-4
Parameter (PAR) Group
The PAR group gathers the control and setting of various functions of the NC system in
this group. This chapter introduces functions and settings for all of the parameters.
12.1 Machining parameter (PROCESS) ···················································· 12-4

12.1.1 Machining parameter descriptions ············································· 12-4
12.2 Operating parameter (OPERATE) ····················································· 12-7
12.2.1 Operating parameter descriptions ············································· 12-7
12.3 Tool magazine parameter (MAGA) ···················································12-22
12.3.1 Tool magazine parameter descriptions ······································12-22
12.4 Spindle parameter (SPINDLE) ·························································12-24
12.4.1 Spindle parameter descriptions ················································12-24
12.5 Machine parameter (MACHINE) ·······················································12-30
12.5.1 Machine parameter descriptions ··············································12-30
12.6 Homimg parameter (HOME)····························································12-32
12.6.1 Homing parameter descriptions ···············································12-32
12.7 Ethernet setting (ETH.) ··································································12-38
12.7.1 Ethernet parameter descriptions ··············································12-38
12.8 Compensation parameter (COMP) ···················································12-40
12.8.1 Compensation parameter descriptions ······································12-41
12.9 System parameter (SYSTEM) ·························································12-44
12.9.1 System parameter descriptions ················································12-44
12.10 MLC setting (MLC) ········································································12-52
12.10.1 MLC parameter descriptions ···················································12-52
12.11 Graph parameter (GRAPHIC) ··························································12-56
12.11.1 Graph parameter descriptions ·················································12-56
12.12 Servo parameter (SERVO) ·····························································12-58
12.12.1 Servo parameter descriptions ··················································12-58
12.13 Channel setting (CONFIG) ······························································12-61
12.14 RIO setting ··················································································12-62
12.14.1 Details of RIO setting·····························································12-63
12.14.2 Setting DA module (NC-EIO-DAC04) ········································12-65
12.15 Search (SEARCH) ········································································12-66
12.16 Parameter group (PARAM GRP) ······················································12-66
12.17 Other settings ··············································································12-68
12-1
Parameter (PAR) Group Milling Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual
12.17.1 Setting for absolute motor·······················································12-68

12.17.2 Setting synchronous motion control ··········································12-70
12.17.3 Command transfer ································································12-73
12
12-2
Milling Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Parameter (PAR) Group
The PAR group is distinguished according to the functions into machining parameters, operation
parameters, tool magazine parameters, spindle parameters, machine parameters, home
12
parameters, network settings, compensation parameters, system parameters, MLC settings,
graphic parameters, servo parameters, channel settings, RIO settings and parameter group
functions.
The operation steps for modifying parameters are as follows:

(1) Press PAR to enter the Parameter (Group) screen.
(2) Press the function buttons F1 - F6 to enter the setting screen of the parameter to modify.
(3) Press and to move the cursor to the specified field, and enter a value within the range
specified in the lower right corner of the screen.
(4) Press ENTER to complete the setting.
The timing for parameters to take effect is divided into three types according to their properties:
after cycling power to the servo drive (S), after cycling power to the system (P), or after pressing
RESET (R). You can determine the corresponding operations based on the red (P), (R) and (S)
texts displayed at the top-right corner of the screen after changing the parameters.
Note:
1. Function names in a box (such as POS) mean the keys on machine operation panel A; bold function
names (such as CLR ALL) mean the function keys of F1 - F6.
2. In the PAR screen, enter “S + parameter number” and you are directed to the specified parameter
immediately.
12-3
12.1 Machining parameter (PROCESS)

Settings for machining parameters include maximum cutting speed, acceleration and
12
deceleration times for cutting and smoothing, and other parameter settings for computation
functions. It can have prominent effects on the machining results. Properly set the values
according to the actual requirements to achieve the best performance.
12.1.1 Machining parameter descriptions
Parameter Default Setting

Item Description Note
No. value range
During circular interpolation, the arc shifts
inward because of the delayed following of
the servo. With the shift amount fixed, you
Arc cutting can set the maximum feed rate of the arc
309 reference feed radius with this parameter. The higher the 1000 10 - 50000 R
rate parameter value, the greater the shift amount
and the lower the machining precision, and
vice versa.
Unit: mm/min
Sets the minimum feed rate for executing
Min. arc circular interpolation. The higher the feed
310 reference feed rate, the less precise the machining and the 500 10 - 50000 R
rate more the contouring error, while it shortens
the machining time. Unit: mm/min
Sets the speed limit at corners. The higher

the value, the easier to keep the high speed
at corners for restoring to the feed rate before
deceleration. Setting the value too high or
improper setting may cause vibration of the
machine at the corners. Unit: mm/min
Max. corner
311 reference feed 100 0 - 50000 R
rate
Sets the default cutting speed. When the

parameter has setting value, when the cutting
Default cutting command did not specify a F value,
314 0 0 - 20000 P
feed rate the cutting speed will specify this parameter
value as the default cutting
speed. Unit: mm/min, inch/min
Sets the feed rate for rapid traverse when the
G00 feed rate at
315 rapid traverse override is set to 0%. 100 10 - 10000 P
0% (override)
Unit: mm/min, inch/min
Sets the maximum speed of each axis for
316 G00 feed rate RAPID mode and G00. Unit: mm/min, 5000 1 - 600000 R
inch/min
Sets the acceleration and deceleration time
G00 ACC/DEC
317 for rapid traverse. 200 1 - 2000 R
time constant
Unit: msec
Max. cutting feed Sets the maximum cutting feed rate.
318 5000 1 - 600000 R
rate Unit: mm/min, inch/min
12-4

No. value range
Sets the acceleration and deceleration time
Cutting for cutting speed. Unit: msec
12
319 ACC/DEC time 200 1 - 2000 R
constant (acceleration and deceleration time before
interpolation)
Sets the S-curve time for cutting speed. Unit:
Cutting S-curve msec
320 20 1 - 2000 R
time constant (acceleration and deceleration time before
interpolation)
Sets the post acceleration and deceleration
Cutting post time for cutting speed. The higher the value,
321 ACC/DEC time the more the contouring error. Unit: msec 50 1 - 500 R
constant (acceleration and deceleration time after
interpolation)
S-curve time Sets the post acceleration/deceleration
322 constant after S-curve time. Unit: msec 10 1 - 100 R
cutting (ACC / DEC after interpolation)
Arc radius When the circular path is specified in center

323 1 1 - 60000 R
tolerance format (I, J, K), the controller calculates the
radius R1 (the distance from the start point to
the circle center) and the radius R2 (the
distance from the end point to the circle
center). The absolute difference between R1
and R2 should be smaller than Pr323 (|R1-R2|
< Pr323), or alarm B00D Radius mismatch
occurs.
Unit: μm
When the system performs curve fitting, if the
Max. block length block length of G01 exceeds the setting in
329 of path Pr329, the curve fitting for the block is 20 0 - 10000 R
smoothing automatically canceled and the linear
interpolation remains effective. Unit: 0.1 mm
When the angle specified by a single block
Min. corner angle exceeds the minimum angle of curve fitting,
330 of path the curve fitting for the corner is automatically 15 0 - 90 R
smoothing canceled and the sharpness is kept.
Unit: degree
It sets the minimum length for corner
detection. If the corner is formed of paths that
Length for are too short, the system keeps looking for
331 100 0 - 10000 R
corner detection the adjacent paths that are long enough and
then start calculating the corner angle.
Unit: 0.0001 mm
To have a smoother machining path, the
smoothing function automatically adjusts the
coordinates assigned in a single block and
this parameter sets the adjustable distance.
Tolerance of
The greater the value, the smoother the path
332 single-block path 0 0 - 10000 R
in the block, but the path is more unlikely to
smoothing
pass the coordinates set in the block. When
the value is smaller, its fitting curve will be
closer to the coordinates specified by the
original program. Unit: 0.0001 mm
12-5

No. value range
Cosine error for curve fitting. The greater the
value, the smoother the curve. But if the
12
tolerance is set too great, the more the
contouring error. The smaller the value, the
more likely the machining contour is close to
Tolerance of path
333 the programmed path for linear interpolation, 100 0 - 50000 R
smoothing
but the curve is less smooth. It is suggested
that the parameter value and the error value
set in the CAM software should be consistent
so as to make the path smoother without
affecting the precision. Unit: 0.0001 mm
Sets the radius for the rotation axis. The
greater the value, the slower the rotation
speed and vice versa.
Setting it to 0 disabled this function; at this
time, the feed rate of the rotation axis is F
(deg/min).
When set to a non-zero value, the system
defines this value as the radius of the rotation
axis to calculate the arc length, and performs
interpolation based on the arc length.
Meanwhile, the feed rate for the rotation axis is
determined by the F value (mm/min).
R
(Woodw
Radius of rotation
344 0 0 - 2000 orking
axis
machin
e only)
θ
𝐴𝑟𝑐 𝑙𝑒𝑛𝑔𝑡ℎ (𝑚𝑚) = 𝑅π
180
The default unit of feed rate for linear axes is
mm/min and that for the rotation axis is
deg/min. If the rotation axis used in the
application requires the feed rate to be
consistent with the tangential velocity
(mm/min), this function can be enabled; you
can set Pr344 with the setting value as close
as the distance between the cutting point and
the rotation center (rotation radius). The
smaller the value of Pr344, the faster the
cutting speed; the greater the value of Pr344,
the slower the cutting speed. Unit: 0.1 mm
Block No. to Sets the number of blocks to check in tool
check in tool compensation interference:
510 0 0-3 P
comp. Pr510 = 0: number of blocks = 3
interference Pr510 < 3: number of blocks = Pr510
Sets the acceleration and deceleration
G00 S-curve time
511 S-curve for the G00 movement. 1 0 - 2000 R
constant
Unit: msec
12-6
12.2 Operating parameter (OPERATE)
During G code program execution, macro program execution and computation can be used
to achieve combined compound movements.
You can set whether to execute specified macro programs or controls in the Operation
screen.
12
12.2.1 Operating parameter descriptions

No. value range
G code macro call-O9010
Set these parameters to 0 to disable macro call.
G-code macro
3 - 12 call - O9010 to G code macro call-O9014 0 0 - 1000 R
O9019 G code macro call-O9015
M code macro call-O9020
Set these parameters to 0 to disable macro call.
M-code macro
13 - 22 call - O9020 to M code macro call-O9024 0 0 - 1000 R
O9029 M code macro call-O9025
T code macro T code macro call-O9000
23 0 0-1 R
call - O9000 0: off; 1: on
Call O9030 after break line search.

0: function disabled. After finding the break line,
the system continues executing the program
without calling a macro.
Call O9030 after
24 1: function enabled. After finding the break line, 0 0-1 R
break line search
the system first calls and executes O9030
once CYCLE START is pressed, and then it
returns to the main program and carries on the
machining program followed by the breakpoint.
Sets G31 input polarity.

0: NC; 1: NO
System DIO Function Range
25 0 0-1 P
setting
G31 high speed input point 1 0-1
G31 high speed input point 2 0-1
12-7

No. value range
Function Range
Control output control mode
12
0
0: DMCNET
Homing before machining
0-1
0: Y; 1: N
Screw unit
0-1
0: metric; 1: imperial
G31 high speed input 1 switch
0-1
0: off; 1: on
G31 high speed input point 2 switch 0-
0-1 96 P
0: off; 1: on 0xFFFF
Hardware limit check
0-1
0: off; 1: on
Software limit check
0-1
0: off; 1: on
Ignore decimal places of moving
commands
System 0: do not omit
0-1
46 application (example: input 1 to indicate 1 μm)
setting 1: omit
(example: input 1 to indicate 1 mm)
Function Range
G00 operation mode
0: rapid feeding by multi-axis linear
interpolation (same as G01) 0-1
1: refers to the maximum feed rate of
each axis
Macro look-ahead
0-1
0: off; 1: on
0-
G00 path blending mode 96 P
0xFFFF
0: same axis; 1: different axes
0-1
The greater the setting value of Pr334,
the larger the chamfer of the path.
Return mode of one-key macro call
0: go to the next line; 1: return to the 0-1
interrupted line
Pre-warning for software limit
0-1
0: off; 1: on
MPG filter gain. For setting the MPG response.
The greater the value, the faster the response,
47 MGP gain 100 1 - 60000 R
but the machine is subject to vibration.
Unit: 0.0001
Sets the MPG filter.
0: disabled
48 MPG filter 0 0-6 R
Level 1 2 3 4 5 6
kHz 31 10 5 2.5 1.6 1.2
0: the 4th
axis includes both limit and home
signals
Axis port input 1: Changes the positive limit signal, negative limit
49 0 0-1 R
setting signal, and home signal of the 4th axis in axis
ports 1 - 4 to the home signals of the 4th, 5th,
and 6th axes.
Function Range
Macro file
50 Display O macro file 0-1 0 0-3 P
display
Display G/M macro file 0-1
12-8

No. value range
Function Range
12
Spindle check before cutting: when this
function is enabled, if a cutting command is
executed but the spindle is not in 0-1
System auxiliary operation, the system displays an alarm.
51 0 0-1 P
tool 0: off; 1: on
Non-volatile setting for #10450 -
#10500 0-1
0: on; 1: off
Function Range
Tool radius compensation first point
compensation mode 0-1
0: Type B; 1: Type A
G54 - G59 offset coordinate switch
0-1
0: off; 1: on
Stroke protection: When this function
is enabled, the Pr611 and Pr612 stroke
protection edge function will be 0-1
enabled.
0: off; 1: on
1st spindle OA/OB signal sequence
System auxiliary 0-1
51 0: AB; 1: BA 0 0-1 P
tool
Return mode after triggering M96
0: go to the next line; 1: return to the 0-1
interrupted line
G94 / G95 default setting
0-1
0: program; 1: Pr306
Draw coordinate selection
0-1
0: Machine; 1: absolute
MPG backtrack function: supports the
backtracking of 30 blocks 0-1
0: off; 1: on
Feedback check
0-1
0: on; 1: off
Unit setting for coordinate display. For example,
Unit decimal when you set this parameter to 3, the coordinates
301 3 0-4 P
places are displayed with three decimal places, such as
-99999.999 to +99999.999
Function Range
T code read mode (0: keep T; 1: clear)
0: After T code calls O9000 and reads
#20 repeatedly, keep the last T value
0-1
(default)
1: after T code calls O9000 and reads
Channel #20 repeatedly, the value read is 0
305 0 362 P
auxiliary setting
EMG stop source
0-1
0: system; 1: M1079
G0 / G1 transition speed
0: decelerate to zero speed
0-1
1: do not decelerate (according to the
setting of Pr334)
12-9

No. value range
Function Range
Run macro program in advance with T
12
code:
When the program runs to a few line
block before calling the T code of the
subroutine O9000 (the number of lines
for T code to run macro program in
advance can be set through Pr507),
call the subroutine automatically (the 0-1
number of the macro program for T
code to run in advance can be set
through Pr506). Once entered the
subroutine, the T code tool number can
be read at #20, and it supports multi-T
commands.
0: off; 1: on
Record machine coordinates after
triggering HSI 0-1
0: command; 1: feedback
MLC axis positioning command type:
0: floating point number; 1: integer
When set as floating point number, the
positioning command special D and
machine coordinates special D of the
MLC axis are both displayed in floating 0-1
point number format. If set as integer
format, the command refers to Pr301
[Number of decimal places of the unit]
and corresponds to the special D of
MLC positioning machine coordinates
and machine coordinates.
JOG speed mode:
When enabled, it will change the unit of
Channel D1062 (JOG and dry run speed setting)
305 from speed (F) to percentage (%), and 0 362 P
auxiliary setting
its limit is 100%. The numerical 0-1
specifications are the same as D1056
and D1058. At this time, the JOG
speed is Pr640×D1062 (%).
0: Speed; 1: %
Special D rotation axis coordinates
display range
0-1
0: The display range is [-360, 360]
1: The display range is [0, 360]
Short block feed rate limit
0: function disabled
1: function enabled
Related parameters: Pr504 short block
feed rate limit length (0.1 mm), Pr505
short block feed rate limit speed 0-1
magnification (0.1%). When this
function is enabled, when the block
length is less than the setting of
Pr504, the block speed = Pr505
parameter setting deceleration
percentage*G code specified F.
Preview function referencing cutting
speed override
Sets whether to refer to the cutting
speed override during preview
0: do not refer to cutting magnification
during preview. 0-1
Use the highest speed to preview
straight lines and refer to the speed
set in D1150 to preview arcs. When
the setting of D1150 is less than
80000 mm/min, the system performs
drawing preview at 80000 mm/min.
12-10

No. value range
1: refer to cutting magnification during
preview.
12
 When cutting speed override ≧
100%, use the highest speed to
preview straight lines and refer to
the speed set in D1150 to preview
arcs.
 0% < cutting speed override <
100%, the preview speed of
straight line and arc refers to the
setting of [Pr316*cutting speed
override]
 Cutting speed override = 0%, the
straight line and arc preview
speeds are F specified in the G
code.
RAPID mode maximum speed limit
reference:
In RAPID mode, the reference of the
maximum speed of each axis can be
determined by this parameter.
0: refer to the axis parameter Pr621 0-1
for the maximum speed of each
axis in RAPID mode.
1: refer to the axis parameter Pr638
for the maximum speed of each
axis in RAPID mode.
Function Range
Default unit
0-1
0: metric; 1: imperial
Default programming mode
0-1
0: absolute; 1: incremental
Default feed mode
1: feed per minute 0-1
0: feed per rotation
G-code Default plane
306 programming 0: G17 0 0-1 P
parameter 0-2
1: G18
2: G19
Default workpiece coordinates
0: G54
1: G55
2: G56 0-5
3: G57
4: G58
5: G59
Function Range
Tool length compensation movement
mode
0: immediately.
When the block has a tool length
compensation execution or
cancellation command without a Z
axis command, Z axis moves. 0-1
Channel 1: program. 0-
307 application When the block has a tool length 0xD4 P
0xFFFF
setting compensation execution or
cancellation command without a Z
axis command, Z axis will not
move.
Spindle speed after reset
0: command speed remains after
reset 0-1
1: command speed becomes 0 after
reset
12-11

No. value range
Software limit check mode
0: checks the program path machine
12
coordinates when software limit
0-1
checking
1: checks the tool path machine
coordinates software limit checking
Tool length input mode
Sets whether to deduct the tool length
(assigned by H1) during tool length
compensation using the H value in
G43/G44.
0-1
0: absolute (uses the length assigned
by H)
1: incremental (deducts the length of
the first tool from the assigned H
value)
G31 input source
0: off
1: HSI 1 0-3
2: HSI 2
3: HSI 1 & 2
Running mode after interruption
0: during the execution of a block, if
you manually move the tool from its
original position and then resumes
the program execution, the tool
moves the remaining distance first
and then returns to the original path
in the next motion block. (As shown
in the following figure)
0-1
1: during the execution of a block, if

you manually move the tool from its
original position and then resumes
the program execution, the tool
returns to the original path first and
then moves the remaining distance.
(As shown in the following figure)
Software limit alarm trigger mode

0: trigger the alarm when software
limit setting is exceeded.
When the machine coordinates
exceed the software limit setting,
the alarm occurs.
1: trigger the alarm when software 0-1
limit setting is reached or
exceeded.
When the machine coordinates
exceeded or is equal to the
software limit setting value, alarm
occurs.
EMG stop mode
0: after the controller stops, the servo
switches to Servo Off
0-2
stops and switches to Servo Off
12-12

No. value range
stops
MLC variable type
12
0: word type
1: double word type 0-1
Set this bit to 1 to change the
interface input / output registers to
8 sets (32-bit) from 16 sets (16-bit).
G00/G01 max. feed rate reference
0: resultant velocity.
For the maximum feed rate limit of
G0, refer to the machining
parameter Pr316 and operation
parameter Pr621; for the maximum
feed rate limit for G1, refer to the
machining parameter Pr318 and
the operation parameter Pr625.
0-1
1: individual velocity.
The maximum feed rate limit of G0,
does not refer to the operation
parameter Pr316, but refers to the
operation parameter Pr621; the
maximum feed rate limit for G1,
does not refer to the machining
parameter Pr318, but refers to the
operation parameter Pr625.
Return mode after interruption
0: G00, uses G00 mode to return to
the interruption 0-1
1: G01, uses G01 mode to return to
the interruption
Synchronous execution for M, S, and
T codes and G00
0: off; execute M, S, and T codes first
0-1
and then G00.
1: on; execute M, S, and T codes and
G00 synchronously.
Cancel tool radius compensation for
G00 block
0: Off; execute tool radius
0-1
compensation for the G00 block.
1: On; temporarily cancels tool radius
compensation for the G00 block.
Function Range
feed rate reference
0-1
0: program; 1: refers to Pr314
Local variable NULL function
0: off; #1 - #50 are 0 0-1
1: on; #1 - #50 are null
Current monitoring function
0-1
Channel 0: off; 1: on 0-
308 0 P
auxiliary setting Tool compensation interference check
0xFFFF
0-1
0: on; 1: off
Motion speed remains when
coordinates switch 0-1
0: off; 1: on
Motion speed remains when macro
call 0-1
0: off; 1: on
12-13

No. value range
Dynamic axis compensation function
0: Off. Disalbe the equal slope filter
12
compensation function and retains
the filter output to prevent the motor
from suddenly reversing to the
position before compensation 0-1
enabled.
1: On. Enalbe the equal slope filter
compensation function. The
corresponding special D range of
each axis is D1126 - D1146.
Pause before running M99
0: M99 continues to run the functions 0-1
1: pause before running M99
Tool number display mode
The special D in MLC controls the
display function of the spindle tool
number, standby tool number and
command tool number on the POS
page. Spindle tool number: D1172; 0-1
standby tool number: D1173;
command tool number: D1174
0: G code
1: D1172
Feed/rev mode reference
0: command; refer to the spindle
command speed for the calculation
of the cutting speed in feed/rev
mode 0-1
1: feedback; refer to the spindle
feedback speed for the calculation
of the cutting speed in feed/rev
mode
Peck-drilling Set the retreat amount of drill chip removal.
324 100 1 - 50000 R
escape amount Unit: μm
Function Range
Tool withdraw direction
(for setting the withdraw direction of the
0-3
G76 / G87 cycle command tool)
0: +X; 1: -X; 2: +Y; 3: -Y
0-
326 Cycle parameter Tapping mode 0 R
0xFFFF
0: general
1: deep-pecking (feed amount = Q, 0-2
retract amount = R)
2: pecking (feed amount = Q, retract
amount = D)
Sets the time for the servo motor to decelerate to
EMG stop time
327 zero speed when the emergency stop is pressed 50 5 - 500 R
constant
in AUTO mode. Unit: msec
Sets the delay time for the special M relay M2114
EMG stop delay
328 System emergency stop when the system is 35 0 - 2000 R
time
stopped and in Servo Off status. Unit: msec
The speed does not decelerate to zero when G00
is executed between blocks. Use this parameter to
set the blending ratio. The greater the value, the
G00 blending
334 less the deceleration at block transitions and the 0 0 - 100 R
ratio
faster the speed; the smaller the value, the more
the deceleration at block transitions and the slower
the speed. Unit: %
Halt M code 1
Halt M code 0: no setting
350 - 359 0 0 - 1000 P
1 - 10 Halt M code 2
Halt M code 3
12-14

No. value range
Halt M code 4
Halt Mcode 5
Halt M code 6
Halt M code 7
Halt M code 8
12
Halt M code 9
Halt M code 10
Synchronization direction control
Bit 0 - 8: synchronous control of X - W
0: same direction
1: different directions
Function Range
Synchronous direction for X axis 0-1
Synchronization Synchronous direction for Y axis 0-1

360 0 0 - 0x3F P
direction control Synchronous direction for Z axis 0-1
Synchronous direction for A axis 0-1
Synchronous direction for B axis 0-1
Synchronous direction for C axis 0-1
Synchronous direction for U axis 0-1
Synchronous direction for V axis 0-1
Synchronous direction for W axis 0-1
Specifies the master axis when X axis is the slave
axis. For example, set this parameter to 2 if
Synchronous desiring to set the Y axis as the master axis for
361 0 0-9 P
control X synchronous control.
0: disabled; 1 - 9: X - W
Specifies the master axis when Y axis is the slave
Synchronous axis.
362 0 0-9 P
control Y
Specifies the master axis when Z axis is the slave
Synchronous axis.
363 0 0-9 P
control Z
Specifies the master axis when A axis is the slave
Synchronous axis.
364 0 0-9 P
control A
Specifies the master axis when B axis is the slave
Synchronous axis.
365 0 0-9 P
control B
Specifies the master axis when C axis is the slave
Synchronous axis.
366 0 0-9 P
control C
Specifies the master axis when U axis is the slave
Synchronous axis.
367 0 0-9 P
control U
Specifies the master axis when V axis is the slave
Synchronous axis.
368 0 0-9 P
control V
Specifies the master axis when W axis is the
Synchronous slave axis.
369 0 0-9 P
control W
12-15

No. value range
Specifies the X axis as the axis to receive the
transfer command. When transfer control function
12
is enabled, the command is transferred to have
Transfer control the X axis move while the originally commanded
371 axis does not move. For example, set this 0 0-9 P
X
parameter to 2 if desiring to transfer the control
command from the Y axis.
Specifies the Y axis as the axis to receive the
Transfer control is enabled, the command is transferred to have
372 the Y axis move while the originally commanded 0 0-9 P
Y
axis does not move.
Specifies the Z axis as the axis to receive the
373 the Z axis move while the originally commanded 0 0-9 P
Z
axis does not move.
Specifies the A axis as the axis to receive the
374 the A axis move while the originally commanded 0 0-9 P
A
axis does not move.
Specifies B axis as the axis to receive the transfer
command. When transfer control function is
Transfer control enabled, the command is transferred to have the
375 B axis move while the originally commanded axis 0 0-9 P
B
does not move.
Specifies the C axis as the axis to receive the
376 the C axis move while the originally commanded 0 0-9 P
C
axis does not move.
Specifies U axis as the axis to receive the transfer
command. When transfer control function is
Transfer control enabled, the command is transferred to have the
377 U axis move while the originally commanded axis 0 0-9 P
U
does not move.
Specifies the V axis as the axis to receive the
378 the V axis move while the originally commanded 0 0-9 P
V
axis does not move.
Specifies W axis as the axis to receive the
379 the W axis move while the originally commanded 0 0-9 P
W
axis does not move.
12-16

No. value range
Function Range
12
[MPG backtrack setting when running
to M, S, and T codes]
When using the MPG to backtrack to a
specific line and encounter an M, S, or
T code, the M, S, and T codes can be
skipped. 0-1
0: stop backtracking when
encountering the M, S, or T code.
1: skip the M, S, and T codes when
using the MPG to backtrack.
[Homing speed refers to feedrate
override setting]
This parameter sets to refer to the
feedrate override setting when
homing. 0–1
0: off; not ot refer to the feedrate
override setting.
1: on; refer to D1056 for the hard stop
Channel searching speed and homing speed
485 application 0 0 - 65535 P
[MPG simulation when homing]
setting
0: off
0-1
1: on; perform the homing procedure
with MPG.
[Lock axis positive / negative
movement in AUTO mode]
When the special M corresponding to
the axial is triggered, the system in
JOG or MPG mode checks the current
operating diection and lock the axis
movement.
In HOME mode, once any of the
special M corresponding to the axis 0-1
movemen is triggered, the homing
procedure stops.
When an arc command is executed,
the system also checks the operating
direction.
0: off
1: enable the positive and negative
axis lock in AUTO mode
Function Range
X axis movement protection

This parameter sets the axis
movement protection. You can enable
the protection function for specific
axes. When function enabled, if there
is axis movement in the block, the axis 0-1
can move only when the
corresponding special M relays
(M2400 – 2408)
0: off
Axis movement 1: enable movement protection
501 protection 0 0-1 P
Y axis movement protection
setting
0: off 0-1
1: enable movement protection
Z axis movement protection
0: off 0-1
A axis movement protection
0: off 0-1
B axis movement protection
0-1
0: off
12-17

No. value range
C axis movement protection
12
0: off 0-1
U axis movement protection
0: off 0-1
V axis movement protection
0: off 0-1
W axis movement protection
0: off 0-1
Short block feed rate limit length (0.1 mm), this

Short block feed function switch is the auxiliary setting of the
504 0 0 - 65535 R
rate limit length Pr305 channel - short block feed rate limit.
Note: Please refer to the related parameter Pr505.
Short block feed rate limit length speed

magnification (0.1%), when this function is
Short block feed enabled, when the block length is less than the
rate limit length setting of Pr504, block speed = Pr505 parameter
505 0 0 - 1000 R
speed setting deceleration percentage*specified F of G
magnification code.
Note: Please refer to the related parameters Pr305 and
Pr504.
When the program runs to a few line block before
calling the T code of the subroutine O9000 (the
Run macro number of lines can be set through Pr507), call
program in the subroutine automatically (the number of the
506 0 0 - 9999 P
advance with T macro program can be set through Pr506).
code Once entered the subroutine, the T code tool
number can be read at #20, and it supports
multiple T code commands.
When the program runs to a few line block before
calling the T code of the subroutine O9000 (the
Number of lines
number of lines can be set through Pr507), call
to run macro
the subroutine automatically (the number of the
507 program in 0 0 - 10 P
macro program can be set through Pr506).
advance with T
Once entered the subroutine, the T code tool
code
number can be read at #20, and it supports
multiple T code commands.
This function sets the spindle to the rotation axis
mode.
Polygon cutting Use this parameter to set the rotation axis (tool
508 axis) to use. 0 0-9 P
axis setting
0: off
4 - 9: A - W
Torque limit for each servo axis (combined in
binary); Bit 0 indicates X axis, Bit 1 indicates Y
Torque limit for
509 axis, Bit 2 indicates Z axis, and so on. For 0 0 - 65535 P
each axis
example, to enable the torque limit of X and Z
axes, simply set Pr509 to 5.
When the command specifies a movement while
it is not shown in the feedback and the movement
Feedback check
514 exceeds the value set by Pr514, alarm 4FFD 0 0 - 65535 R
time
occurs.
Unit: ms
12-18

No. value range
Function Range
12
Z axis high speed input point setting
0-1
0: off; 1: on
Input source A axis high speed input point setting

2005 0-1 0 0 - 61440 P
setup 0: off; 1: on
B axis high speed input point setting
0-1
0: off; 1: on
C axis high speed input point setting
0-1
0: off; 1: on
Function Range
U axis high speed input point setting

0-1
0: off; 1: on
V axis high speed input point setting
Input source 0-1
2006 0: off; 1: on 0 0 - 49155 P
setup
Origin / limit planning
0-1
0: off; 1: on
Emergency stop contact source
0: IES 0-1
1: CN1 emergency stop contact
Function Range
HSI 1 trigger setting

0-1
0: rising-edge; 1: falling-edge
High speed input
2010 HSI 2 trigger setting 0 0 - 65535 P
trigger setting 0-1
0: rising-edge; 1: falling-edge
Sets the high speed input rising-edge (set as 0)
count; falling-edge (set as 1) count.
PMC module output setting

0: general (servo)
1: bridge (command = feedback)
Function Range
st
1 axis feedback source 0-1
nd
3rd axis feedback source 0-1
th
5th axis feedback source 0-1
th
PMC module
2049 0 0 - 65535 P
output setting th
th
Pulse command type

0: A/B Phase
1: CW/CCW 0-3
2: Pulse/Dir
3: A/B Phase (same as 0)
Pulse logic
0-1
0: positive; 1: negative
12-19

No. value range
1st PMC
encoder
12
2050 The motor single-frequency pulse number. 0 0 - 65535 P
resolution
(single-phase)
2nd PMC
encoder
resolution
(single-phase)
3rd PMC
encoder
resolution
(single-phase)
4th PMC
encoder
resolution
(single-phase)
5th PMC
encoder
resolution
(single-phase)
6th PMC
encoder
resolution
(single-phase)
7th PMC
encoder
resolution
(single-phase)
8th PMC
encoder
resolution
(single-phase)
9th PMC
encoder
resolution
(single-phase)
10th PMC
encoder
resolution
(single-phase)
Command format:
Using C axis as the rotation axis for example,
1. G19 => first select the cylindrical coordinate
Parallel axis of interpolation machining plane
cylindrical
601 interpolation 2. G07.1 C_ => enable the cylindrical coordinate 0 0-3 P
rotation axis interpolation,
(1 - 3: X - Z) C_: Set the radius of the milling cylinder
3. Description of the milling path
4. G07.1 C0. => disable the cylindrical
interpolation
Sets the maximum speed for G00 and manual
G00/manual
621 movement. 5000 0 - 600000 P
maximum speed
Unit: mm/min, inch/min, rpm
G00/manual Sets the acceleration or deceleration time. Unit:

622 50 0 - 10000 P
ACC/DEC time msec
623 S-curve time Sets the time constant for S-curve. Unit: msec 5 1 - 2000 P
G01 maximum
625 Sets the maximum speed for G01. 0 0 - 60000 R
speed
12-20

No. value range
RAPID mode
638 maximum speed Maximum speed limit of RAPID mode. 10 0 - 65535 R
12
limit
JOG speed override is the maximum speed limit
at 100%.
Note:
100% JOG
640 1. Refer to Pr305 [Jog speed mode] on how to 0 0 - 65535 R
speed
enable the function.
2. Refer to Pr621 [G00 and manual maximum speed
limit] for speed limits.
During synchronous control, if the following error
Synchronous between the master and slave axes exceeds this
642 50 0 - 1000 R
tolerance value, the B645 Excessive synchronous following
error occurs. Unit: 0.1 mm
If the following error exceeds the setting in any
Feedback movement, the B630 alarm occurs. This
643 30000 1 - 60000 R
following error parameter is for setting the tolerance for the
servo following command. Unit: CU
G00, G09, G61 position reached check function.
When Pr646 position reached range (linear axis:
0.001 mm; rotation axis: 0.1 degrees) is not set
as 0, the position reached check function for that
Position reached axial is enabled. Once the position reached check
646 0 0 - 6000 R
range function is enabled, the amount of error of the
moving axial command and feedback (Cmd -Fbk)
in the block must be less than the Pr646
parameter setting value of that axis in order to run
the next block.
When bootup, the system checks the error
Feedback
between the command and the feedback from
648 position check 20 1 - 6000 R
servo. If the error exceeds the setting, the servo
after bootup
cannot switch to Servo on.
12-21
12.3 Tool magazine parameter (MAGA)

Tool magazine parameters are for enabling magazine-related functions. With these parameters,
12
you can specify the type and number of magazines and determine whether to enable the tool
magazine functions. Contact the distributors or equipment suppliers for settings of hardware
parameters.
12.3.1 Tool magazine parameter descriptions
Para-
Default Setting
meter Item Description Note
value range
No.
Function Range
Spindle tool No. after magazine
reset
0
0: 0
Tool magazine
336 1: continue numbering 0x0800 0 - 65535 P
control
Types of ATC
0: exchange arm (Exchanger) 0-1
1: disk (Non-exchanger)
Function Range
Tool magazine 1
0: off (tool magazine data table is
not updated instantly) 0-1
Tool magazine 1: on (tool magazine data table is
337 1 0-3 P
switch updated instantly)
Enable tool magazine 2

0: off 0-1
1: enable
Sets the number of tool stations of tool

magazine 1 (in response to the mechanical
Tool magazine 1
338 differences of tool magazines, you need to set 10 2 - 255 P
total tool No.
the number of the placeable tools with this
parameter).
Tool magazine 1
Sets the standby tool pocket number when the
339 standby tool No. 1 1 - 100 P
reset function is used for tool magazine 1.
after reset
Sets the tool number of the start tool pocket
Tool magazine 1
340 when the reset function is used for tool 1 1 - 100 P
start tool No.
magazine 1.
Sets the number of tool stations of tool
magazine 2 (in response to the mechanical
Tool magazine 2
341 differences of tool magazines, you need to set 10 2 - 255 P
total tool No.
the number of the placeable tools with this
parameter).
Tool magazine 2
Sets the standby tool pocket number when the
342 standby tool No. 1 1 - 100 P
reset function is used for tool magazine 2.
after reset
Sets the tool number of the start tool pocket
Tool magazine 2
343 when the reset function is used for tool 1 1 - 100 P
start tool No.
magazine 2.
1st DMCNET servo
2012 Supported station numbers are 10 to 12. 0 0 - 65535 P
magazine
12-22
Para-
Default Setting
value range
No.
2nd DMCNET servo
12
magazine
3rd DMCNET servo
magazine
12-23
12.4 Spindle parameter (SPINDLE)

Spindle parameters are for setting various spindle functions, such as spindle gain, spindle
12
maximum speed, and spindle positioning tolerance.
12.4.1 Spindle parameter descriptions

No. value range
Calibrates the spindle voltage output. When the

inverter is Servo On and the spindle is stopped
Spindle voltage by the controller, if the spindle is still rotating, -1000 to
37 0 R
output offset set this parameter to adjust the voltage output +1000
to have the spindle to come to a stop.
Unit: 0.001V
Spindle default
398 Spindle default speed. 0 0 - 60000 P
speed
Function Range
Spindle function
0: disable spindle 0-1
1: enable spindle
0: off
1: enable closed-loop control 0-1
(must have feedback encoder
attached)
Spindle output mode
0: communication (DMCNET)
1: pulse 0-2
2: analog
Speed control mode

0: reserved 1
1: PPM (DMCNET)
Spindle 0: 1000 times 0-1
399 application 1: 4 times 0 0 - 0xFFFF P
setting
0: command 0-1
1: encoder
Analog spindle feedback encoder
source
0: spindle 0-1
1: motor
Spindle speed reference

0: program 0-1
1: Pr398
Spindle Max. speed command
check
0: off 0-1
1: on
Spindle speed D1380 display mode

0: S code; S code command speed
0-1
1: Real-time; spindle real-time
command speed
12-24

No. value range
12
(only effective in open loop control)
0: -10V to +10V 0-1
1: 0V to +10V
Multi-stage spindle feedback

encoder switch
0: off 0-1
1: on
Spindle encoder
401 Set spindle encoder port No. 8 0-8 P
port No.
Sets the spindle encoder resolution
Spindle encoder
402 (single-phase). 1280 2 - 60000 P
resolution
Unit: pulse/rev
Sets the speed integral gain. The greater the
Spindle integral value, the faster the response. But if the gain is
403 50 1 - 5000 P
gain too large, it may cause machine jitter.
Unit: 0.001 rad/s
Sets the maximum speed for spindle
positioning. If the current speed exceeds the
setting of Pr404, the system decreases the
Spindle high
spindle speed to the speed set in Pr404 and
404 positioning 100 1 - 20000 P
then performs spindle positioning. In addition, if
speed
the spindle speed is lower than the setting of
Pr404, it refers to Pr420 Spindle low positioning
speed. Unit: rpm
Sets the Z-phase offset for servo spindle
Spindle
405 positioning. 0 0 - 36000 R
positioning offset
Unit: 0.01 degree
Sets the allowable tolerance between the target
Spindle target
406 speed and actual speed of the spindle. 10 0 - 300 P
speed tolerance
Unit: rpm
Sets the spindle positioning tolerance. If the
Spindle actual positioning tolerance exceeds the
407 positioning setting, spindle positioning will be determined to 100 0 - 36000 P
tolerance be incomplete, and M2258 is not triggered.
Unit: 0.01 degree
Spindle zero If the spindle speed is within the tolerance range,

408 5 0 - 1000 P
speed tolerance the zero speed signal is on. (NC > MLC M2257)
Spindle Sets the maximum speed for spindle.

409 20000 0 - 600000 P
maximum speed Unit: rpm
Spindle Sets the acceleration and deceleration time for

411 ACC/DEC time the spindle. The greater the value, the longer the 20 1 - 20000 R
constant acceleration and deceleration time. Unit: msec
Spindle S-curve
Sets the S-curve time constant of the spindle.
412 time 10 1 - 2000 R
Unit: msec
constant
Switch M1127 to instantly change the spindle
Spindle 2nd Kpp Kpp gain. Set M1127 to On and the spindle Kpp
413 1 1 - 1000 R
gain gain refers to Pr413. Set M1127 to Off and the
spindle Kpp gain refers to Pr419.
Tapping Sets the acceleration and deceleration time of
416 ACC/DEC time the spindle when it performs tapping. Unit: 2000 1 - 20000 R
constant msec
Tapping S-curve
Sets the S-curve time constant of the spindle
417 time 100 1 - 2000 R
when it performs tapping. Unit: msec
constant
12-25

No. value range
The greater the gain, the less the following
12
Spindle error. However, if the value is set too high, it
418 0 0 - 200 R
feedforward gain may make the control command less smooth
and cause machinery vibration.
When the spindle is under closed-loop voltage
control, use this parameter to adjust the spindle
position loop bandwidth. The greater the gain,
the more precise the positioning. However, if
419 Spindle Kpp gain the value is set too high, it may cause vibration. 0 0 - 1000 R
The parameter value is relevant to the
bandwidth of the inverter. It is recommended
that you start from a lower gain and then
gradually increase the value.
If the current spindle speed is slower than the
Spindle low
setting of Pr404 or is zero, when the system
420 positioning 100 1 - 20000 R
performs spindle positioning, it refers to the
speed
speed set by this parameter. Unit: rpm
Tapping retraction setting. The tapping
Tapping retraction speed is tapping F value multiplied by
421 retraction speed the ratio of Pr421 tapping retraction speed; the 10 10 - 50 R
ratio higher the ratio, the faster the retraction speed.
The ratio range is 1 - 5 times. Unit: 0.1 times
Gear ratio Sets the spindle gear ratio numerator (speed in
422 1 0 - 60000 P
numerator 1 first gear).
Gear ratio Sets the spindle gear ratio denominator (speed
423 1 0 - 60000 P
denominator 1 in first gear).
424 1 0 - 60000 P
numerator 2 second gear).
425 1 0 - 60000 P
denominator 2 in second gear).
426 1 0 - 60000 P
numerator 3 third gear).
427 1 0 - 60000 P
denominator 3 in third gear).
428 1 0 - 60000 P
numerator 4 fourth gear).
429 1 0 - 60000 P
denominator 4 in fourth gear).
If the difference between the command speed
and feedback speed of the first spindle is
greater than Pr406, and continually exceeds the
First spindle spindle speed error check time (msec) set by
436 speed error Pr436, an alarm will sound (B30A spindle 0 0 - 65535 R
check time rotation speed error too large), and the feed
axis and spindle will stop operating. When the
parameter Pr436 is set as 0, the spindle rotation
speed reached check will not be performed
Function Range
Proximity switch positioning turn:
when using the positioning function
of proximity switch, use this 0-3
parameter to set the number of
rotations during Z-phase searching.
Spindle auxiliary
437 Spindle target speed tolerance unit 0 0-3 P
function
switching:
0: the unit of Pr406 spindle target
speed tolerance is rpm 0-1
1: the unit of Pr406 spindle target
speed tolerance is per thousand
(0.1%)
12-26

No. value range
2nd spindle
12
438 The default spindle speed when power is on. 0 0 - 60000 P
default speed
Function Range
Spindle function
0: Disable spindle 0-1
1: Enable spindle
0: off
0-1
1: on (feedback encoder is
required)
Spindle output mode
0: Communication (DMCNET)
0-2
1: reserved
2: Analog
Speed control mode
0: Reserved 1-1
1: PPM (DMCNET)

0: 1000 times 0-1
2nd spindle
1: 4 times
439 application 0 0 - 0xFFFF P
setting Analog spindle speed source
0: command 0-1
1: encoder
Analog spindle feedback encoder
source
0: spindle 0-1
1: motor
Spindle speed reference

0: program 0-1
1: Pr398
Spindle Max. speed command

check
0: off 0-1
1: on
Spindle speed D1380 display mode

0: command speed (S-code) 0-1
1: feedback
2nd spindle
441 Sets the feedback channel of spindle encoder. 8 0-8 P
encoder port No.
2nd spindle
Sets the encoder resolution (single-phase).
442 encoder 1280 2 - 60000 P
Unit: pulse/rev
resolution
Sets the speed integral gain. The greater the
2nd spindle value, the faster the response. But if the gain is
443 50 1 - 1000 P
integral gain too large, it may cause machine jitter.
Unit: 0.001 rad/s
Sets the maximum speed for spindle
positioning. If the current speed exceeds the
setting of Pr444, the system decreases the
2nd spindle high
spindle speed to the speed set in Pr444 and
444 positioning 100 1 - 20000 P
then performs spindle positioning. In addition, if
speed
the spindle speed is lower than the setting of
Pr444, it refers to Pr460 Spindle low positioning
speed. Unit: rpm
2nd spindle Sets the Z-phase offset for servo spindle
445 0 0 - 36000 R
positioning offset positioning. Unit: 0.01 degree
12-27

No. value range
2nd spindle Sets the allowable tolerance between the target
12
446 target speed speed and actual speed of the spindle. Unit: 10 0 - 300 P
tolerance rpm
Sets the spindle positioning tolerance. If the
2nd spindle actual positioning tolerance exceeds the
447 positioning setting, spindle positioning will be determined to 100 0 - 36000 P
tolerance be incomplete, and M2258 is not triggered. Unit:
0.01 degree
If the spindle speed is within the tolerance
2nd spindle zero
448 range, the zero speed signal is on. (NC > MLC 5 0 - 1000 P
speed tolerance
M2257)
2nd spindle
449 Sets the maximum speed for spindle. Unit: rpm 20000 0 - 600000 P
maximum speed
2nd spindle
450 Sets the minimum speed for spindle. Unit: rpm 10 0 - 10000 P
minimum speed
Sets the acceleration and deceleration time for

Second spindle
the spindle. The greater the value, the longer
451 ACC/DEC 20 1 - 20000 R
the acceleration and deceleration time.
Time constant
Unit: msec
Second spindle
Sets the S-curve time constant of the spindle.
452 S-curve 10 1 - 2000 R
Unit: msec
Time constant
Switch M1127 to instantly change the spindle
Kpp gain.
2nd spindle 2nd
453 Set M1127 to On and the spindle Kpp gain 0 1 - 1000 R
Kpp gain
refers to Pr413; set M1127 to Off and the
spindle Kpp gain refers to Pr419.
2nd spindle
Sets the acceleration and deceleration time of
tapping
456 the spindle when it performs tapping. Unit: 2000 1 - 20000 R
ACC/DEC time
msec
constant
Second spindle
TAP Sets the S-curve time constant of the spindle
457 100 1 - 2000 R
S-curve time when it performs tapping. Unit: msec
constant
The greater the gain, the less the following
2nd spindle error. However, if the value is set too high, it
458 0 0 - 200 R
feedforward gain may make the control command less smooth
and cause machinery vibration.
When the spindle is under closed-loop voltage
control, use this parameter to adjust the spindle
position loop bandwidth. The greater the gain,
the more precise the positioning. However, if
2nd spindle Kpp
459 the value is set too high, it may cause vibration. 0 0 - 1000 R
gain
The parameter value is relevant to the
bandwidth of the inverter. It is recommended
that you start from a lower gain and then
gradually increase the value.
If the current spindle speed is slower than the
2nd spindle low setting of Pr404 or is zero, when the system
460 positioning performs spindle positioning, it refers to the 100 1 - 20000 P
speed speed set by this parameter.
Unit: rpm
Tapping retraction setting. The tapping
2nd spindle retraction speed is tapping F value multiplied by
461 tapping retraction the ratio of Pr421 tapping retraction speed; the 10 10 - 50 R
speed ratio higher the ratio, the faster the retraction speed.
The ratio range is 1 - 5 times. Unit: 0.1 times
12-28

No. value range
2nd spindle gear
12
Sets the 2nd spindle gear ratio numerator
462 ratio 1 0 - 60000 P
(speed in first gear).
numerator 1
2nd spindle gear
Sets the 2nd spindle gear ratio denominator
463 ratio 1 0 - 60000 P
(speed in first gear).
denominator 1
2nd spindle gear
464 ratio 1 0 - 60000 P
(speed in second gear).
numerator 2
2nd spindle gear
465 ratio 1 0 - 60000 P
(speed in second gear).
denominator 2
2nd spindle gear
466 ratio 1 0 - 60000 P
(speed in third gear).
numerator 3
2nd spindle gear
467 ratio 1 0 - 60000 P
(speed in third gear).
denominator 3
2nd spindle gear
468 ratio 1 0 - 60000 P
(speed in fourth gear).
numerator 4
2nd spindle gear
469 ratio 1 0 - 60000 P
(speed in fourth gear).
denominator 4
If the difference between the command speed
and feedback speed of the second spindle is
greater than the setting of Pr446 and the
duration exceeds the check time (msec) set in
Second spindle
Pr476, an alarm occurs (B30A spindle rotation
476 speed error 0 0 - 65535 R
speed error too large). Meanwhile, the feed axis
check time
and spindle stop operating. When the
parameter Pr476 is set to 0, the system does
not check if the spindle rotation speed is
reached.
Spindle target speed tolerance unit switching:
0: The unit of Pr446 spindle target speed
Second spindle
477 tolerance is rpm 0 0-3 P
auxiliary function
1: The unit of Pr446 spindle target speed
tolerance is per thousand (0.1%)
This system will filter the spindle feedback
signal (ms) with the following restrictions:
 Setting value = 0: performs spindle
Spindle feedback feedback filtering with the filter time of 4 ms.
512 speed  Setting value > 0 and < 200: use the set 0 0 - 65535 R
filter time value to perform filtering.
 Setting value > 200: perform spindle
feedback speed filtering with the filter time
of 200 ms.
12-29
12.5 Machine parameter (MACHINE)

Supports related parameter settings of the machine equipment; they can be set in the machine
12
parameter function page. Parameters such as software / hardware limits, lead screw pitch or
encoder pulse number etc.
12.5.1 Machine parameter descriptions
Para
Default Setting
value range
No.
Sets the machine coordinates for the 1st
software positive limit.
When set as 0, this function is disabled.
1st software positive Unit: mm -10^5 to
602 10^5 R
limit 1. Overtravel will cause software positive limit +10^5
error.
2. Special M can be used to control ignore
positive limit check.
Sets the machine coordinates for the 1st
software negative limit.
When set as 0, this function is disabled. Unit:
1st software negative mm -10^5 to
603 -10^5 R
limit 1. Overtravel will cause software negative limit +10^5
error.
2. Special M can be used to control ignore
negative limit check.
Sets the machine coordinates for the 2nd
software positive limit.
2nd software positive -10^5 to
604 When set as 0, this function is disabled. 10^5 R
limit +10^5
Overtravel will cause software positive limit error.
Unit: mm
software negative limit.
2nd software -10^5 to
605 When set as 0, this function is disabled. -10^5 R
negative limit +10^5
Overtravel will cause software negative limit
error. Unit: mm
First border of stroke protection.
This parameter must be used with Pr612 to form
the protection range for the axis. You must set
Stroke protection the border values for the X, Y and Z axes -10^5 to
611 altogether to form a three-dimensional 0 R
border 1 +10^5
rectancular cube. If you set the same value or 0
for both Pr611 and Pr612, the restricted zone is
invalid. The check switch for this parameter is
Pr51 (Stroke protection).
Second border of stroke protection.
This parameter must be used with Pr611 to form
the protection range for the axis. You must set
Stroke protection the border values for the X, Y and Z axes -10^5 to
612 altogether to form a three-dimensional 0 R
border 2 +10^5
rectancular cube. If you set the same value or 0
for both Pr611 and Pr612, the restricted zone is
invalid. The check switch for this parameter is
Pr51 (Stroke protection).
Set Pr634 [Bit 9] to 1 to enable the function of
decimal places of lead screw pitch.
Decimals of lead
627 After the function is enabled, the lead screw 0 0 – 9999 P
screw pitch
pitch for the axis is: Pr633 + Pr627 x 0.0001
(mm). Unit: 0.1 μm
12-30
Para
Default Setting
value range
No.
Sets the input polarity of positive / negative
12
hardware limits and the home sensor.
When set as 0, the input works as a normally
closed switch.
When set as 1, the input works as a normally
628 Sensor setting open switch. 0 0 - 3F P
Function Range
Positive limit sensor setting 0-1
Negative limit sensor setting 0-1
Home sensor setting 0-1
Sets the motor resolution per revolution

630 Encoder resolution 1280 10 - 50000 P
(single-phase).
Sets the gear number of the shaft. For example,

the motor decelerates when you set Pr631 to 10
and Pr632 to 1. (The number of revolutions of the
631 Shaft gear number motor and spindle are 10 and 1 respectively, so 1 1 - 65535 P
the deceleration ratio is 10:1.) Set both Pr631 and
Pr632 to 1 if there is no need to accelerate or
decelerate.
Sets the gear number for the motor. Refer to the
632 Motor gear number 1 1 - 65535 P
example of Pr631.
Sets the lead screw pitch for the drive shaft. The
setting is only available for linear axes (X, Y, and
633 Lead screw pitch Z axes) or when you set the linear axis as the 10 2 - 100 P
rotation axis.
Unit: mm
Function Range
Scale up (this parameter must be
used with the G50 command)
0-1
0: off
1: on
Rotation axis feed (available for A,
B, and C axes but not for X, Y, and
Z axes)
0: set as a rotation axis in
non-shortest path mode.
0-5
1: set as a roation axis in shortest
path mode0
2: set as a roation axis with the
display format of linear axis.
5: set as linear axis mode.
Encoder magnification
634 Axis control variables 0: 1000 times 0-1 5 0 - 65535 P
1: 4 times
Rotation axis unit (available for
Pr618, Pr619, Pr620, Pr621, and
Pr625) 0-1
0: rpm
1: deg/min
Decimal places of lead screw pitch
0: off 0-1
1: on
MPG reverse motion
0: the coordinate moves in the
positive direction when the MPG
rotates in the positive direction 0-1
1: the coordinate moves in the
negative direction when the MPG
rotates in the negative direction
12-31
12.6 Homimg parameter (HOME)

Homing parameters are for setting the home search mode and the machine coordinates for the
12
machine home, and the 2nd, 3rd, and 4th
reference points.
12.6.1 Homing parameter descriptions
Parameter Default
Item Description Setting range Note
No. value
Sets the distance from machine home sensor
Machine origin to Z-phase.
606 0 -10^5 to +10^5 R
coordinate The Z phase position is the machine origin
coordinates. Unit: CU
2nd reference
607 reference point (for setting the position of 0 -10^5 to +10^5 P
coordinate
G30) Unit: CU
3rd reference Sets the machine coordinates for the 3rd
608 0 -10^5 to +10^5 P
coordinate reference point. Unit: CU
4th reference Sets the machine coordinates for the 4th
609 0 -10^5 to +10^5 P
coordinate reference point. Unit: CU
Sets the position tolerance for the 2nd
Reference reference point. For example, when set as
610 position 0.2, it means when the position error is within 0 -10^8 to +10^8 P
tolerance the ±0.2 mm range, they are all regarded as
reaching the 2nd reference point.
The execution of homing is based on the
parameter setting and fine-tune the position
of the slave axis.
The setting method is as follows:
1. Enable the slave axis parameter Pr617
synchronous calibration function, and
confirm that the home parameters of the
master and slave axes are consistent.
2. After confirming there are no errors with
the machine positions of the mater and
Synchronous slave axes, set the synchronous function
(M1088). -2147483647 to
613 calibration 0 P
3. HMI operation sequence: DGN > system +2147483647
value
monitoring > synchronous monitoring
4. When synchronous calibration is set as 1,
perform the operation for the
synchronous calibration value and then
wirte the result to Pr613 (Synchronous
calibration value).
Note: The Pr617 synchronous calibration
function must be enabled to have the
synchronous calibration field.
5. Cycle the power and execute homing to
perform the calibration.
12-32
Parameter Default
No. value
0: sets the current position as the origin
1: mode 1
12
When homing, once the motor reaches the
home sensor, it reverses and the system
regards the first Z pulse as the origin.
Start Speed 1
Finish Speed 2
Z Pulse
Home sensor
2: Mode 2
When homing, after the motor reaches the
home sensor, it carries on in the same
direction to leave the home sensor, and the
system regards the first Z pulse as the origin.
Speed 2
Speed 1
Start Finish
Z Pulse
Home sensor
3: Mode 3
The motor looks for the Z pulse at the 2nd
homing speed (Pr619) and the system
regards it as the home.
Start Speed 2
Home
Origin search
616 1 0 - 17 P
mode Z pulse
4: mode 4 (OT mode)

When homing, the system regards the
positive limit as the home sensor. When the
positive limit is triggered, the motor reverses
and the system regards the first Z pulse as
the home.
Start Speed 1
Finish Speed 2
Z Pulse
+ Limit sensor
5: Mode 5
Absolute motor.
6: Mode 6
Once the limit switch reaches the Home dog,
it moves away, reverses and decelerates to a
stop, and the stop point is regarded as the
origin.
Speed 1
Start Finish
Home sensor
12-33
Parameter Default
No. value
7: Mode 7 (the function is exclusive to
Renishaw’s Biss C type single-coil absolute
12
motors)
After the servo performs homing for the
absolute motor, if the system triggers the
special M relays for homing (M1236 - M1241),
the system will complete the return home
action immediately and will not clear the
machine
coordinates.
8: Mode 8
There are two possible conditions when
homing. One is that the motor first reaches
the home sensor and the other is that the
motor first reaches the limit sensor.
Condition 1: the motor first reaches the home
sensor and reverses to find the Z pulse.
1 0 - 17 P
Start Speed 1
Finish Speed 2
Z Pulse
Home sensor
Condition 2: the motor first reaches the limit

Origin search sensor and reverses to find the home sensor,
616
mode and then carries on in the same direction to
find the Z pulse.
Start Speed 1
Finish Speed 2 Speed 1
Z Pulse
Home sensor
Limit sensor
24: Mode 24
When the mechanism is equipped with
home sensor and uses absolute motor, the
use of this mode is recommended.
First, use the return home action of Mode 4
to search for home, and then use the
absolute reset function on the DGN page.
After absolute reset, cycle power to the
system. The homing mode is automatically 1 0 - 17 P
switched to mode 5 after power cycling.
Start Speed 1
Finish Speed 2
Z Pulse
Home sensor
12-34
Parameter Default
No. value
Function Range
12
Homing search direction
0: Reverse
0-1
1: positive
Search the blocks when

homing
0:Off 0-1
1: on
Homing mode of rotation axis
0: single-turn
After the system
calculates the parity
angle, it will only move the
remaining angle distance.
1: absolute 0-1
The system will fully
return to home according
to the distance before
returning home.
And will not perform parity
angle processing.
Return mode after reaching
home sensor
0: return to the machine
Origin search origin
617 1 0 - 31 P
setting After finding the Z pulse,
the axis offsets by the
value set in Pr606. Then,
the system regards the
current position as the 0-1
machine origin,
completing the homing
procedure.
1: return to the Z pulse
After finding the Z pulse,
the servo no longer
moves, completing the
homing procedure.
Homing option for sync.
motion:
0: when the synchronous
control function is
enabled, the slave axes
and the master axis return
to the origin
synchronously.
0-1
1: When the synchronous
control function is
enabled, each axis can
return to the origin
individually with the
synchronous protection
function (Pr642) remains
enabled.
12-35
Parameter Default
No. value
Ignore Z-phase distance
0:Off
12
After leaving the block stop,
the first Z-phase found will be
used as the reference
Z-phase for homing.
1: on 0-1
After leaving the block stop
and went over it by a fixed
distance, the first Z-phase
found will be used as the
reference Z-phase for
homing; the fixed distance is
set through parameter Pr645.
Synchronous calibration
function
0:Off
1: on
The execution of return home
is based on parameter setting
and fine-tuning the slave axis
position, and the Pr613
synchronous calibration
value must be referred to.
The calibration function for
the slave axis must be
enabled in this parameter.
After confirming there are no
errors with the machine 0-1
position of the master and
slave axes, enable and
calculate the difference
(Pr613 synchronous
calibration value) between
the Z-phase of the master
and slave axes from the
synchronous related page on
HMI, so that when homing is
executed the next time, the
slave axis can correct its
position according to the
current difference in Z-phase
between the master and
slave axes, as well as Pr613.
1st homing Sets the speed for searching home sensor.
618 2000 0 - 10000 R
speed Unit: mm/min
2nd homing Sets the speed for searching the Z pulse.
619 200 0 - 2000 R
speed Unit: mm/min
Sets the speed for the first homing after
Speed for booting with Pr618 and Pr619. After the
620 moving to system completes homing, the speed value 10 0 - 20000 R
reference point of Pr620 will be used for future homing.
Unit: mm/min
Sets the allowable distance that the motor
moves away from the Home block when
Homing origin
searching for the home block. If the moving
624 protection 20 1 - 2000 R
distance exceeds the setting, an alarm
distance
occurs.
Unit: mm
12-36
Parameter Description Default

Item Setting range Note
No. value
Linear axis: when the motor leaves the
protector, it looks for the next Z phase by
12
going for the distance over pitch x PR645
(%). If the next Z phase is within the distance
(pitch x Pr645(%)), the motor skips this Z
phase and then goes further to look for the
Ignore Z-phase next one.
645 100 0% - 100% R
distance Rotation axis: when the motor leaves the
protector, it looks for the next Z phase by
going for the distance over Pr645% x 360
degrees. If the nearest Z phase is within the
distance of Pr645% x 360 degrees, it skips
this Z phase and then goes further to look for
the next one.
12-37
12.7 Ethernet setting (ETH.)

You can use Ethernet to connect the system to the PC to enable remote communication. Using
12
the CNCNetwork software and the network setting of NC series controller can manage the online
files of multiple NC controllers with one PC, enabling data sharing and file management with the
PC, and transmission-along-with-machining (DNC).
12.7.1 Ethernet parameter descriptions

No. value range
10030 Host name System’s host name. CNC000 1-8 R
10031 IP address Sets the system IP address. 0.0.0.0 0 - 255 P
10032 Subnet mask Sets the subnet mask of the system. 0.0.0.0 0 - 255 P
10033 Default gateway Sets the system default gateway. 0.0.0.0 0 - 255 P
Sets the network function of the system.
Function Range
Enable remote network
functions
0-1
0: off
1: on
Remote PC IP restriction
10034 Network function 0: Specify 0 0-1 P
When set to 0, it will check
whether the remote PC IP
really exists in Pr10036 -
0-1
Pr10040.
1: Domain
When set to 1, PC equipment in
the same CNC domain can
connect to CNC directly.
Enable the DHCP function.
10035 DHCP switch 0: off 0 0-1 P
1: on
Remote PC IP
10036 IP address 1 0 255 P
address 1
Remote PC IP
10037 IP address 2 0 255 P
address 2
Remote PC IP
10038 IP address 3 0 255 P
address 3
Remote PC IP
10039 IP address 4 0 255 P
address 4
Remote PC IP
10040 IP address 5 0 255 P
address 5
The PC IP address specified in Program >
Shared remote NETWORK in EDIT
10041 0 0-5 P
directory IP address mode.
0: do not specify an IP address.
Function Range
FTP function switch 0-1
10055 FTP setting FTP anonymous login 0-1 0 0 - 11 P

Switch to main file after file
0-1
upload
0: off; 1: on
12-38

No. value range
10058 FTP password Sets the password with 1 - 6 characters. 123456 - P
10078 FTP username Sets the username with 1 - 6 characters. 123456 P
12
-
12-39
12.8 Compensation parameter (COMP)

During the operation of machine tool, differences of mechanism may lead to motion error, and
12
thus cause minor error in the machining results. Set the relevant compensation parameters to
have the controller compute the appropriate compensation amount according to the machine
characteristics. The operation steps are as follows.
(1) Press PAR to enter the PAR screen.
(3) Press COMP to enter the compensation parameter setting screen.
(4) Press and to move the cursor to the specified field, and enter a value within the
range specified
in the lower right corner of the screen. As shown in Figure 12.8.1.
(5) Press ENTER to complete the setting.
(6) The data field to enter the length compensation can be entered using the um function key,
which is an absolute value input of um. Or enter use the um+ function key, which is an
incremental input of um.
(7) Use the CNCSoft to convert the compensation data measured by the calibration equipment
into compensation parameter files. Then, press IMPORT on the function bar in the next
page to import the data in absolute format. You can also press IMPORT+ to import the data
and add the data to the existing values.
(8) Press OK to confirm the update.
Figure 12.8.1
12-40
12.8.1 Compensation parameter descriptions

No. value range
There is backlash in the lead pitch for most of
the mechanical systems. Set this parameter
with a positive value to compensate for
backlash in positive direction, and vice versa.
Set this parameter to 0 to disable the backlash
12
compensation function. Unit: mm, inch
Backlash
1000 compensation 0 -2 to +2 R
amount
(1) Backlash in Y axis

Sets the time constant of backlash
Backlash compensation. When the backlash
1001 compensation compensation time is 0, the backlash 0 0 - 10000 R
time compensation function is disabled.
Unit: 0.1 msec
Backlash Sets the delay time for enabling the backlash
1002 compensation compensation function. 0 0 - 10000 R
delay time Unit: 0.1 msec
Sets the friction compensation amount.
Unit: mm
Friction
1003 compensation 0 0-1 R
amount
(Pr1006 [Bit 4] = 0) (Pr1006 [Bit 4] = 1)

Sets the friction compensation time.
Unit: 0.1 msec
Friction
1004 compensation 0 0 - 10000 R
time
(Pr1006 [Bit 4] = 0) (Pr1006 [Bit 4] = 1)
12-41

No. value range
Sets the friction compensation delay time. Unit:
0.1 msec
12 1005
Friction
compensation
delay time
0 0 - 10000 R
(Pr1006 [Bit 4] = 0) (Pr1006 [Bit 4] = 1)

Function Range
Absolute or incremental input.
0: absolute input (actual value of the
measuring point)
0-1
1: incremental input (the difference
of the current and previous
measuring points)
Friction compensation in positive
direction.
Timing: compensates when the
machine moves in positive direction 0-1
0:Off
1: on
Friction compensation in negative
direction.
Timing: compensates when the
machine moves in reverse direction 0-1
0:Off
1: on
Friction compensation mode
0: pulse width type
Thread pitch
0-
1006 compensation 0 R
0xFFFF
setting
0-1
1: exponential type
Measuring direction (of the start

point)
0: positive direction from machine
0-1
coordinates
1: negative direction from machine
coordinates
Bi-directional thread pitch

compensation
0-1
0:Off
1: on
12-42

No. value range
Sets the number of the measuring points for
Measuring point the lead screw pitch compensation with the
12
1007 0 0 - 128 R
number maximum as 128. Set this parameter to 0 to
disable the compensation function.
Sets the interval between each measuring
Measuring
1008 point on the lead screw. 0 0 - 300 R
interval
Unit: mm
Sets the offset between the measuring point
and machine origin. For example, when you set
this parameter to 0, there will be no offset from
home; when you set this parameter to 10mm, -1000 to
1009 Measuring offset there will be an offset of 10 mm from home. 0 R
+1000
Note: The direction of the offset should be
identical to the direction specified in Pr1006 [Bit
15].
Sets the lead screw pitch compensation for the
Data 1 - Data 1st to 128th points. The 1st point and the origin
1010 - 1137 0 -20 to +20 R
128 should be the same point.
Unit: mm (linear axes), deg (rotation axes)
Sets the lead screw pitch compensation in
negative direction for the 1st to 128th points.
Reverse data 1 -
Enable Pr1006 Bi-directional thread pitch
1138 - 1265 Reverse data 0 -20 to +20 R
compensation to have this parameter group take
128
effect.
Unit: mm (linear axes), deg (rotation axes)
12-43
12.9 System parameter (SYSTEM)

In the system parameter setting screen, you can change the settings of the system’s working
12
environment, Items include the system date, system time,
background color, function bar text color, and label text color. You can set each of these items
individually as required.
12.9.1 System parameter descriptions
Parameter Setting
Item Description Default value Note
No. range
10000 System date Sets the system date (format: yyyy/mm/dd). - - -
10001 System time Sets the system time (format: hh:mm:ss). - - -
Screen
10003 Sets the screen brightness. 50 1 - 99 -
brightness
Set this parameter to change the language of
the software screens. The setting range
User-defined varies according to the number of languages
10004 set by the user. 0 0-1 -
language
Note: The B series systems must use this
parameter to change the language.
Function Range
Mouse sensitivity 0 - 100
HID mouse format
0: off 0-1
1: on
Automatically enable keyboard
NumLock
0-1
0: off
1: on
Cursor display time (second) 1 - 15
Enable touch IO
0: off
External device 1: on 256 -
10005 256 R
setting Note: When the screen component 36708
0-1
is triggered, M1153 will remain
ON for a short period of time.
This function is usually used
to trigger the buzzer when the
screen is touched.
Keyboard pop-up mode
0: double-click 0-1
1: single click
Enable USB panel B
0: off
1: on 0-1
Note: This function requires a
dedicated external USB
adapter.
Execute the macro program specified by this

parameter before pressing CYCLE START.
Initial macro
10007 Note: This program has to be stored in the 0 0 - 9999 P
program
O_Macro folder and the naming method is
O+Pr10007.
Sets the unit system for length display on the
System length NC system.
10008 0 0-1 P
unit 0: metric
1: imperial
12-44
Parameter Setting
No. range
Sets the display of the synchronous
coordinates.
12
Function Range
Sync coordinate display
Sync coordinate 0-
10009 0:off 0-1 0 -
setting 65535
1: on
Sync workpiece coordinate display
0: off 0-1
1: on
Enable the screensaver.
10010 Screensaver 0: off 0 0-1 -
1: on
Screensaver
10011 Sets the first wait time for the screensaver. 10 1 - 60 -
time 1
Screen Sets the first level of brightness for the
10012 30 0 - 99 -
brightness 1 screensaver.
Screensaver
10013 Sets the second wait time for the screensaver. 30 1 - 60 -
time 2
Screen Sets the second level of brightness for the
10014 10 0 - 99 -
brightness 2 screensaver.
Function Range
Account permission activation
method
0: enabled by system
0-1
1: enabled by external I/O
M2934 = 1 (lock)
M2934 = 0 (unlock)
Automatically opens the last file:
After enabling this function, when you
insert the USB drive or CF card to the
controller, the system automatically 0-1
opens the last executed file.
0: off
1: on
Open auxiliary input window:
this function should be used with the
mouse. With the mouse connected
to the system, when you click the
upper right corner, a list appears; 0-1
when you click the input window, a 0-
10015 Account setting keyboard appears. 0 P
65535
0: off
1: on
Machining count display format
0: W; Word 0-1
1: DW; Double Word
Prohibit the showing of pop-up
windows
0-1
0: display pop-up windows
1: hide pop-up windows
Disables the function of
automatically diving values with no
decimal points by a thousand
0: divide by a thousand. The number
entered on the OFS screen will
0-1
be automatically divided by 1000
1: do not divide by a thousand. The
number entered on the OFS
screen will not be divided by 1000
automatically
12-45
Parameter Setting
No. range
Function Range
12
Reset system after EMG
release (Reset): sets whether
to automatically generate a
Reset signal after the 0-1
emergency stop is released.
0: off
1: on
[SOFT] display after bootup:
Sets whether to display the
SOFT screen as the default
screen after system bootup. 0-1
0: off
1: switch to SOFT screen after
bootup
Display alarm screen when
alarm occurs
0: do not show pop-up alarm
0-1
screen
1: show pop-up alarm screen
when alarms occur
Enable automatic backup of
system parameters:
When this function is enabled,
the system automatically
makes a backup of the
parameter data and stores it to
the CF card. Once any of the 0-1
parameters is modified, the
backup data in the CF card is 0-
10016 System setting 4 P
updated as well. 65535
0: disable
1: on
Hidden axis coordinates
setting: If you disable one axis
in the CONFIG screen, set this
parameter to display or hide
the corresponding axis
coordinate. 0-1
0: display; display the hidden
axis coordinates
1: Hide; hide the hidden axis
coordinates
O macro file protection:
Once this function is enabled,
you can only copy the O macro
files to the internal memory
rather than copy the files from 0-1
the internal memory to external
devices.
0: disable file protection
1: enable file protection
Extension variable display
0: 450 0-1
1: 1000
Writing of parameters is
prohibited
0-1
0: allow writing
1: prohibit writing
12-46
Parameter Setting
No. range
[POS] group screen display
0: enable
12
1: disable 0-1
Note: this parameter is only
applicable to the A series models.
[PRG] group screen display
0: enable
1: disable 0-1
applicable to the A series models
[OFS] group screen display
0: enable
1: disable 0-1
[DGN] group screen display
0: enable 0-1
1: disable
[ALM] group screen display
0: enable
1: disable 0-1
[GRA] group screen display
0: enable
1: disable 0-1
[PAR] group screen display
0: Enable
1: Disable 0-1
[SOFT] group screen display
0: Enable
1: Disable 0-1
Function Range
G code editing: sets whether
to allow G code editing.
0-1
0: off
1: on
Macro call file source
0: CF card 0-1
1: internal memory
G-code edit SF speed setting: Sets 0-
10017 1 -
setting whether you can use the SF 65535
SET function to set the cutting
feed rate. 0-1
0: off
1: on
Program resets automatically
after editing:
Sets whether the cursor will 0-1
automatically return to the
starting line position of the
12-47
Parameter Setting
No. range
program when switched from
EDIT mode to any other
12
operation modes.
0: off
1: on
Subprogram call file source
0: program 0-1
1: USB
Subroutine file name display:
After this parameter is
enabled, when run to this
subroutine, it sets whether the
G code main file name will be 0-1
displayed.
0: enable
1: disable
.txt file support
0: off 0-1
1: on
Friction compensation
measurement program path:
After the friction compensation
function generates processes,
the location where the 0-1
process files are saved.
0: CF
1: O_MACRO
System macro command
functions
0-1
0: off
1: on
Background 0-
10018 Sets the background color. LIGHTGRAY -
color 65535
Title bar text 0-
10019 Sets the text color for the title bar. BLACK -
color 65535
Mode bar text 0-
10020 Sets the text color for the mode bar. DARKBLUE -
color 65535
Function bar text 0-
10021 Sets the text color for the function bar. BLACK -
color 65535
0-
10022 Label text color Sets the text color for the labels. BLACK -
65535
Numeric value 0-
10023 Sets the text color for numeric values. BLUE -
color 65535
Table gridline 0-
10024 Sets the color of table gridline. BLACK -
color 65535
System cursor 0-
10025 Sets the color of the cursor. COLOR_S07 -
color 65535
System text 0-
10026 Sets the text highlight color. WHITE -
highlight color 65535
Software panel 0-
10027 Sets the cursor color in the software panel. YELLOW -
cursor color 65535
System alarm 0-
10028 Sets the color of system alarms. RED -
color 65535
User-defined 0-
10029 Sets the color of user-defined alarms. BLUE -
alarm color 65535
12-48
Parameter Setting
No. range
Software panel
Sets the text highlight color in the software 0-
10042 text highlight COLOR_S07 -
12
panel. 65535
color
Function Range
[OPERATE] display
0: on; 1: off
0-1
[MAGA] display
0: on; 1: off
0-1
[SPINDLE] display
0: on; 1: off
0-1
[MACHINE] display
0: on; 1: off
0-1
[HOME] display
0: on; 1: off
0-1
[COMP] display
0: on; 1: off
0-1
[PAR] group item Note: this parameter is only 0-
10043 applicable to the A series models. 0 P
display 65535
[SYSTEM] display
0: on; 1: off
0-1
[MLC] display
0: on; 1: off
0-1
[GRAPHIC] display
0: on; 1: off
0-1
[SERVO] display
0: on; 1: off
0-1
[CONFIG] display
0: on; 1: off
0-1
[SET RIO] display
0: on; 1: off
0-1
12-49
Parameter Setting
No. range
Enable the Teach function for the
corresponding axis.
12
After this parameter is enabled, in JOG or
MPG mode, set this parameter to enable the
Teach function of the PRG group.
Function Range
X axis teaching
0-1
0: off; 1: on
Y axis teaching
0-1
0: off; 1: on
Z axis teaching
0-1
0: off; 1: on
Channel 0 - A axis teaching 0-
10044 0-1 0 P
teach setting 0: off; 1: on 65535
B axis teaching
0-1
0: off; 1: on
C axis teaching
0-1
0: off; 1: on
U axis teaching
0-1
0: off; 1: on
V axis teaching
0-1
0: off; 1: on
W axis teaching
0-1
0: off; 1: on
Teaching G-code format
0-1
0: moving axes; 1: all axes
Function Range
[TUNING] display
0: on; 1: off
0-1
[TEXT WR] display
0: on; 1: off
0-1
[PRG]/[OFS]/
[DGN] group [LOGO WR] display 0-
10045 0: on; 1: off 0 P
closed 0-1 65535
Display Note: this parameter is only
[MACRO] display
0: on; 1: off
0-1
[FILE QUEUE] display
0: Display; 1: disable 0-1
Function Range
Barcode file reading
0-2
0: off; 1: file scan; 2: element
Trigger special M relay after

0 - 1023
Barcode reading reading barcode
10053 0 0 - 8190 P
Related settings Barcode reading file source
0: CF card 0-1
1: internal memory
Barcode input mode
0: element; 1: system 0-1
12-50
Parameter Setting
No. range
Sets the auto logout duration.

10054 Auto logout time 0 0 - 1440 -
12
Unit: min
0: Write the machine coordinates into the

coordinates system
10059 OFS input mode 1: Write the machine coordinates with 0 0-1 -
absolute coordinates as 0 into the
coordinates system
Set maximum reading length (0: maximum).
This parameter is applied to the file scan
10061 Barcode setting function under AUTO mode; it allows users to 0 0 - 63 P
decide whether the read the barcode
character length.
Sets specific NC process main files that the
system always reads upon bootup.
System fixed
10063 0 0-1 P
main file settings 0: off; 1: on
Note: This parameter is for use with special
CAD/CAM machines only.
Function Range
[Advanced mode] - Enable file
queue function 0-1
0: off; 1: on
[Advanced mode] - Sort mode
0: disabled; 1: prefix; 0-4
2: suffix; 3: general;
4: numbering
[Advanced mode] - Delete
File queue completed files automatically 0-1
10076 0: off; 1: on 0 0 - 537 P
settings
[Standard mode] - Queue saving
mode
0: Save; retain queue contents
after power cycling.
1: Load automatically; retain 0-2
queue contents after power
cycling and load the program
automatically.
2: Do not save; the queue is
cleared after power interruption.
12-51
12.10 MLC setting (MLC)

You can set parameters related to the MLC ladder, such as the displayed device and ladder color,
12
in the MLC setting screen.
12.10.1 MLC parameter descriptions
Parameter Setting
No. range
After you set this parameter and enable the
control flag (Pr2001), the system scans the
MLC scanning 2-
2000 MLC ladders with the set intervals (ms). The 2 P
time 1000
greater the value, the more delay in the
update of the MLC device.
MLC fixed scanning time
0: disable
2001 Control flag 0 0-1 P
1: enable (once enabled, there will be more
process resource for the HMI)
Local I/O Sets the filter time for local I/O.
2003 0 0 - 20 P
Filter time Unit: msec
12000 Program title Sets the program title. -
12001 Company name Enter the company name. 0 -
12002 Designer name Enter the designer name. 0 -
Sets whether to show the comments.
12003 Show comment 0: off 0 0-1 -
1: on
Sets whether to show the symbols.
12004 Show symbol 0: off 0 0-1 -
1: on
0-
12005 Ladder color Sets the ladder color. BLACK -
65535
0-
12006 Ladder text color. Sets the text color for the ladder. BLACK -
65535
Ladder symbol 0-
12007 Sets the symbol color for the ladder. BLACK -
color 65535
Ladder cursor 0-
12008 Sets the cursor color for the ladder. LIGHT BLUE -
color 65535
Ladder
Sets the monitoring status display color for LIGHT 0-
12009 monitoring status -
the ladder. GREEN 65535
display color
Ladder device Sets the comment color of the device for the 0-
12010 BROWN -
comment color ladder. 65535
Ladder segment Sets the comment color of the section for the 0-
12011 BROWN -
comment color ladder. 65535
Ladder row 0-
12012 Sets the comment color of the ladder row. BROWN -
comment color 65535
Ladder
Sets the color of the monitoring values for 0-
12013 monitoring value LIGHTRED -
the ladder. 65535
color
NC special 0-
12014 Sets the color of NC special devices. COLOR_S2B -
device color 65535
MLC special 0-
12015 Sets the color of MLC special devices. MAGENTA -
device color 65535
12-52
Parameter Setting
No. range
Function Range
MLC edit protection:
12
when this function is enabled, you
can only edit the MLC programs
in EDIT mode. 0-1
0: off
1: on
MLC display
0: on 0-1
1: off
MLC auto backup:
when this function is enabled, the
system automatically makes a
backup of the MLC data to the CF 0-1
card.
0: off 0-
12016 MLC protection 1: on 1 P
65535
EMG protection for MLC file
saving:
after this parameter is enabled,
you need to press the emergency
stop button if you need save the 0-1
modifications on the MLC.
0: on
1: off
MLC file-saving reminder for
group switch: When this
parameter is enabled, if in MLC
EDIT mode but the group screen
is pressed, a file-saving reminder 0-1
will pop-up.
0: off
1: on
Function Range
Immediate take effect after MLC
file load:
when this function is enabled,
MLC files take effect right after
being loaded without restarting 0-1
the system.
0: off
1: on
Record system data in special
registers
0: off
1: on
D1102: write main file name
(O0000 - O9999)
D1103, D1104: total machining 0-
12017 MLC setting time (sec.) 0 P
65535
D1105, D1106: single machining
time (sec.)
D1107: year, month
D1108: day, hour 0-1
D1109: minute, second
Note: Set hexadecimal format to
access D registers and
then convert the data into
decimal format for use.
For example: 2020 February 28
PM06:45:59
D1107 = 14 02
14(HEX) = 20(DEC)
2000+20
02(HEX) = 02(DEC)
12-53
Parameter Setting
No. range
D1108 = 1C 12
1C (HEX) = 28 (DEC)
12
12 (HEX) = 18 (DEC)
D1109 = 2D 3B
2D (HEX) = 45 (DEC)
3B (HEX) = 59 (DEC)
Shortcuts for triggering M device
0: off 0-1
1: on
MLC user-defined keypad
0: off 0-1
1: on
MLC user-defined keypad function
mode
0-1
0: Single point
1: Multi-point
[SPACE]+[POS]
hot key for 0: function disabled 0-
12019 0 -
triggering M 1 - 3071: set devices M1 - M3071 3071
device
[SPACE]+[PRG]
hot key 0: function disabled 0-
12020 0 -
for triggering M 1 - 3071: set devices M1 - M3071 3071
device
[SPACE]+[OFS]
12021 0 -
device
[SPACE]+[DGN]
12022 0 -
device
[SPACE]+[ALM]
12023 0 -
device
[SPACE]+
[GRA] hot key 0: function disabled 0-
12024 0 -
device
[SPACE]+[PAR]
12025 0 -
device
[SPACE]+[SOFT]
12026 0 -
device
Function Range
Enable A0 - A15 alarms 0-1
Enable user Enable A32 - A47 alarms 0-1 0-

12027 0 P
alarm 0 Enable A48 - A63 alarms 0-1 65535
12-54
Parameter Setting
No. range
12
Function Range

Enable user 0-
12028 0 P
alarm trigger 1 Enable A368 - A383 alarms 0-1 65535
1. If the status of this M device is On, the

preset key combination function
System/ operations is disabled.
user-defined 2. If the status is Off, the preset key
0-
12029 keyboard for combination operations are allowed. This 0 -
3071
switching M function is only effective when Pr12017
device [MLC user-defined keyboard function] is
1.
Note: this function is only available for OPENCNC.
1. Writes the keyboard value received by
the keyboard into the corresponding D
register.
Corresponding D 2. After pressing the keyboard, the value is
device numbers written to the D register; when the key is
0-
12030 for user-defined released, the value in the D register is 0 -
1531
keyboard button cleared to 0.
values Note:
1. This function is only effective when Pr12017
[MLC user-defined keyboard keypad] is 1.
2. This function is only available for OPENCNC.
12-55
12.11 Graph parameter (GRAPHIC)

You can set the graphic display of the motion trajectory in the GRA group with graph parameters.
12 12.11.1 Graph parameter descriptions
Parameter
Item Description
Default Setting
Note
No. value range
14000 Line color Sets the line color. BLACK 0 - 65535 -
14001 Background color Sets the background color. SEA 0 - 65535 -
Sets the graphic display.
Graphic display Function Range
14002 1 0 - 65535 -
setting Line width 0-4
Enable auxiliary line display 0-1
Function Range
Graphic default screen 0-1
X-Y plane display direction
0-3
Y-Z plane display direction

14003 Graphic setting 0 0 - 65535 P
0-3
X-Z plane display direction
0-3
X-Y plane graphic Sets the graphic dimension of the X-Y plane.
14004 200 5 - 100000 -
dimension Unit: mm
Y-Z plane graphic Sets the graphic dimension of the Y-Z plane.
14005 200 5 - 100000 -
dimension Unit: mm
X-Z plane graphic Sets the graphic dimension of the X-Z plane.
14006 200 5 - 100000 -
dimension Unit: mm
X-Y-Z plane Sets the graphic dimension of the X-Y-Z plane.
14007 200 5 - 100000 -
graphic dimension Unit: mm
Function Range
Auto preview: When this function
is enabled, when AUTO mode is
pressed, CNC will quickly scan
the NC content once, and
calculate an appropriate GRA 0-1
drawing range on the screen.
14008 Graphic setting 0: Do not run 0 0 - 65535 P
1: Run
Run M30 and reserve graphics:
When this function is enabled, the
graphics are automatically
reserved after M30 is executed. 0-1
0: off
1: on
14010 Grid color Sets the grid color. 1 0 - 65535 -
14011 Subgrid color Sets the subgrid color. 1 0 - 65535 -
12-56

No. value range
Coordinate axis
14012 Sets the color of the coordinate axis. 1 0 - 65535 -
color
12
14013 Auxiliary line color Sets the color of the auxiliary lines. 1 0 - 65535 -
12-57
12.12 Servo parameter (SERVO)

You can set the parameters for the servo drive in the servo parameter setting screen.
12 12.12.1 Servo parameter descriptions
Group No. Function Description

Default Setting
Note
value range
Displays the firmware version of the
P0 0 Firmware version - 0 -
servo.
Sets the control mode. 0x00 -
Input for control mode
P1 1 Function Range 0 0x110F -
and control command
Torque output direction 0-1 (HEX)
The low-pass filter for position command

Applic-
Position command is usually used for eliminating undesired
P1 8 0 0 able to
smoothing constant high-frequency response or noise and
CNC
smoothing and commands. Unit: 10 msec
Motor stop mode
P1 32 Motor stop mode function. 0 0 - 20 -
function
The low-pass filter for S-curve is usually
Applic-
S-curve ACC/DEC used for eliminating undesired
P1 36 0 0 able to
constant high-frequency response or noise and
CNC
smoothing and commands. Unit: msec
Load inertia ratio of servo motor.
P1 37 Load inertia ratio 10 0 - 2000 -
Unit: 0.1 times
E-gear ratio numerator Multi-stage E-gear ratio numerator Read
P1 44 1 1 - (229-1)
(N1) setting. Unit: pulse only
E-gear ratio Read
P1 45 E-gear ratio denominator (M). Unit: pulse 1 1 - (231-1)
denominator (M1) only
Regeneration With With
P1 52 Regeneration resistance value. Unit: ohm -
resistance value models models
With With
P1 53 Regenerative capacity Resistance capacity. Unit: Watt -
models models
Sets the maximum speed of the servo
P1 55 Maximum speed limit motor. The default is the rated speed. 0 0 - 65535 -
Unit: rpm
Percentage of friction Sets the level of friction compensation.
P1 62 0 0 - 100 -
compensation Unit: %
Applic-
Constant of friction Sets the smoothing constant of friction
P1 63 4 4 able to
compensation (ms) compensation. Unit: ms
CNC
The moving filter smooths the beginning
Position command
P1 68 and end of the step command, but it also 4 0 - 100 -
Moving Filter
delays the command. Unit: ms
Increasing the position control gain can
enhance the position response and
reduce the deviation in position control. If
P2 0 Position control gain 35 0 - 2047 -
you set the value too high, it may cause
vibration and noise.
Unit: rad/s
Adjusts the rate of change for the position
control gain according to the gain
Position control gain switching condition. This parameter is
P2 1 100 10 - 500 -
rate of change usually used for adjusting the gain of the
feeding axis for it to be in accordance with
that of the spindle when tapping. Unit: %
12-58
Default Setting
Group No. Function Description Note
value range
If the position control command changes
position smoothly, increasing the gain
12
value can reduce the position following
Position feed forward
P2 2 errors. If it does not change smoothly, 50 0 - 100 -
gain
decreasing the gain value can reduce the
mechanical vibration during operation.
Unit: %
If the position control command changes
position smoothly, decreasing the
smoothing constant value can reduce the
Position feed forward
position following errors. If it does not
P2 3 gain smoothing 5 2 - 100 -
change smoothly, increasing the
constant
smoothing constant value can reduce the
mechanical vibration during operation.
Unit: msec
Increasing the speed control gain can
enhance the speed response. If you set
P2 4 Speed control gain 500 0 - 8191 -
the value too high, it may cause vibration
and noise. Unit: rad/s
Adjust the rate of change for the speed
Speed control gain
P2 5 control gain according to the gain 100 10 - 500 -
rate of change
switching condition. Unit: %
Increasing the value of the integral speed
control can enhance the speed response
Speed integral
P2 6 and reduce the deviation in speed control. 100 0 - 1023 -
compensation
If you set the value too high, it may cause
vibration and noise. Unit: rad/s
If the speed control command changes
speed smoothly, increasing the gain value
Speed feed forward can reduce the speed following errors. If it
P2 7 0 0 - 100 -
gain does not change smoothly, decreasing
the gain value can reduce the mechanical
vibration during operation. Unit: %
Digital input response filter time. Unit: 2
P2 9 DI response filter time 2 0 - 20 -
msec
Digital input pin DI1
P2 10 Digital input pin DI1 - - -
Function planning
Function planning
Function planning
Function planning
Function planning
Function planning
Function planning
Function planning
The first setting for mechanical resonance
Notch filter frequency
P2 23 frequency. 1000 50 - 1000 -
(1)
Unit: Hz
The first set of resonance suppression
Notch filter attenuation notch filter attenuation level; the notch
P2 24 0 0 - 32 -
level (1) filter function is disabled if set to 0.
Unit: dB
12-59
Default Setting
Group No. Function Description Note
value range
Sets the time constant for the low-pass
Resonance filter for resonance suppression.
12
P2 25 suppression low-pass The low-pass filter is disabled if this 2 0 - 1000 -
filter parameter is set to 0.
Unit: 0.1 msec
Increasing this parameter can increase
the damping of the speed loop. Setting
Applic-
the value of P2-26 to equal P2-06 is
P2 26 Anti-interference gain 0 0-0 able to
recommended. In Position mode,
CNC
decrease the value of this parameter to
reduce position overshoot. Unit: 0.001
Gain switching When the signal of gain switching is on,
0-4
P2 27 condition and method the rate of change for the speed control 0 -
(HEX)
selection gain is changed to the setting of P2-05.
Gain switching time Gain switching time constant. Unit: 10
P2 28 10 0 - 1000 -
constant msec
The second setting for mechanical
P2 43 resonance frequency. 1000 50 - 2000 -
(2)
Unit: Hz
The second set of resonance suppression
P2 44 0 0 - 32 -
Unit: dB
The third setting for mechanical
P2 45 resonance frequency. 1000 50 - 2000 -
(3)
Unit: Hz
The third set of resonance suppression
P2 46 0 0 - 32 -
Unit: dB
0: fixed
Auto resonance
P2 47 1: auto 1 0-2 -
suppression mode
2: continuous
Speed detection filter Sets the filter for speed estimation. Unit:
P2 49 0 0 - 1F -
and jitter suppression sec
Total stroke for Sets the total number of pulses required
P2 52 -
indexing for one revolution of the rotation axis.
When the position control integral value is
Position integral
P2 53 increased, the position steady-state error 0 0 - 1023 -
compensation
reduces. Unit: rad/s
Sets the operation mode of the motor. Cycle
power
P2 69 Absolute encoder 0: Incremental type 0 0-1
to the
1: Absolute type servo
CANopen / DMCNET
P3 12 CANopen / DMCNET support setting. 0 0 - 111 -
support setting
Read
P4 0 Fault record (N) The last abnormal status record. 0 -
only
The second to last abnormal status Read
P4 1 Fault record (N-1) 0 -
record. only
Read
P4 2 Fault record (N-2) The third to last abnormal status record. 0 -
only
Read
P4 3 Fault record (N-3) The fourth to last abnormal status record. 0 -
only
Read
P4 4 Fault record (N-4) The fifth to last abnormal status record. 0 -
only
Displays the firmware subversion of the Read
P5 0 Firmware subversion 0 -
servo. only
12-60
12.13 Channel setting (CONFIG)

You can enable the axes and define their attributes with this function as shown in Figure 12.13.1.
12
This function is not available in AUTO and MDI modes.
Figure 12.13.1

(1) Press the PAR key. Enters the PAR screen.
(3) Press CONFIG to enter the channel setting screen.
(4) Press and to move the cursor to the Enable field of the axis to be enabled, press
ENTER to select the check box, which activates the setting of axial property. Set the axis as
either the NC axis or the MLC axis.
(5) Define the axis: Press , , , and to move the cursor to the specified field and
ENTER to select the check box.
(6) After defining the axis, press , , , and to move the cursor to the corresponding
Port field. Press ENTER and a dialog box for port number input appears. Use 1 - 9 to enter
a port number which is not the same as the set ones and then press ENTER to complete
setting the port number.
(7) After defining all the axes, press OK.
(8) Restart the NC system.
Note:
1. To enable an axis, firstly select the check box of the corresponding Enable field. Then, you can set the
axis as either an NC axis or MLC axis and set its port number which cannot be identical to other port
numbers.
2. To disable an axis, move the cursor to the corresponding Enable field and press ENTER to cancel the
selection. Then, the axis is disabled.
12-61
3. When you change the value of the parameter with a P marked in the Parameter Name field, you have to
restart the NC system to have the changed value take effect. When you change the value of the
parameter without a P marked in the Parameter Name field, it takes effect immediately without restarting
12 the NC system.
12.14 RIO setting

The NC system can add the control switches for external devices with the I/O extension modules.
You can enable the I/O module in the RIO Setting screen As shown in Figure 12.14.1.
Figure 12.14.1

(3) Press SET RIO to enter the RIO Setting page.
(4) Press and to move the cursor to the corresponding Enable field of the specified RIO
port, and press ENTER to select the check box and enable its corresponding settings.
(5) Press and to move the cursor to the Polarity setting field, press ENTER , and an
input window appears. After entering the value, press ENTER to complete the setting.
(6) Press and to move the cursor to the Disc. field, and press ENTER to select or
cancel the selection.
(7) After enabling and setting all the I/O modules, press OK to complete the setting.
12-62
12.14.1 Details of RIO setting
RIO: Press OK after completing the settings.
12
(1) (2) (3) (4)
(1) Displays the connection status according to the connected RIO station number, starting with
M2832 as Station 0.
(2) Select the check box of the corresponding Enable field and set the RIO type to 3 as DIO;
others include setting to 0 as AD/DA, 1 as DA, and 2 as AD.
(3) DI input of the RIO can be set as the positive limit, negative limit, and home sensor of each
axis, while only the DIs of Station 0 (the first RIO board) can be set. DIs on other RIO boards
cannot be set. You can set 32 points in total from DI0 to DI31.
(4) Select the Disc. Field to have the DO remain its status when it is disconnected from the
controller.
12-63
Home Limit: press OK after completing the setting.
12 (1)
(2)
(1) Axis selection: the positive limit, negative limit, and home DI of X - A axes are inputted from
axes port 1 - 4 of the controller. According to the selected axes, each axis takes three DI
points from X256, which are positive limit DI, negative limit DI, and home limit DI
respectively.
For example, if you select Y and Z axes, the positive limit, negative limit, and home limit for
each axis are as shown in the following table.
Axis
X axis Y axis Z axis
Signal
Positive limit AXIS_P1 X256 X259
Negative limit AXIS_P2 X257 X260
Home AXIS_P3 X258 X261
The special M relay code corresponding to the DI signal of each axis does not change
regardless of the signal source.
Axis
X axis Y axis Z axis
Signal
Positive limit M2144 M2148 M2152

Negative limit M2145 M2149 M2153
Home M2146 M2150 M2154
(2) Sets the filter level of the DI on the RIO board. The interval between each level is 40 ms
and there are 5 levels in total.
Level 0 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5
200 μs 200 μs 400 μs 600 μs 800 μs 1 ms
12-64
12.14.2 Setting DA module (NC-EIO-DAC04)
The following steps illustrate how to set the DA module.
12
(1) Enable Port 5 from the RIO setting page of the controller; only Ports 5 - 8 can be set for the
DAC module.
(2) Select 1 for the type, and D1464 - D1467 will correspond to the output points 0 - 3 of the
module card respectively.
(3) Rotate the station knob of the DAC module to 4.
(4) Connect the DAC module to the controller in the same way as connecting the RIO.
(5) After completing the three steps above, cycle power to the system. Then, set the value
1024 to D1464, and you can measure the voltage 1.25V at the output point 0 on the DA
card (-/+10V correspond to -8191 to +8192).
Refer to the following table for the special D of MLC and the corresponding port number in the
RIO Setting screen.
DAC / Port No. 5 6 7 8
Output point 0 D1464 D1472 D1480 D1488
12-65
12.15 Search (SEARCH)

The NC system includes many different types of parameters; therefore, users can use the search
12
function and enter the parameter number to search for specific parameter fields. This function
provides a quick and convenient way to display the parameter field screen for the specified
parameter. The operation steps are as follows.
(3) Enter the parameter number to be searched to the input field in the lower left corner of the
screen.
(4) Press SEARCH to search for specific parameters.
Note: in addition to using the Search function, you can also search for the parameter in the PARAM
GROUP screen by entering parameter numbers.
Searching method: enter “S” + “Parameter number”, and then press ENTER.
12.16 Parameter group (PARAM GRP)

Various types of parameters are available in the NC system. Equipment distributors can use the
parameter group function to provide users with the most appropriate combination of parameters
according to industrial requirements for machining, which simplifies the complicated parameter
adjustments, as shown in Figure 12.16.1.
Figure 12.16.1

(3) Press PAR GRP to enter the parameter group setting page.
12-66
(4) Enter the specified parameter number in the No. field and press ENTER to display the
corresponding parameter name.
(5) Press SRT PAR to sort the parameter numbers in ascending or descending order.
(6) Press and to move the cursor to the Group field, enter the value, and press
ENTER to complete setting the parameter group. You can also stop the cursor at the
Group field, press RED PAR, and a confirmation window appears. Enter “Y” and press
12
ENTER to read the current parameter values and write them to the corresponding fields.
(7) To delete spare groups, press and to move the cursor to the group field to be
deleted, press DEL GRP, and a confirmation window appears. Enter “Y” and press ENTER
to delete the group.
(8) After entering multiple parameter groups, press AVERAGE and a confirmation window
appears. Enter “Y” and press ENTER , and the system divides the setting range of the
parameter by the number of currently used groups, averagely distributing the values to
each group field.
(9) After completing the setting for the values of the parameter group, you can press SAVE to
save the setting screen and results. When the confirmation window appears, enter “Y” and
press ENTER to complete the saving step.
(10) After setting the groups, press and to move the cursor to the specified group field,
then press WRT PAR, and a confirmation window appears. Enter “Y” and press ENTER to
write the values to corresponding parameters.
Note:
1. The parameter write function overwrites the original values, so ensure the new values are correct
before using this function.
2. The parameter group function supports up to 20 parameters and 20 groups.
12-67
12.17 Other settings

12.17.1 Setting for absolute motor
12
Follow these steps to set the system when using the NC series controller with an absolute motor.
(1) In the homing parameter screen, set Pr616 home search mode to 5 (either an incremental or
absolute encoder can be used. When you use an absolute motor for the first time, cycle
power to the servo and controller after setting the parameter.) Refer to the following figure.
(2) After setting the parameter, to reset the absolute encoder, go to DGN > SYS MON > SRV
MON as shown in the following figure.
(3) Set the system to JOG or MPG mode to use the absolute reset function. In JOG or MPG
mode, move the axis to the position to be defined as the origin, enter “1” and press ENTER
to complete the setting. Meanwhile, the Home indicator is on, meaning that this axis has
completed homing.
Note:
1. When a servo alarm occurs, the special M relay for absolute reset (Abs Rst) becomes 0. The following are
the relevant alarms that will affect reset.
AL060: absolute position is lost. Perform absolute reset.
AL061: battery undervoltage. Replace the battery.
12-68
AL069: wrong encoder. Ensure an absolute encoder is connected.
2. In MPG mode, the absolute homing setting is only applicable to the currently selected axis. For
example, when you select X axis in MPG mode, enter “1” and press ENTER, and then only the X axis
completes the absolute homing procedure.

12
12-69
12.17.2 Setting synchronous motion control
Application description: the A axis (slave axis) is required to follow the Z axis (master axis) in the
12
same direction. Assume that M13 is to enable the synchronous function and M14 is to disable it,
the settings are as follows.
1. Set parameter Pr350 to 13.
3. Set parameter Pr364 (synchronous control A) to 3.
When M13 is executed, the MLC triggers M1088 (Trigger for synchronous control) and M1092 (A
slave axis follows the master axis) at the same time. When the system runs the movement
command for Z axis, the A axis moves synchronously. If there is a command to move A axis
when the synchronous function is enabled, an alarm occurs since the slave axis (A axis) cannot
receive a motion command from the system.
Execute M14 to turn off special M and stop the synchronization function. The synchronous
control function is effective in AUTO, MDI, JOG, MPG, and HOME modes.
Important:
(1) Once you set an axis as a master axis, you cannot set it as a slave axis.
(2) Once you set an axis as a slave axis, you cannot set it as a master axis.
(3) Multiple slave axes can follow the same master axis.
(4) If homing is executed during synchronous control, the system refers to the motion of the
master axis.
(5) Pressing RESET does not disable the synchronous control function.
Program:
G54X0Y0Z0A0
G90G54G0X10.Y10.Z10.
Z50.
A0
M13
Z0.
Z111.
G4X2.
Z150.
M14
A100.
A51.
M30
12-70
Relevant parameters:

No. value range
12
Halt M code 1 (0: no setting)
Halt M code 2
Halt M code 3
Halt M code 4
Halt M-code Halt M code 5
350 - 359 0 0 - 1000 P
Halt M code 7
Halt M code 8
Halt M code 9
Halt M code 10
Sets the synchronization direction.
Bit 0 - 8: synchronous control of X - W axes
0: same direction
Function Range
Synchronous direction for X axis 0-1
Synchronous direction for Y axis 0-1
Synchronization Synchronous direction for Z axis 0-1
360 0 0 - 0x3F P
direction control
Synchronous direction for A axis 0-1
Synchronous direction for B axis 0-1
Synchronous direction for C axis 0-1
Synchronous direction for U axis 0-1
Synchronous direction for V axis 0-1
Synchronous direction for W axis 0-1
Specifies the master axis when X axis is the
slave axis. For example, set this parameter to 2
Synchronous if desiring to set the Y axis as the master axis for
361 synchronous control. 0 0-9 P
control X
0: off
1 - 9: X - W
Specifies the master axis when Y axis is the

362 0 0-9 P
control Y 0: off
1 - 9: X - W
Specifies the master axis when Z axis is the

363 0 0-9 P
control Z 0: off
1 - 9: X - W
Specifies the master axis when A axis is the
364 0 0-9 P
control A 0: off
1 - 9: X - W
Specifies the master axis when B axis is the
365 0 0-9 P
control B 0: off
1 - 9: X - W
12-71

No. value range
Specifies the master axis when C axis is the
slave axis.
12
Synchronous
366 0 0-9 P
control C 0: off
1 - 9: X - W
Specifies the master axis when U axis is the
367 0 0-9 P
control U 0: off
1 - 9: X - W
Specifies the master axis when V axis is the
368 0 0-9 P
control V 0: off
1 - 9: X - W
Specifies the master axis when W axis is the
369 0 0-9 P
control W 0: off
1 - 9: X - W
Issue NC command from MLC:

Function description Special M code
Trigger for synchronous control M1088
X slave axis follows the master axis M1089
Y slave axis follows the master axis M1090
Z slave axis follows the master axis M1091
A slave axis follows the master axis M1092
B slave axis follows the master axis M1093
C slave axis follows the master axis M1094
U slave axis follows the master axis M1095
V slave axis follows the master axis M1096
W slave axis follows the master axis M1097
12-72
12.17.3 Command transfer
Application description: transfer the command for Z axis to A axis (transfer axis). Assume that
12
M20 is to enable transfer and M21 is to disable it, the settings are as follows.
3. Set Pr374 (Transfer control A) to 3.
After executing M20 to trigger M1098 (Transfer command control trigger) and M1102 (A axis
receives command from master axis), the system transfers the command originally for the Z axis
to the A axis (so, Z axis does not move). If you execute a command for the A axis, an alarm
occurs since the transfer axis (A axis) cannot receive any command.
To stop the command transfer function, execute M21 to turn off M1098 in MLC. You can only
enable (M20) and disable (M21) this function in AUTO and MDI modes. Please disable this
function (M21) when the program ends. The command transfer function is not available in JOG,
MPG, and HOME modes.
Important:
(1) Once you set an axis as a transfer axis, you cannot set it as a master axis.
(2) Once you set an axis as a master axis, you cannot set it as a transfer axis.
(3) Multiple transfer axes can refer to the same master axis.
(4) The transfer function is not available in HOME mode.
(5) Pressing RESET does not disable the command transfer function.
(6) When the command is transferred from Z axis to A axis, the tool length compensation
function is available.
(7) Transfering the cutting cycle command is applicable on Z axis.
Program:
G54X0Y0Z0A0
G90G54G0X10.Y10.Z10.
Z50.
A0
M20 (The controller pre-reads M20 and then enables command transfer control.)
Z0. (The movement command for the Z axis coordinate actually moves the A axis)
Z111.
G4X2.
Z150.
M21 (The controller pre-reads M21 and then disables command transfer control.)
A100.
A51.
M30
12-73
Relevant parameters:

No. value range
12 Halt M code 1 (0: no setting)

Halt M code 2
Halt M code 3
Halt M code 4
Halt M-code Halt M code 5
350 - 359 0 0 - 1000 P
Halt M code 7
Halt M code 8
Halt M code 9
Halt M code 10
Sets the transfer control direction.
Bit 0 - 8: synchronous control of X - W
0: same direction
Function Range
Transfer direction X 0-1
Transfer direction Y 0-1
Sets the transfer
370 Transfer direction Z 0-1 0 0 - 0x3F P
direction.
Transfer direction A 0-1
Transfer direction B 0-1
Transfer direction C 0-1
Transfer direction U 0-1
Transfer direction V 0-1
Transfer direction W 0-1
Specifies the X axis as the axis to receive the

transfer command. When transfer control
function is enabled, the command is
transferred to have the X axis move while the
originally commanded axis does not move.
371 Transfer control X For example, set this parameter to 2 if 0 0-9 P
desiring to transfer the control command
from the Y axis.
0: off
1 - 9: X - W
Specifies the Y axis as the axis to receive the
372 Transfer control Y transferred to have the Y axis move while the 0 0-9 P
0: off
1 - 9: X - W
Specifies the Z axis as the axis to receive the
373 Transfer control Z transferred to have the Z axis move while the 0 0-9 P
0: off
1 - 9: X - W
12-74

No. value range
Specifies the A axis as the axis to receive the
12
374 Transfer control A transferred to have the A axis move while the 0 0-9 P
0: off
1 - 9: X - W
Specifies B axis as the axis to receive the
375 Transfer control B transferred to have the B axis move while the 0 0-9 P
0: off
1 - 9: X - W
Specifies the C axis as the axis to receive
the transfer command. When transfer control
transferred to have the C axis move while
376 Transfer control C the originally commanded axis does not 0 0-9 P
move.
0: off
1 - 9: X - W
Specifies U axis as the axis to receive the
transferred to have the U axis move while
377 Transfer control U the originally commanded axis does not 0 0-9 P
move.
0: off
1 - 9: X - W
Specifies the V axis as the axis to receive the
378 Transfer control V transferred to have the V axis move while the 0 0-9 P
0: off
1 - 9: X - W
Specifies W axis as the axis to receive the
transferred to have the W axis move while
379 Transfer control W the originally commanded axis does not 0 0-9 P
move.
0: off
1 - 9: X - W
12-75
Issue NC command from MLC:

Trigger flag of transfer command controls M1098
12 X axis receives command from master axis
Y axis receives command from master axis
Z axis receives command from master axis

M1099
M1100
M1101
A axis receives command from master axis M1102
B axis receives command from master axis M1103
C axis receives command from master axis M1104
U axis receives command from master axis M1105
V axis receives command from master axis M1106
W axis receives command from master axis M1107
Special M for enabling transfer function:

Transfer function in execution M2228
12-76
Software (SOFT) Group
The SOFT group is for configuring user-defined screens with the CNCSoft software.
This chapter provides the example screens.
13.1 ScreenEditor software ····································································· 13-2
13-1
Software (SOFT) Group Milling Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual
With the SOFT group function, you can use ScreenEditor to configure the screens, which can
replace the function of the machine operation panel B or add customized extension functions.
13
13.1 ScreenEditor software

 ScreenEditor
You can edit the screens of the controller with ScreenEditor which you can enter from the
CNC portal on the main page of the Delta CNCSoft software,
as shown in Figure 13.1.1.
Figure 13.1.1
 After entering ScreenEditor, you can see the operation interface as shown in Figure 13.1.2.
Figure 13.1.2
13-2
Milling Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Software (SOFT) Group
 After compiling the screens and creating the screen data files, you can import the files to
the controller using the USB disk or the Internet, as shown in Figure 13.1.3.
13
Figure 13.1.3
13-3
Software (SOFT) Group Milling Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual
13
13-4
MLC Special M Relay and
Special D Register
This chapter provides detailed descriptions for the special controlling devices of the
NC system, through which you can quickly check the MLC status in the NC system.
For more advanced control functions, refer to NC Series MLC Application Manual.
Bas is
14.1 MLC special M and D definitions ····················································· 14-2
14.2 Special M summary table ······························································ 14-3
14.3 Special D summary table ·····························································14-27
14-1
MLC Special M Relay and Special D Register Milling Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual
14.1 MLC special M and D definitions

MLC (Motion Logic Control) and the NC system are two independent systems. You can use the
14
MLC to perform various logical controls for the knob button, mechanism actions or other motors.
The NC system, on the other hand, manages system and servo axis related functions. When
the two systems need to communicate with each other, the special M and special D of MLC
must be used as the input/output interface to process the data exchanging and messaging of
the two sides.
The signal sent by special M and special D of MLC to the NC system is called output; on the
other hand, the signal sent by the NC system to special M and special D of MLC is called input.
MLC codes begin with M and are in Bit form, its signal is 0 (OFF) or 1 (ON); codes that begin
with D are Word form, and represents a value, such as 1000. The special M and special D
codes of MLC all use the 4 numbers after M and D to indicate the number.
Data exchange is divided into the following four major groups:

1: MLC bit output from MLC to NC (special M device with Bit output)
2: MLC bit input from NC to MLC (special M device with Bit input)
3: MLC character output from MLC to NC (special D device with Word output)
4: MLC bit input from NC to MLC (special D device with Word input)
14-2
Milling Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual MLC Special M Relay and Special D Register
14.2 Special M summary table

The definitions and classifications of all special M and D of the NC system are as
14
follows.
Special Device
Function name Description
M type
HMI output point 1 M1024 Corresponds its status to the system variable, #1801. R/W
HMIe output point 24 M1047 Corresponds its status to the system variable, #1824. R/W
HMIe output point 25 M1048 Corresponds its status to the system variable, #1825. R/W
Users control the statuses of M1056 - M1059 to achieve

system mode switching.
System mode Binary
selections: System
M1059 M1058 M1057 M1056 Decimal
mode
0: AUTO (Bit 3) (Bit 2) (Bit 1) (Bit 0)
M1056
1: EDIT 0 0 0 0 0 AUTO
M1057
2: MDI 0 0 0 1 1 EDIT R/W
M1058
3: MPG
M1059 0 0 1 0 2 MDI
4: JOG
0 0 1 1 3 MPG
5: RAPID
0 1 0 0 4 JOG
6: HOME
0 1 0 1 5 RAPID
0 1 1 0 6 HOME
14-3
Special Device
M type
In AUTO mode, program pauses after one block is
Single block execution M1060 R/W
executed.
14 Cycle Start
NC pause
System stop
M1061
M1062
M1063
Notifies the system to perform cycle start.
After M1056 is triggered, the NC controller will pause
immediately.
System stops machining operations.
R/W
R/W
R/W
After M1076 or the reset signal of machine operation panel
System reset M1064 A is triggered, the system will reset, and M1064 is R
triggered.
After M1065 is triggered, the moving speed F of G01 in
Dry run M1065 AUTO mode refers to the feedrate assigned in the D1062 R/M
register.
Optional stop Optional stop key. When the program runs to M01, the
M1066 R/W
(M01 program stop) controller stops immediately.
The program skips the block containing symbol '/' when
Single block skip (‘/’) M1067 R/W
this function is enabled.
Lock all axes Locks all X, Y and Z axes of the machine so they cannot
M1068 R/W
movements move.
Lock Z axis movement M1069 Locks the Z axis of the machine so it cannot move. R/W
When this function is enabled, the limit signal of each axis
Limit release M1070 R/W
is ignored.
Lock M, S and T
M1071 The program skips M, S, and T codes in the execution. R/W
codes
The MLC sends this signal after the system confirms that
DMCNET connection the DMCNET connection is successful. Note that this
M1072 R
successful signal signifies the connection is successful instead of the
Servo On status.
Macro call initialization Macro call initialization (requires AUTO mode and the
M1074 R/W
ready correct Macro ID to initialize successfully).
Macro program call start (requires AUTO mode and the
Macro call start M1075 correct Macro ID to complete initialization before it can R/W
start correctly).
When this signal is triggered, the system will reset (MLC >
System reset M1076 R/W
NC).
M99 main program When M1077 is set as ON, the system stops machining
M1077 R/W
stop when it reads M99 in the main program.
M96 subroutine When this signal is triggered, the system executes M96 to
M1078 R/W
interruption interrupt the subroutine.
Works with the parameter Pr305 [Emergency stop source]
MLC emergency stop
M1079 setting; when M1079 is set to ON, the system triggers the R/W
trigger
emergency stop.
While the program is running, it uses the operationspeed
MPG simulation M1080 of MPG to control the movement speed of the motion R/W
trajectory.
Restricted zone
The protection of restricted zones is released when M1085
protection release M1085 R/W
is triggered.
function
When using the synchronous function, you must set this
Synchronous control
M1088 special Mto On to have the system enable the R/W
trigger
synchronous function.
X slave axis follows
M1089 Makes X axis the slave axis in the synchronous function. R/W
the master axis
Y slave axis follows
M1090 Makes Y axis the slave axis in the synchronous function. R/W
the master axis
Z slave axis follows
M1091 Makes Z axis the slave axis in the synchronous function. R/W
the master axis
14-4
Special Device
M type
A slave axis follows
M1092 Makes A axis the slave axis in the synchronous function. R/W
the master axis
14
B slave axis follows
M1093 Makes B axis the slave axis in the synchronous function. R/W
the master axis
C slave axis follows
M1094 Makes C axis the slave axis in the synchronous function. R/W
the master axis
U slave axis follows
M1095 Makes U axis the slave axis in the synchronous function. R/W
the master axis
V slave axis follows
M1096 Makes V axis the slave axis in the synchronous function. R/W
the master axis
W slave axis follows
M1097 Makes W axis the slave axis in the synchronous function. R/W
the master axis
When using transfer command functions, you must set
Transfer command
M1098 M1098 to On to have the system enable the transfer R/W
control trigger
command function.
X axis receives
Makes X axis the axis that receives command in the
command from master M1099 R/W
transfer command function.
axis
Y axis receives
Makes Y axis the axis that receives command in the
axis
Z axis receives
Makes Z axis the axis that receives command in the
axis
A axis receives
Makes A axis the axis that receives command in the
axis
B axis receives
Makes B axis the axis that receives command in the
axis
C axis receives
Makes C axis the axis that receives command in the
axis
U axis receives
Makes U axis the axis that receives command in the
axis
V axis receives
Makes V axis the axis that receives command in the
axis
W axis receives
Makes W axis the axis that receives command in the
axis
Uses machine operation panel B to trigger the MPG
Panel MPG pulse + M1118 function; this is a positive trigger signal, refer to the R/W
explanation of D1040 for the enabling method.
Uses machine operation panel B to trigger the MPG
Panel MPG pulse - M1119 function; this is a reverse trigger signal, refer to the R/W
explanation of D1040 for the enabling method.
Spindle forward
M1120 Spindle forward rotation. R/W
rotation
Spindle reverse
M1121 Spindle reverse rotation. R/W
rotation
14-5
Special Device
M type
The selection of the spindle gear ratio uses M1122 -
M1123 to represent Bit 0 - Bit 1 in binary format. If
14
converted to decimal format, M1122 and M1123
correspond to 0 - 3, representing the four sets of gear
ratios of the spindle parameters Pr422 - Pr429.
For example, if you select the spindle parameter Pr428 -
Spindle gear ratio M1122
Pr429 gear ratio numerator 4 and gear ratio denominator R/W
selection M1123 4, which is 3 in decimal format and 0011 in binary format,
the two bits of the MLC correspond to M1122 and M1123
respectively, so the On and Off states corresponding to the
bits are as follows.
M1122 = ON
M1123 = ON
Spindle positioning
M1124 Spindle positioning function. R/W
control
Spindle retraction
M1125 Spindle retraction after tapping. R/W
after tapping
You can trigger this special M to perform C axis and
Lathe spindle / C axis spindle mode-switching function on the lathe system.
M1126 R/W
mode switch
Note: only available on the lathe system.
Use this special M to select the parameter that the spindle
Spindle analog analog voltage ratio gain will refer to.
M1127 R/W
voltage ratio gain When M1127 = On, refer to Pr413.
When M1127 = Off, refer to Pr419.
M, S, and T codes When M1152 is triggered, it notifies the NC system that the
M1152 R/W
execution complete M, S and T code actions are complete.
Tool magazine 1 operates in forward direction. When this
Tool magazine 1 special M is triggered, the incremental station number
M1168 R/W
forward operation (D1372) of the tool decreases by 1 and the standby tool
number (D1373) increases by 1.
Tool magazine 1 operates in reverse direction. When this
M1169 R/W
reverse operation (D1372) of the tool increases by 1 and the standby tool
number (D1373) decreases by 1.
Tool 1 exchange M1170 Exchanges tool data in tool magazine 1. R/W
When this signal is triggered, the tool number data in tool
Tool magazine 1 reset M1171 R/W
magazine 1 is reset.
Tool magazine 2 operates in forward direction. When this
M1172 R/W
forward operation (D1376) of the tool decreases by 1 and the standby tool
number (D1377) increases by 1.
Tool magazine 2 operates in reverse direction. When this
M1173 R/W
reverse operation (D1376) of the tool increases by 1 and the standby tool
number (D1377) decreases by 1.
Tool 2 exchange M1174 Exchanges tool data in tool magazine 2. R/W
When this signal is triggered, the tool number data in tool
Tool magazine 2 reset M1175 R/W
magazine 2 is reset.
X axis movement
trigger M1184 X axis control trigger of the MLC. R/W
(MLC axis)
Y axis movement
trigger M1185 Y axis control trigger of the MLC. R/W
(MLC axis)
Z axis movement
trigger M1186 Z axis control trigger of the MLC. R/W
(MLC axis)
14-6
Special Device
M type
A axis movement
trigger M1187 A axis control trigger of the MLC. R/W
14
(MLC axis)
B axis movement
trigger M1188 B axis control trigger of the MLC. R/W
(MLC axis)
C axis movement
trigger M1189 C axis control trigger of the MLC. R/W
(MLC axis)
U axis movement
trigger M1190 U axis control trigger of the MLC. R/W
(MLC axis)
V axis movement
trigger M1191 V axis control trigger of the MLC. R/W
(MLC axis)
W axis movement
trigger M1192 W axis control trigger of the MLC. R/W
(MLC axis)
Spindle movement
trigger M1193 Spindle control trigger of the MLC. R/W
(MLC axis)
MLC axis incremental Regards the positioning value of the special D assigned by
M1194 R/W
movement command each MLC axis as incremental.
NC / MLC switching When M1200 is On, switch to X axis of the MLC system.
M1200 R/W
(X axis) When M1200 is Off, switch to X axis of the NC system.
NC / MLC switching When M1201 is On, switch to Y axis of the MLC system.
M1201 R/W
(Y axis) When M1201 is Off, switch to Y axis of the NC system.
NC / MLC switching When M1202 is On, switch to Z axis of the MLC system.
M1202 R/W
(Z axis) When M1202 is Off, switch to Z axis of the NC system.
NC / MLC switching When M1203 is On, switch to A axis of the MLC system.
M1203 R/W
(A axis) When M1203 is Off, switch to A axis of the NC system.
S NC / MLC switching When M1204 is On, switch to B axis of the MLC system.
M1204 R/W
(B axis) When M1204 is Off, switch to B axis of the NC system.
NC / MLC switching When M1205 is On, switch to C axis of the MLC system.
M1205 R/W
(C axis) When M1205 is Off, switch to C axis of the NC system.
NC / MLC switching When M1206 is On, switch to U axis of the MLC system.
M1206 R/W
(U axis) When M1206 is Off, switch to U axis of the NC system.
NC / MLC switching When M1207 is On, switch to V axis of the MLC system.
M1207 R/W
(V axis) When M1207 is Off, switch to V axis of the NC system.
Switch NC axis to
When M1208 is On, switch to W axis of the MLC system.
MLC axis M1208 R/W
When M1208 is Off, switch to W axis of the NC system.
(W axis)
X axis forward jog
M1216 Trigger for X axis forward jog operation. R/W
control
Y axis forward jog
M1217 Trigger for Y axis forward jog operation. R/W
control
Z axis forward jog
M1218 Trigger for Z axis forward jog operation. R/W
control
A axis forward jog
M1219 Trigger for A axis forward jog operation. R/W
control
B axis forward jog
M1220 Trigger for B axis forward jog operation. R/W
control
C axis forward jog
M1221 Trigger for C axis forward jog operation. R/W
control
U axis forward jog
M1222 Trigger for U axis forward jog operation. R/W
control
14-7
Special Device
M type
V axis forward e jog
M1223 Trigger for V axis forward jog operation. R/W
control
14 W axis forward jog

control
X axis reverse jog
control
M1224
M1226
Trigger for W axis forward jog operation.
Trigger for X axis reverse jog operation.

R/W
R/W
Y axis reverse jog

M1227 Trigger for Y axis reverse jog operation. R/W
control
Z axis reverse jog
M1228 Trigger for Z axis reverse jog operation. R/W
control
A axis reverse jog
M1229 Trigger for A axis reverse jog operation. R/W
control
B axis reverse jog
M1230 Trigger for B axis reverse jog operation. R/W
control
C axis reverse jog
M1231 Trigger for C axis reverse jog operation. R/W
control
U axis reverse jog
M1232 Trigger for U axis reverse jog operation. R/W
control
V axis reverse jog
M1233 Trigger for V axis reverse jog operation. R/W
control
W axis reverse jog
M1234 Trigger for W axis reverse jog operation. R/W
control
X axis homing control M1236 Trigger for X axis homing operation. R/W
Y axis homing control M1237 Trigger for Y axis homing operation. R/W
Z axis homing control M1238 Trigger for Z axis homing operation. R/W
A axis homing control M1239 Trigger for A axis homing operation. R/W
B axis homing control M1240 Trigger for B axis homing operation. R/W
C axis homing control M1241 Trigger for C axis homing operation. R/W
U axis homing control M1242 Trigger for U axis homing operation. R/W
V axis return home
M1243 Trigger for V axis homing operation. R/W
control
W axis homing control M1244 Trigger for W axis homing operation. R/W
Cancel X axis 1st
M1248 Trigger for cancelling X axis 1st software limit. R/W
software limit
Cancel Y axis 1st
M1249 Trigger for cancelling Y axis 1st software limit. R/W
software limit
Cancel Z axis 1st
M1250 Trigger for cancelling Z axis 1st software limit. R/W
software limit
Cancel A axis 1st
M1251 Trigger for cancelling A axis 1st software limit. R/W
software limit
Cancel B axis 1st
M1252 Trigger for cancelling B axis 1st software limit. R/W
software limit
Cancel C axis 1st
M1253 Trigger for cancelling C axis 1st software limit. R/W
software limit
Cancel U axis 1st
M1254 Trigger for cancelling U axis 1st software limit. R/W
software limit
Cancel V axis 1st
M1255 Trigger for cancelling V axis 1st software limit. R/W
software limit
Cancel W axis 1st
M1256 Trigger for cancelling W axis 1st software limit. R/W
software limit
Lock X axis M1257 Trigger for locking X axis. R/W
Lock Y axis M1258 Trigger for locking Y axis. R/W
Lock Z axis M1259 Trigger for locking Z axis. R/W
14-8
Special Device
M type
Lock A axis M1260 Trigger for locking A axis. R/W
Lock B axis M1261 Trigger for locking B axis. R/W
Lock C axis
Lock U axis
Lock V axis
M1262
M1263
M1264
Trigger for locking C axis.
Trigger for locking U axis.
Trigger for locking V axis.
R/W
R/W
R/W
14
Lock W axis M1265 Trigger for locking W axis. R/W
X axis Servo Off M1266 Trigger for X axis Servo Off. R/W
Y axis Servo Off M1267 Trigger for Y axis Servo Off. R/W
Z axis Servo Off M1268 Trigger for Z axis Servo Off. R/W
A axis Servo Off M1269 Trigger for A axis Servo Off. R/W
B axis Servo Off M1270 Trigger for B axis Servo Off. R/W
C axis Servo Off M1271 Trigger for C axis Servo Off. R/W
U axis Servo Off M1272 Trigger for U axis Servo Off. R/W
V axis Servo Off M1273 Trigger for V axis Servo Off. R/W
W axis Servo Off M1274 Trigger for W axis Servo Off. R/W
MLC X axis increment Regards the value of D1064 of the MLC X axis as
M1280 R/W
switch incremental.
MLC Y axis increment Regards the value of D1066 of the MLC Y axis as
M1281 R/W
switch incremental.
MLC Z axis increment Regards the value of D1068 of the MLC Z axis as
M1282 R/W
switch incremental.
MLC A axis increment Regards the value of D1070 of the MLC A axis as
M1283 R/W
switch incremental.
MLC B axis increment Regards the value of D1072 of the MLC B axis as
M1284 R/W
switch incremental.
MLC C axis increment Regards the value of D1074 of the MLC C axis as
M1285 R/W
switch incremental.
MLC U axis increment Regards the value of D1076 of the MLC U axis as
M1286 R/W
switch incremental.
MLC V axis increment Regards the value of D1078 of the MLC V axis as
M1287 R/W
switch incremental.
MLC W axis increment Regards the value of D1080 of the MLC W axis as
M1288 R/W
switch incremental.
When M1289 is On, regards the MLC X axis operation as
MLC X axis control
M1289 in Speed mode. When M1289 is Off, regards the MLC X R/W
mode
axis operation as in Position mode.
When M1290 is On, regards the MLC Y axis operation as
MLC Y axis control
M1290 in Speed mode. When M1290 is Off, regards the MLC Y R/W
mode
When M1291 is On, regards the MLC Z axis operation as
MLC Z axis control
M1291 in Speed mode. When M1291 is Off, regards the MLC Z R/W
mode
When M1292 is On, regards the MLC A axis operation as
MLC A axis control
M1292 in Speed mode. When M1292 is Off, regards the MLC A R/W
mode
When M1293 is On, regards the MLC B axis operation as
MLC B axis control
M1293 in Speed mode. When M1293 is Off, regards the MLC B R/W
mode
When M1294 is On, regards the MLC C axis operation as
MLC C axis control
M1294 in Speed mode. When M1294 is Off, regards the MLC C R/W
mode
When M1295 is On, regards the MLC U axis operation as
MLC U axis control
M1295 in Speed mode. When M1295 is Off, regards the MLC U R/W
mode
14-9
Special Device
M type
When M1296 is On, regards the MLC V axis operation as
MLC V axis control
M1296 in Speed mode. When M1296 is Off, regards the MLC V R/W
14
mode
When M1297 is On, regards the MLC W axis operation as
MLC W axis control
M1297 in Speed mode. When M1297 is Off, regards the MLC W R/W
mode
If M1298 is set to On when the MLC axis is operating and
MLC X axis high
M1298 the corresponding DI for the X axis is triggered, the MLC X R/W
speed input trigger
axis immediately stops.
MLC Y axis high
M1299 the corresponding DI for the Y axis is triggered, the MLC Y R/W
speed input trigger
MLC Z axis high
M1300 the corresponding DI for the Z axis is triggered, the MLC Z R/W
speed input trigger
MLC A axis high
M1301 the corresponding DI for the A axis is triggered, the MLC A R/W
speed input trigger
MLC B axis high
M1302 the corresponding DI for the B axis is triggered, the MLC B R/W
speed input trigger
MLC C axis high
M1303 the corresponding DI for the C axis is triggered, the MLC C R/W
speed input trigger
MLC U axis high
M1304 the corresponding DI for the U axis is triggered, the MLC U R/W
speed input trigger
MLC V axis high
M1305 the corresponding DI for the V axis is triggered, the MLC V R/W
speed input trigger
MLC W axis high
M1306 the corresponding DI for the W axis is triggered, the MLC R/W
speed input trigger
W axis immediately stops.
When M1307 is On, the spindle speed command refers to
Spindle speed
M1307 the setting of D1148. When M1307 is set to Off, the R/W
command source
spindle speed command refers to the S code setting.
When Pr501 [X axis movement protection] is set to 1, you
X axis movement
M1312 need to set M1312 to On for the X axis to move during R/W
permission
machining.
When Pr501 [Y axis movement protection] is set to 1, you
Y axis movement
M1313 need to set M1313 to On for the Y axis to move during R/W
permission
machining.
When Pr501 [Z axis movement protection] is set to 1, you
Z axis movement
M1314 need to set M1314 to On for the Z axis to move during R/W
permission
machining.
When Pr501 [A axis movement protection] is set to 1, you
A axis movement
M1315 need to set M1315 to On for the A axis to move during R/W
permission
machining.
When Pr501 [B axis movement protection] is set to 1, you
B axis movement
M1316 need to set M1316 to On for the B axis to move during R/W
permission
machining.
When Pr501 [C axis movement protection] is set to 1, you
C axis movement
M1317 need to set M1317 to On for the C axis to move during R/W
permission
machining.
When Pr501 [U axis movement protection] is set to 1, you
U axis movement
M1318 need to set M1318 to On for the U axis to move during R/W
permission
machining.
14-10
Special Device
M type
When Pr501 [V axis movement protection] is set to 1, you
V axis movement
M1319 need to set M1319 to On for the V axis to move during R/W
14
permission
machining.
When Pr501 [W axis movement protection] is set to 1, you
W axis movement
M1320 need to set M1320 to On for the W axis to move during R/W
permission
machining.
 In Auto or MDI mode, when Pr485 [Enable the lock for
positive/negative axis operation in AUTO mode] is set
to 1 and M1344 is set to On, the X axis does not move
in positive direction.
Lock machine X axis
M1344  In JOG, MPG, or Rapid mode, if M1344 is set to On, R/W
positive operation
the X axis does not move in positive direction
regardless of the parameter setting.
 In HOME mode, of M1344 is set to On, the X axis does
not perform the homing procedure.
to 1 and M1345 is set to On, the Y axis does not move
Lock machine Y axis
positive operation
the Y axis does not move in positive direction
 In HOME mode, of M1345 is set to On, the Y axis does
to 1 and M1346 is set to On, the Z axis does not move
Lock machine Z axis
positive operation
the Y axis does not move in positive direction
 In HOME mode, of M1346 is set to On, the Z axis does
to 1 and M1347 is set to On, the A axis does not move
Lock machine A axis
positive operation
the A axis does not move in positive direction
 In HOME mode, of M1347 is set to On, the A axis does
to 1 and M1348 is set to On, theB axis does not move
Lock machine B axis
positive operation
the B axis does not move in positive direction
 In HOME mode, of M1348 is set to On, the B axis does
to 1 and M1349 is set to On, the C axis does not move
Lock machine C axis
positive operation
the C axis does not move in positive direction
 In HOME mode, of M1349 is set to On, the C axis does
14-11
Special Device
M type
14
to 1 and M1350 is set to On, the U axis does not move
Lock machine U axis
positive operation
the U axis does not move in positive direction
 In HOME mode, of M1350 is set to On, the U axis does
to 1 and M1351 is set to On, the V axis does not move
Lock machine V axis
positive operation
the V axis does not move in positive direction
 In HOME mode, of M1351 is set to On, the V axis does
to 1 and M1352 is set to On, the W axis does not move
Lock machine W axis
positive operation
the W axis does not move in positive direction
 In HOME mode, of M1352 is set to On, the W axis
does not perform the homing procedure.
to 1 and M1353 is set to On, the X axis does not move
in negative direction.
Lock machine X axis
negative operation
the X axis does not move in negative direction
 In HOME mode, of M1353 is set to On, the X axis does
to 1 and M1354 is set to On, the Y axis does not move
Lock machine Y axis
negative operation
the Y axis does not move in negative direction
 In HOME mode, of M1354 is set to On, the Y axis does
to 1 and M1355 is set to On, the Z axis does not move
Lock machine Z axis
negative operation
the Z axis does not move in negative direction
 In HOME mode, of M1355 is set to On, the Z axis does
14-12
Special Device
M type
14
to 1 and M1356 is set to On, the A axis does not move
Lock machine A axis
negative operation
the A axis does not move in negative direction
 In HOME mode, of M1356 is set to On, the A axis does
to 1 and M1357 is set to On, the B axis does not move
Lock machine B axis
negative operation
the B axis does not move in negative direction
 In HOME mode, of M1357 is set to On, the B axis does
to 1 and M1358 is set to On, the C axis does not move
Lock machine C axis
negative operation
the C axis does not move in negative direction
 In HOME mode, of M1358 is set to On, the C axis does
to 1 and M1359 is set to On, the U axis does not move
Lock machine U axis
negative operation
the U axis does not move in negative direction
 In HOME mode, of M1359 is set to On, the U axis does
to 1 and M1360 is set to On, the V axis does not move
Lock machine V axis
negative operation
the V axis does not move in negative direction
 In HOME mode, of M1360 is set to On, the V axis does
to 1 and M1361 is set to On, the W axis does not move
Lock machine W axis
negative operation
the W axis does not move in negative direction
 In HOME mode, of M1361 is set to On, the W axis
does not perform the homing procedure.
Trigger breakpoint
M1567 Triggers the breakpoint search function on the MLC. R/W
search function
HMI input point 1 M2080 Corresponds its status to the system variable, #1864. R
14-13
Special Device
M type
14
HMIe input point 9 M2088 Corresponds its status to the system variable, #1872. R
Startup complete and
M2112 This signal is sent when the NC system is ready. R
system ready
System macro This signal is sent when a macro alarm (MR____) occurs
M2113 R
warning occurred on the NC system.
System emergency This signal is sent when the EMG key is pressed,
M2114 R
stop triggering the emergency stop of the system.
Servo enable M2115 This signal is sent when the servo is ready. R
MLC X axis high This signal is sent when M1298 (MLC X axis high speed
speed input trigger M2128 input trigger) is set as On and the corresponding DI of the R
feedback X axis is triggered.
MLC Y axis high This signal is sent when M1299 (MLC Y axis high speed
feedback Y axis is triggered.
MLC Z axis high This signal is sent when M1300 (MLC Z axis high speed
feedback Z axis is triggered.
MLC A axis high This signal is sent when M1301 (MLC A axis high speed
feedback A axis is triggered.
MLC B axis high This signal is sent when M1302 (MLC B axis high speed
feedback B axis is triggered.
14-14
Special Device
M type
MLC C axis high This signal is sent when M1303 (MLC C axis high speed
14
feedback C axis is triggered.
MLC U axis high This signal is sent when M1304 (MLC U axis high speed
feedback U axis is triggered.
MLC V axis high This signal is sent when M1305 (MLC V axis high speed
feedback V axis is triggered.
MLC W axis high This signal is sent when M1306 (MLC W axis high speed
feedback W axis is triggered.
This signal is sent when G31P1 (high speed input contact
HSI 1 M2142 R
1) skip signal is input.
This signal is sent when G31P2 (high speed input contact
HSI 2 M2143 R
2) skip signal is input.
Port 1 axis positive This signal is sent when Port 1 axis positive hardware limit
M2144 R
hardware limit is triggered.
Port 1 axis negative This signal is sent when Port 1 axis negative hardware
M2145 R
hardware limit limit is triggered.
Port 1 axis home This signal is sent when Port 1 axis home signal is
M2146 R
signal triggered.
M2148 R
M2149 R
M2150 R
signal triggerered.
M2152 R
M2153 R
M2154 R
signal triggered.
M2156 R
M2157 R
M2158 R
signal triggered.
M2160 R
M2161 R
M2162 R
signal triggered.
M2164 R
M2165 R
M2166 R
signal triggered.
M2168 R
M2169 R
14-15
Special Device
M type
M2170 R
signal triggered.
14 Port 8 axis positive

hardware limit
Port 8 axis negative
hardware limit
M2172
M2173
This signal is sent when Port 8 axis positive hardware limit
is triggered.
This signal is sent when Port 8 axis negative hardware
limit is triggered.
R
M2174 R
signal triggered.
M2176 R
M2177 R
M2178 R
signal triggered.
When the M code is executed in the program, the NC sets
M2208 to on. Until M1152 (M, S, and T codes execution
complete) is triggered, M2208 is set to off. The NC does
M code execution M2208 R
not trigger M2208 when the program executes M00, M01,
M02, M30, M98, M99, or an M code that is used for macro
call.
When the S code is executed in the program, the NC sets
M2209 to on. Until M1152 (M, S, and T codes execution
S code execution M2209 R
complete) is triggered, M2209 is set to off. The NC does
not trigger M2209 when an S code is used for macro call.
When the T code (Standby tool number) is executed in the
program, the system sets M2210 to on. Until M1152 (M, S,
and T codes execution complete) is triggered, M2210 is
set to off. The NC does not trigger M2210 when a T code
T code execution M2210 R
is used for macro call. M2210 is related to the station ID in
the tool magazine. The NC system triggers M2210 only
when the T code value is set within the specified range of
tool number for the tool magazine parameter.
After you use M1171 to reset the tool magazine, the NC
Tool magazine 1 reset
M2212 sets this special M relay to on. (M1171 is effective only R
complete
when in AUTO or MDI mode)
After you use M1175 to reset the tool magazine, the NC
Tool magazine 2 reset
M2213 sets this special M relay to on. (M1175 is effective only R
complete
when in AUTO or MDI mode)
M96 (program
When M96 (program interruption) is in execution, the NC
interruption) in M2216 R
sets this special M relay to on.
execution
After loading the G codes, the NC sets this special M relay
G code ready M2223 R
to on.
Macro call initial Initialization setting for the macro call function is complete
M2224 R
preparation complete (only works in AUTO mode and with correct macro ID).
Macro call in
M2225 This special M is on when macro call in execution. R
execution
Macro call error M2226 Indicates a macro call error. R
Synchronous function When the synchronous function is in execution, the NC
M2227 R
in execution sets this special M relay to on.
Transfer function in When the transfer function is in execution, the NC sets this
M2228 R
execution special M relay to on.
NC system reset
M2229 After resetting, the NC sets this special M relay to on. R
complete
This special M relay is on when the MPG is in forward
MPG in forward
M2232 operation. This special M relay is off when the MPG is in R
operation
reverse operation or stationary.
14-16
Special Device
M type
This special M relay is on when the MPG is in reverse
MPG in reverse
M2233 operation. This special M relay is off when the MPG is in R
14
operation
forward operation or stationary.
System stops at M99 M2238 When reading M99, the NC sets this special M relay to on. R
Lathe C/S axis When the lathe system is switched from Spindle mode to
M2239 R
switching C axis mode, the NC sets this special M relay to on.
Channel alarm When an error occurs in the NC channel, the NC sets this
M2240 R
message special M relay to on.
Auto execution When the NC is in AUTO mode, it sets this special M relay
M2241 R
(AUTO) to on.
When the NC is in EDIT mode, it sets this special M relay
Program edit (EDIT) M2242 R
to on.
When the NC is in MDI mode, it sets this special M relay to
Manual input (MDI) M2243 R
on.
When the NC is in MPG mode, it sets this special M relay
MPG feeding (MPG) M2244 R
to on.
When the NC is in JOG mode, it sets this special M relay
Jog (JOG) M2245 R
to on.
Rapid feeding When the NC is in RAPID mode, it sets this special M
M2246 R
(RAPID) relay to on.
When the NC is in HOME mode, it sets this special M relay
Homing (HOME) M2247 R
to on.
When the program pauses after executing one single
Single block execution M2249 R
block, the NC sets this special M relay to on.
Program in execution When the NC is executing the program, it sets this special
M2250 R
M relay to on.
Pause M2251 When the NC pauses, it sets this special M relay to on. R
M01 program stop
M2252 When the NC reads M00, it sets this special M relay to on. R
(optional)
M02 end of program M2253 When the NC reads M01, it sets this special M relay to on. R
M30 end of program
and returns
M01 program stop
(optional)
Spindle speed When the spindle speed reached the target value, the NC
M2256 R
reached target speed sets this special M relay to on
Spindle speed When the spindle speed reached zero speed, the NC sets
M2257 R
reached zero speed this special M relay to on.
Spindle positioning When the spindle reaches the target position, the NC sets
M2258 R
complete this special M relay to on.
Spindle is in the rigid When the spindle performs tapping, the NC sets this
M2259 R
tapping mode special M relay to on.
Spindle rigid tapping When the spindle tapping is interrupted, the NC sets this
M2260 R
interruption special M relay to on.
When the X axis homing is complete, the NC sets this
Program ends M2271 R
special M relay to on.
X axis homing When the Y axis homing is complete, the NC sets this
M2272 R
complete special M relay to on.
Y axis homing When the Z axis homing is complete, the NC sets this
M2273 R
Z axis homing When the A axis homing is complete, the NC sets this
M2274 R
A axis homing When the B axis homing is complete, the NC sets this
M2275 R
14-17
Special Device
M type
B axis homing When the C axis homing is complete, the NC sets this
M2276 R
14 C axis homing
complete
U axis homing
complete
M2277
M2278
When the U axis homing is complete, the NC sets this
When the V axis homing is complete, the NC sets this
R
V axis homing When the W axis homing is complete, the NC sets this
M2279 R
W axis homing When the X axis homing is complete, the NC sets this
M2280 R
X axis positioned at When the X axis reaches the 2nd reference point, the NC
M2286 R
the 2nd reference point sets this special M relay to on.
Y axis positioned at When the Y axis reaches the 2nd reference point, the NC
M2287 R
Z axis positioned at When the Z axis reaches the 2nd reference point, the NC
M2288 R
A axis positioned at When the A axis reaches the 2nd reference point, the NC
M2289 R
B axis positioned at When the B axis reaches the 2nd reference point, the NC
M2290 R
C axis positioned at When the C axis reaches the 2nd reference point, the NC
M2291 R
U axis positioned at When the U axis reaches the 2nd reference point, the NC
M2292 R
V axis positioned at When the V axis reaches the 2nd reference point, the NC
M2293 R
W axis positioned at When the W axis reaches the 2nd reference point, the NC
M2294 R
X axis positioned at When the X axis reaches the 3rd reference point, the NC
M2295 R
the 3rd reference point sets this special M relay to on.
Y axis positioned at When the Y axis reaches the 3rd reference point, the NC
M2296 R
Z axis positioned at When the Z axis reaches the 3rd reference point, the NC
M2297 R
A axis positioned at When the A axis reaches the 3rd reference point, the NC
M2298 R
B axis positioned at When the B axis reaches the 3rd reference point, the NC
M2299 R
C axis positioned at When the C axis reaches the 3rd reference point, the NC
M2300 R
U axis positioned at When the U axis reaches the 3rd reference point, the NC
M2301 R
V axis positioned at When the V axis reaches the 3rd reference point, the NC
M2302 R
W axis positioned at When the W axis reaches the 3rd reference point, the NC
M2303 R
When the X axis is in MLC axis control mode and X axis
MLC X axis reaches the positioning point, the NC sets this special M
M2304 R
positioning complete relay to on. If the MLC is in speed mode, M2304 indicates
the speed is reached.
When the Y axis is in MLC axis control mode and Y axis
MLC Y axis reaches the positioning point, the NC sets this special M
M2305 R
14-18
Special Device
M type
When the Z axis is in MLC axis control mode and Z axis
MLC Z axis reaches the positioning point, the NC sets this special M
14
M2306 R
When the A axis is in MLC axis control mode and A axis
MLC A axis reaches the positioning point, the NC sets this special M
M2307 R
When the B axis is in MLC axis control mode and B axis
MLC B axis reaches the positioning point, the NC sets this special M
M2308 R
When the C axis is in MLC axis control mode and C axis
MLC C axis reaches the positioning point, the NC sets this special M
M2309 R
When the U axis is in MLC axis control mode and U axis
MLC U axis reaches the positioning point, the NC sets this special M
M2310 R
When the V axis is in MLC axis control mode and V axis
MLC V axis reaches the positioning point, the NC sets this special M
M2311 R
When the W axis is in MLC axis control mode and W axis
MLC W axis reaches the positioning point, the NC sets this special M
M2312 R
When X axis is moving (in any modes), the NC sets this
X axis moving M2320 R
When Y axis is moving (in any modes), the NC sets this
Y axis moving M2321 R
When Z axis is moving (in any modes), the NC sets this
Z axis moving M2322 R
When A axis is moving (in any modes), the NC sets this
A axis moving M2323 R
When B axis is moving (in any modes), the NC sets this
B axis moving M2324 R
When C axis is moving (in any modes), the NC sets this
C axis moving M2325 R
When U axis is moving (in any modes), the NC sets this
U axis moving M2326 R
When V axis is moving (in any modes), the NC sets this
V axis moving M2327 R
When W axis is moving (in any modes), the NC sets this
W axis moving M2328 R
X axis is moving in This special M relay is on when X axis is moving in forward
M2336 R
forward direction direction.
Y axis is moving in This special M relay is on when Y axis is moving in forward
M2337 R
Z axis is moving in This special M relay is on when Z axis is moving in forward
M2338 R
A axis is moving in This special M relay is on when A axis is moving in forward
M2339 R
B axis is moving in This special M relay is on when B axis is moving in forward
M2340 R
C axis is moving in This special M relay is on when C axis is moving in
M2341 R
forward direction forward direction.
14-19
Special Device
M type
U axis is moving in This special M relay is on when U axis is moving in
M2342 R
forward direction forward direction.
14 V axis is moving in
forward direction
W axis is moving in
forward direction
M2343
M2344
This special M relay is on when V axis is moving in forward
direction.
This special M relay is on when W axis is moving in
forward direction.
R
X axis is moving in This special M relay is on when X axis is moving in reverse

M2345 R
reverse direction direction.
Y axis is moving in This special M relay is on when Y axis is moving in reverse
M2346 R
Z axis is moving in This special M relay is on when Z axis is moving in reverse
M2347 R
A axis is moving in This special M relay is on when A axis is moving in reverse
M2348 R
B axis is moving in This special M relay is on when B axis is moving in reverse
M2349 R
C axis is moving in This special M relay is on when C axis is moving in
M2350 R
reverse direction reverse direction.
U axis is moving in This special M relay is on when U axis is moving in
M2351 R
V axis is moving in This special M relay is on when V axis is moving in reverse
M2352 R
W axis is moving in This special M relay is on when W axis is moving in
M2353 R
NC / MLC axis
When the NC sets M1200 to on to switch X axis from NC
switching complete M2354 R
to MLC, the NC sets this special M relay to on.
(X axis)
NC / MLC axis
When the NC sets M1201 to on to switch Y axis from NC
(Y axis)
NC / MLC axis
When the NC sets M1202 to on to switch Z axis from NC
(Z axis)
NC / MLC axis
When the NC sets M1203 to on to switch A axis from NC
(A axis)
NC / MLC axis
When the NC sets M1204 to on to switch B axis from NC
(B axis)
NC / MLC axis
When the NC sets M1205 to on to switch C axis from NC
(C axis)
NC / MLC axis
When the NC sets M1206 to on to switch U axis from NC
(U axis)
NC / MLC axis
When the NC sets M1207 to on to switch V axis from NC
(V axis)
NC / MLC axis
When the NC sets M1208 to on to switch W axis from NC
(W axis)
X axis positioned at When the X axis reaches the 4th reference point, the NC
M2368 R
the 4th reference point sets this special M relay to on.
Y axis positioned at When the Y axis reaches the 4th reference point, the NC
M2369 R
Z axis positioned at When the Z axis reaches the 4th reference point, the NC
M2370 R
14-20
Special Device
M type
A axis positioned at When the A axis reaches the 4th reference point, the NC
M2371 R
14
B axis positioned at When the B axis reaches the 4th reference point, the NC
M2372 R
C axis positioned at When the C axis reaches the 4th reference point, the NC
M2373 R
U axis positioned at When the U axis reaches the 4th reference point, the NC
M2374 R
V axis positioned at When the V axis reaches the 4th reference point, the NC
M2375 R
W axis positioned at When the W axis reaches the 4th reference point, the NC
M2376 R
When the X axis origin coordinate is established, the
X axis homing
M2377 “Homing complete” symbol ( ) is displayed in the POS R
complete
screen, and the NC sets this special M relay to on.
When the Y axis origin coordinate is established, the
Y axis homing
M2378 “Homing complete” symbol is displayed in the POS screen, R
complete
and the NC sets this special M relay to on.
When the Z axis origin coordinate is established, the
Z axis homing
complete
When the A axis origin coordinate is established, the
A axis homing
complete
When the B axis origin coordinate is established, the
B axis homing
complete
When the C axis origin coordinate is established, the
C axis homing
complete
When the U axis origin coordinate is established, the
U axis homing
complete
When the V axis origin coordinate is established, the
V axis homing
complete
When the W axis origin coordinate is established, the
W axis homing
complete
X axis Servo On / Off When X axis is in Servo On status, the NC sets this
M2386 R
status special M relay to on.
Y axis Servo On / Off When Y axis is in Servo On status, the NC sets this
M2387 R
Z axis Servo On / Off When Z axis is in Servo On status, the NC sets this special
M2388 R
status M relay to on.
A axis Servo On / Off When A axis is in Servo On status, the NC sets this special
M2389 R
status M relay to on.
B axis Servo On / Off When B axis is in Servo On status, the NC sets this
M2390 R
C axis Servo On / Off When C axis is in Servo On status, the NC sets this
M2391 R
U axis Servo On / Off When U axis is in Servo On status, the NC sets this
M2392 R
V axis Servo On / Off When V axis is in Servo On status, the NC sets this
M2393 R
W axis Servo On / Off When W axis is in Servo On status, the NC sets this
M2394 R
14-21
Special Device
M type
When Pr501 (Axis movement protection) is set to 1, if the
Movement in X axis M2400 X axis moves during machining, the NC sets the R
14
corresponding special M relay to on.
Movement in Y axis M2401 Y axis moves during machining, the NC sets the R
Movement in Z axis M2402 Z axis moves during machining, the NC sets the R
Movement in A axis M2403 A axis moves during machining, the NC sets the R
Movement in B axis M2404 B axis moves during machining, the NC sets the R
Movement in C axis M2405 C axis moves during machining, the NC sets the R
Movement in U axis M2406 U axis moves during machining, the NC sets the R
Movement in V axis M2407 V axis moves during machining, the NC sets the R
Movement in W axis M2408 W axis moves during machining, the NC sets the R
If the operation result is 0 when the MLC executes the
MLC instruction ADD, DADD, FADD, SUB, DSUB, FSUB, FMUL, FDIV,
M2824 R
operation result is 0 FINT, FDOT, FRAD, and FDEG instructions, the NC sets
this special M relay to on.
If the operation result is smaller than -32,768 when the
MLC executes the ADD and SUB instructions, the NC sets
MLC instruction this special M relay to on to indicate a borrow. If the
M2825 R
borrow operation operation result is smaller than -2,147,483,648 when the
MLC executes the DADD and DSUB instructions, the NC
sets this special M relay to on to indicate a borrow.
If the operation result is greater than 32,767 when the
MLC executes the ADD and SUB instructions, the NC sets
MLC instruction carry this special M relay to on to indicate a carry. If the
M2826 R
operation operation result is greater than 2,147,483,647 when the
MLC executes the DADD and DSUB instructions, the NC
sets this special M relay to on to indicate a carry.
If the dividend is 0 when the MLC executes the DIV, DDIV,
and FDIV instructions, the NC sets this special M relay to
on. If the conversion range exceeds K0 - K9,999 when the
MLC instruction
M2828 MLC executes the BCD instruction, the NC sets this R
operation error
special M relay to on. If the conversion range exceeds K0 -
K99,999,999 when the MLC executes the DBCD
instruction, the NC sets this special M relay to on.
DMCNET connection
M2864 DMCNET connection status: successful = 1; failed = 0 R
status - Station 1
DMCNET connection
status - Station 2
DMCNET connection
status - Station 3
DMCNET connection
status - Station 4
14-22
Special Device
M type
DMCNET connection
status - Station 5
14
DMCNET connection
status - Station 6
DMCNET connection
status - Station 7
DMCNET connection
status - Station 8
DMCNET connection
status - Station 9
DMCNET connection
status - Station 10
DMCNET connection
status - Station 11
DMCNET connection
status - Station 12
When this special M relay is set on, the IX00 interrupt
IX00 interrupt input M2880 input function is enabled. R/W
Input point: X0 of the controller mainboard I/O.
When this special M relay is set to on, the IC00 interrupt
IC00 interrupt input M2888 input function is enabled. R/W
Input point: hardware high-speed input counting point 0.
When this special M relay is set to on, the IC01 interrupt
IC01 interrupt input M2889 input function is enabled. R/W
Input point: hardware high-speed input counting point 1.
When this special M relay is set to on, the IR00 interrupt
IR00 interrupt input M2896 input function is enabled. R/W
Input point: X0 of the 0th RIO card.
14-23
Special Device
M type
14
14-24
Special Device
M type
14
Function to use special M to lock SCP. It must be used
with setting parameter Pr10015 [Account permission
Lock user permission M2934 R/W
activation method] as 1 in order to use this special M
function.
Restrict program
M2935 Restricts program editing in the controller. R/W
editing
DCNT counter C64 When this special M relay is set to on, the counter
M2944 R/W
counts down decrements by 1 every time it is triggered.
M2945 R/W
M2946 R/W
M2947 R/W
M2948 R/W
M2949 R/W
M2950 R/W
M2951 R/W
14-25
Special Device
M type
M2952 R/W
14 DCNT counter C73

counts down
DCNT counter C74
counts down
M2953
M2954
When this special M relay is set to on, the counter
decrements by 1 every time it is triggered.
When this special M relay is set to on, the counter
decrements by 1 every time it is triggered.
R/W
R/W
M2955 R/W
M2956 R/W
M2957 R/W
In AUTO mode, the system automatically executes the
File queue auto
M2980 next program in the FILE QUEUE list when this special M R/W
processing
relay is triggered.
G00 teaching When G00 teaching is used, the NC sets this special M
M2992 R
triggered relay to on.
G01 teaching When G01 teaching is used, the NC sets this special M
M2993 R
triggered relay to on.
G00 teaching record When G00 teaching is used and the motion path is
M2994 R
complete recorded, the special M relay is on.
G01 teaching record When G01 teaching is used and the motion path is
M2995 R
complete recorded, the special M relay is on.
14-26
14.3 Special D summary table

Special Device
D type
Number of the
processing complete D1018
It can be set from the Process screen or written by the MLC.
You can use Pr10015 [Machining count display format] to
determine which special D will be the display source. D1019
is tjee high-orfer position of the 32 bits.
Pr10015 [Machining count display format] = 0: uses D1022
R/W
14
pieces (32-bit)
and D1023 as the display source.
Pr10015 [Machining count display format] = 1: uses D1018
(D1019) and D1020 (D1021) as the display source.
Target number of the It can be set from the Process screen or written by MLC.
processing peices (32- D1020 R/W
bit) D1021 is the higher order position of the 32 bits.
Number of the
processing complete D1022 It can be set from the Process screen or written by MLC. R/W
pieces
Target number of the
D1023 It can be set from the Process screen or written by MLC. R/W
processing pieces
HMI output point 1 D1024 Corresponds its status to the system variable, #1833. R/W
Sets the MPG operation mode. Set D1040 to 0 to use the
MPG operation mode external MPG. Set D1040 to 10 to use the keys on the
D1040 R/W
number machine operation panel B as the MPG function, with the
pulse control trigger flags of M1118 and M1119.
MPG operation Specifies the channel for MPG operation; the default value is
D1041 R/W
channel setting 0.
The x1, x10 and x100 setting for MPG pusle magnification.
MPG pulse
D1042 Uses the smallest moving unit 0.001 mm to multiply by the R/W
magnification
magnification; for example 1 x 0.001 = 0.001 mm/cnt.
The axis for moving operation can be switched with the
MPG axis selection
D1043 MPG. Set 0 for X axis, 1 for Y axis, 2 for Z axis, 3 for A axis, R/W
status
and 4 or B axis.
When the system is ready, it converts the binary format to
decimal format to display the number of DMCNET axes that
DMCNET Ready for are connected successfully.
D1048 R
HMI Example: when the number of successfully connected axes
is 4, its binary format display is 1111 and it is converted and
displayed as decimal format, 15.
14-27
Special Device
D type
Sets the percentage of the cutting feedrate (F) in the NC
program.
14
Cutting feed rate Example:
D1056 R/W
adjustment If you set F to 1000 and the current value of D1056 is 50, it
means the actual command speed is 500 mm/min (= 1000 x
50%).
Sets the percentage of G00’s speed (rapid movement).
Example:
Rapid movement
D1058 If the rapid movement speed is 6000, and D1058 is set to R/W
speed adjustment
50, it means the actual speed of G00 is 3000 mm/min (=
6000 x 50%).
Sets the percentage for the S value specified in the NC
program.
Spindle speed
D1060 Example: R/W
adjustment
If S1000 is given in the program and D1060 is set to 30, it
means the actual spindle speed is 300 rpm (= 1000 x 30%).
Speed setting for jog Sets movement speed F for dry run in JOG or AUTO mode.
feeding and dry run D1062 If you set D1062 to 50, it indicates F50 (mm/min) with the R/W
speed range of 0 - 65535 mm/min.
X axis positioning
Specifies the moving distance of the MLC X axis.
command D1064 R/W
Unit: mm, inch. This is a 32-bit special D.
(MLC axis)
Y axis positioning
Specifies the moving distance of the MLC Y axis.
command D1066 R/W
(MLC axis)
Z axis positioning
Specifies the moving distance of the MLC Z axis.
command D1068 R/W
(MLC axis)
A axis positioning
Specifies the moving distance of the MLC A axis.
command D1070 R/W
(MLC axis)
B axis positioning
Specifies the moving distance of the MLC B axis.
command D1072 R/W
(MLC axis)
C axis positioning
Specifies the moving distance of the MLC C axis.
command D1074 R/W
(MLC axis)
U axis positioning
Specifies the moving distance of the MLC U axis.
command D1076 R/W
(MLC axis)
V axis positioning
Specifies the moving distance of the MLC V axis.
command D1078 R/W
(MLC axis)
W axis positioning
Specifies the moving distance of the MLC W axis.
command D1080 R/W
(MLC axis)
X axis positioning
Specifies the moving speed of the MLC X axis.
speed D1082 R/W
Unit: mm, inch/min. This is a 32-bit special D.
(MLC axis)
Y axis positioning
Specifies the moving speed of the MLC Y axis.
speed D1084 R/W
(MLC axis)
Z axis positioning
Specifies the moving speed of the MLC Z axis.
speed D1086 R/W
(MLC axis)
A axis positioning Specifies the moving speed of the MLC A axis.
speed D1088 Unit: refers to Pr634 [Rotation axis unit selection]. This is a R/W
(MLC axis) 32-bit special D.
14-28
Special Device
D type
B axis positioning Specifies the moving speed of the MLC B axis.
14
C axis positioning Specifies the moving speed of the MLC C axis.
U axis positioning Specifies the moving speed of the MLC U axis.
V axis positioning Specifies the moving speed of the MLC V axis.
W axis positioning Specifies the moving speed of the MLC W axis.
Spindle positioning
Specifies the moving speed of the MLC spindle.
speed D1100 R/W
Unit: rpm. This is a 32-bit special D.
(MLC axis)
When Pr12017 [D device record system information] is set
Main file name D1102 as 1, D1102 records the last used O0000 - O9999 main file R
name.
Total machining time D1103 as 1, D1103 records the total machining time in the unit of R
seconds. Unit: seconds. This is a 32-bit special D.
Single machining time D1105 as 1, D1105 records the single machining time in the unit of R
seconds. Unit: seconds. This is a 32-bit special D.
System time: Year, When Pr12017 [D device record system information] is set
D1107 R
month as 1, D1107 records the system time’s year and month.
System time: Day, hour D1108 R
as 1, D1108 records the system time’s day and hour.
System time: Minute, When Pr12017 [D device record system information] is set
D1109 R
second as 1, D1109 records the system time’s minute and second.
Specifies the macro call file name O9xxx.
Macro call file name D1111 Example: R/W
When K9100 is written into D1111, the system calls the
macro program O9100.
When the spindle is DMCNET bus mode, you can use this
Spindle analog voltage special D to output analog voltage.
D1114 R/W
output Port 2 Value input range: -1000 to +1000. Unit: 0.01V.
This special D is only supported on the B series.
When the lathe parameter Pr308 [Tool number display
Lathe tool number
D1115 source] = 1, the lathe tool number selection is controlled by R/W
selection
this special D. Range: 0 to 65535.
When the spindle is DMCNET bus mode, this special D can
Spindle analog voltage
D1125 be used to output analog voltage. R/W
output Port 1
Value input range: -1000 to +1000. Unit: 0.01V.
Equi-slope filter
The X axis filter compensation value following the slope.
compensation for X D1126 R/W
Unit: mm
axis
Equi-slope filter
The Y axis filter compensation value following the slope.
compensation for Y D1128 R/W
Unit: mm
axis
Equi-slope filter
The Z axis filter compensation value following the slope.
compensation for Z D1130 R/W
Unit: mm
axis
14-29
Special Device
D type
Equi-slope filter
The A axis filter compensation value following the slope.
compensation for A D1132 R/W
14
Unit: mm or deg
axis
Equi-slope filter
The B axis filter compensation value following the slope.
compensation for B D1134 R/W
Unit: mm or deg
axis
Equi-slope filter
The C axis filter compensation value following the slope.
compensation for C D1136 R/W
Unit: mm or deg
axis
Equi-slope filter
The U axis filter compensation value following the slope.
compensation for U D1138 R/W
Unit: mm or deg
axis
Equi-slope filter
The V axis filter compensation value following the slope.
compensation for V D1140 R/W
Unit: mm or deg
axis
Equi-slope filter
The W axis filter compensation value following the slope.
compensation for W D1142 R/W
Unit: mm or deg
axis
Linear axis Linear axis compensation speed value following the slope.
D1144 R/W
compensation speed Unit: mm/sec
Rotation axis
D1146 Rotation axis compensation speed value. Unit: deg/sec R/W
compensation speed
Spindle speed
You can write the spindle speed with D1148. (Must be used
(written with special D D1148 R/W
with special M1307).
register)
Adjusts the preview speed of the arc block during machining
Arc preview speed D1150 preview. R/W
This is a 32-bit special D.
Spindle tool number You can write spindle tool number with D1172. (Set Pr308
D1172 R/W
(Written with special D) [Tool number display source] = 1.)
Standby tool number You can write the standby tool number with D1173. (Set
D1173 R/W
(Written with special D) Pr308 [Tool number display source] = 1.)
Command tool number You can write the command tool number with D1174. (Set
D1174 R/W
(Written with special D) Pr308 [Tool number display source] = 1.)
Corresponds to the system variable #1896. You can use

HMI input point 1 D1336 R
#1896 to assign the value of D1336.






14-30
Special Device
D type

14








When the program runs to an S code, it corresponds the S

code value to the D1369 and D1364 registers. If the spindle
Spindle command
D1364 command speed exceeds 16 bits, the MLC refers to D1364 R
speed (32-bit)
for the speed value.
Unit: rpm. This is a 32-bit special D.
When the program runs to an M code, it corresponds the M
code value to the D1368 register. When the M code macro
M code data D1368 call is executed, the value of this special D register remains R
unchanged. These M codes do not include M00, M01, M02,
M30, M98 and M99.
When the program runs to an S code, it corresponds the S
code value to the D1369 register. When the S code macro
S code data D1369 R
call is executed, the value of this special D register remains
unchanged.
When the program runs to a T code, it corresponds the T
code value to the D1370 register. When the T code macro
call is executed, the value of this special D register remains
T code data
D1370 unchanged. This data is related to the setting of tool R
(command)
magazine station numbers. The assigned T code value in
the program must be within the range of the tool magazine
parameter (Pr338), so this T code data can be displayed.
T code data (standby)
D1371 Records the latest T code data read in the tool magazine 1. R
in tool magazine 1
The incremental station number (the position difference of
T code data forward rotation and reverse rotation) of the tool mazagine 1
(incremental station is displayed with this special D register. When the tool
D1372 R
number) in tool magazine forward or reverse rotation special M (M1168 /
magazine 1 M1169) is triggered, the remaining tool position difference of
tool magazine 1 corresponds to D1372 register immediately.
Tool set (standby) in The standby tool set number in tool magazine 1. This tool
D1373 R
tool magazine 1 set number corresponds to D1373.
14-31
Special Device
D type
Spindle tool number (in
D1374 Current spindle tool number in the tool magazine 1. R
use) in tool magazine 1
14 T code data (standby)

in tool magazine 2
T code data
(incremental station
D1375 Records the latest T code value read in the tool magazine 2.
The incremental station number (the position difference of

forward rotation and reverse rotation) of the tool mazagine 2
is displayed with this special D register. When the tool
R
D1376 R
number) in tool magazine forward or reverse rotation special M (M1172 /
magazine 2 M1173) is triggered, the remaining tool position difference of
tool magazine 2 corresponds to D1376 register immediately.
Tool set (standby) in The standby tool set number in tool magazine 2. This tool
D1377 R
tool magazine 2 set number corresponds to D1377.
Spindle tool number (in
D1378 Current spindle tool number in the tool magazine 2. R
use) in tool magazine 2
Feed rate D1379 Reads the cutting feed rate. R
Read spindle speed. This is a 32-bit special D.
You can use Pr399 [spindle speed D1380 display mode] to
change the source of the display value.
Spindle actual speed
D1380 Pr399 [Spindle speed D1380 display mode] = 0: source is R
(32-bit)
the program S code command.
Pr399 [Spindle speed D1380 display mode] = 1: source is
the spindle’s real-time command speed.
Current G code in use Displays the current G code in use when G01, G02, or G03
D1383 R
(G01, G02, G03) is used. (G01 = 1, G02 = 2, G03 = 3)
X axis machine
D1384 X axis machine coordinate. This is a 32-bit special D. R
coordinate
Y axis machine
D1386 Y axis machine coordinate. This is a 32-bit special D. R
coordinate
Z axis machine
D1388 Z axis machine coordinate. This is a 32-bit special D. R
coordinate
A axis machine
D1390 A axis machine coordinate. This is a 32-bit special D. R
coordinate
B axis machine
D1392 B axis machine coordinate. This is a 32-bit special D. R
coordinate
C axis machine
D1394 C axis machine coordinate. This is a 32-bit special D. R
coordinate
U axis machine
D1396 U axis machine coordinate. This is a 32-bit special D. R
coordinate
V axis machine
D1398 V axis machine coordinate. This is a 32-bit special D. R
coordinate
W axis machine
D1400 W axis machine coordinate. This is a 32-bit special D. R
coordinate
X axis absolute
D1402 X axis absolute coordinate. This is a 32-bit special D. R
coordinate
Y axis absolute
D1404 Y axis absolute coordinate. This is a 32-bit special D. R
coordinate
Z axis absolute
D1406 Z axis absolute coordinate. This is a 32-bit special D. R
coordinate
A axis absolute
D1408 A axis absolute coordinate. This is a 32-bit special D. R
coordinate
B axis absolute
D1410 B axis absolute coordinate. This is a 32-bit special D. R
coordinate
C axis absolute
D1012 C axis absolute coordinate. This is a 32-bit special D. R
coordinate
14-32
Special Device
D type
U axis absolute
D1414 U axis absolute coordinate. This is a 32-bit special D. R
coordinate
14
V axis absolute
D1416 V axis absolute coordinate. This is a 32-bit special D. R
coordinate
W axis absolute
D1418 W axis absolute coordinate. This is a 32-bit special D. R
coordinate
X axis DMCNET current monitoring; the data is displayed
X axis DMCNET with one Word (integer).
D1420 R
current monitoring
(Current value not updated under HOME mode.)
Y axis DMCNET current monitoring; the data is displayed
Y axis DMCNET with one Word (integer).
D1421 R
current monitoring
Z axis DMCNET current monitoring; the data is displayed
Z axis DMCNET with one Word (integer).
D1422 R
current monitoring
A axis DMCNET current monitoring; the data is displayed
A axis DMCNET with one Word (integer).
D1423 R
current monitoring
B axis DMCNET current monitoring; the data is displayed
B axis DMCNET with one Word (integer).
D1424 R
current monitoring
C axis DMCNET current monitoring; the data is displayed
C axis DMCNET with one Word (integer).
D1425 R
current monitoring
U axis DMCNET current monitoring; the data is displayed
U axis DMCNET with one Word (integer).
D1426 R
current monitoring
V axis DMCNET current monitoring; the data is displayed
V axis DMCNET with one Word (integer).
D1427 R
current monitoring
W axis DMCNET current monitoring; the data is displayed
W axis DMCNET with one Word (integer).
D1428 R
current monitoring
S1 axis DMCNET current monitoring; the data is displayed
S1 axis DMCNET with one Word (integer).
D1429 R
current monitoring
(Current value not updated under spindle positioning.)
S2 axis DMCNET current monitoring; the data is displayed
S2 axis DMCNET with one Word (integer).
D1430 R
current monitoring
(The data is not updated in spindle positioning mode)
Displays the current workpiece coordinates.
Workpiece coordinates D1450 Format: GXXPXX. R
For example, G55 = 5500 and G54P01 = 5401.
The function of these special D registers (D1464 - D1495)
differ based on the system RIO settings.
When you set ADC for the system RIO, the four IN ports
(ADC Station 4 - 7) correspond to D1464 - D1467, D1472 -
D1475, D1480 - D1483 and D1488 - D1491.
D1464 -
ADC, TAD, DAC usage When you set TAD for the system RIO, the four IN ports R/W
D1495
(TAD Station 4 - 7) correspond to D1464 - D1471, D1472 -
D1479, D1480 - D1487 and D1488 - 1491.
When you set DAC for the system RIO, the four IN ports
(DAC Station 4 – 7) correspond to D1464 - D1467, D1472 -
D1475, D1480 - D1483 and D1488 - D1491.
User-defined hardware Customize the positive and negative limit and home signals
D1500 W
signals of the system through the Bit method.
14-33
Special Device
D type
User-defined hardware Customize the positive and negative limit and home signals
D1501 W
signals of the system through the Bit method.
14 User-defined hardware
signals
User-defined hardware
signals
D1502
D1503
Customize the positive and negative limit and home signals
of the system through the Bit method.
Customize the positive and negative limit and home signals
of the system through the Bit method.
W
X axis residual
D1506 X axis residual coordinate. This is a 32-bit special D. R
coordinates
Y axis residual
D1508 Y axis residual coordinate. This is a 32-bit special D. R
coordinates
Z axis residual
D1510 Z axis residual coordinate. This is a 32-bit special D. R
coordinates
A axis residual
D1512 A axis residual coordinate. This is a 32-bit special D. R
coordinates
B axis residual
D1514 B axis residual coordinate. This is a 32-bit special D. R
coordinates
C axis residual
D1516 C axis residual coordinate. This is a 32-bit special D. R
coordinates
U axis residual
D1518 U axis residual coordinate. This is a 32-bit special D. R
coordinates
V axis residual
D1520 V axis residual coordinate. This is a 32-bit special D. R
coordinates
W axis residual
D1522 W axis residual coordinate. This is a 32-bit special D. R
coordinates
Servo tool magazine 1 The command tool number of the first set of servo tool
D1524 R/W
command tool number magazine.
Servo tool magazine 1 The command character of the first set of servo tool
D1525 R/W
command character magazine.
Servo tool magazine 1
D1526 The tool number of the first set of servo tool magazine. R/W
feedback tool number
D1527 The current status of the first set of servo tool magazine. R/W
feedback status
Servo tool magazine 2 The command tool number of the second set of servo tool
D1528 R/W
Servo tool magazine 2 The command character of the second set of servo tool
D1529 R/W
D1530 The tool number of the second set of servo tool magazine. R/W
D1531 The current status of the second set of servo tool magazine. R/W
feedback status
Servo tool magazine 3 The command tool number of the third set of servo tool
D1532 R/W
Servo tool magazine 3 The command character of the third set of servo tool
D1533 R/W
D1534 The tool number of the third set of servo tool magazine. R/W
D1535 The current status of the third set of servo tool magazine. R/W
feedback status
14-34
Troubleshooting
This chapter provides the information about the alarms and troubleshooting methods
for the NC system. Search this chapter for the methods of handling the NC system
related malfunctions.
Bas
15.1 Alarm Description ··································································· 15-2

15.2 MLC errors (1200 - 13FF) ························································· 15-3
15.3 Servo errors (1E00) ································································ 15-5
15.4 Remote I/O error (1F00) ··························································· 15-5
15.5 HMI related alarms (3010 - 3FFF) ·············································· 15-6
15.6 NC system errors (4200 - 4FFF) ················································ 15-8
15.7 NC channel errors (B000 - EFFF) ··············································15-10
15.7.1 Machining related alarms (B000 - B0FF)································15-10
15.7.2 Tool compensation related alarms (B100 - B1FF) ····················15-12
15.7.3 Milling machine related alarms (B300 - B3FF) ·························15-13
15.7.4 Command related alarms (B600 - B6FF; B64x not included) ······15-14
15.7.5 Temperature compensation related alarms (B640 - B64F) ·········15-16
15.7.6 Lathe cycle command alarms (B6A1 - B6A5) ··························15-16
15-1
Troubleshooting Milling Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual
15.1 Alarm Description

The CNC alarms can be divided into three categories, which are system alarms, user-defined
15
alarms, and user-defined macro alarms. This chapter mainly explains the system related alarms
while the rest are user-defined.
Alarm category Alarm code Alarm Description
The system alarms caused by system error or operation error.
Some system alarms include information (such as servo alarm
System alarms ____
or PPI alarm); the information included has different meanings
according to the different alarms.
The user-defined alarms which you use with the MLC program.
User-defined alarms A_ When the A_ device is triggered, the alarm corresponding to
the A_ device also occurs.
The user-defined macro alarm works with variable #6000. You

User-defined macro
M_ can have the alarm triggered and have the corresponding
alarms
macro alarm displayed on the controller.
The system alarms are divided into MLC related alarms and NC related alarms by
function.
System alarm Alarm code range Abnormal action Description
category
1200 - 12FF MLC system error -
1300 - 13FF Ethernet errors -
This alarm displays the
MLC related information about the servo
1E00 Servo error
alarms station number in error and error
code.
This alarm displays the
1F00 Remote I/O error information about the remote I/O
station number in error.
HMI related
3010 - 3FFF HMI error -
alarms
This type of alarm is displayed
with the pop-up message, which
4200 - 42FF NC system error is not included in the Alarm
window and alarm history
(History).
4300 - 43FF NC system error -
According to the high-byte of the
alarm code, you can identify
which channel is in error:
NC related alarms BXXX: CH0
CXXX: CH1 (reserved)
DXXX: CH2 (reserved)
B000 - EFFF NC channel errors EXXX: CH3 (reserved)
These types of errors are also
displayed differently according to
functions. Some alarms carry
data and others don't. Thus, you
can use the alarm code to check
whether the alarm carries data or
not.
15-2
Milling Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Troubleshooting
15.2 MLC errors (1200 - 13FF)

Alarm code Name Cause and corrective action
15
1. An error occurs when the MLC accesses the NC
1200 NC memory access error memory.
2. Restart the CNC controller or send it back for servicing.
1. The startup of the NC system is not complete.
1201 NC not ready
1. NC memory buffer error or not ready.
1202 Buffer memory error
1. NC output port does not exist.
1203 Output port does not exist
2. Check the axis parameter setting.
1. Failed to clear the MLC codes.
1204 MLC code clear error
2. Send the CNC controller back for servicing.
1. Failed to write the MLC codes to the flash memory.
1205 MLC flash memory error
1. SRAM write-in error.
1206 SRAM error
1. An error occurs when the system accesses the host
1207 Host I/O channel error I/O.
1. An error occurs when the system accesses the remote
1208 Remote I/O channel error I/O.
1. NC parameters are not set or initialized.
120A NC parameter error
2. Re-initialize the parameters.
1. Compensation parameter write-in error
120B Compensation PAR error
2. Reload the compensation parameters.
1. An error occurs when the system clears the
120C Compen. PAR clear error compensation parameter in memory.
1. An error occurs when the system writes the
120D Compen. PAR write-in error compensation parameters to memory.
1. Parameter initialization error.
120E PAR initialization error
2. Re-initialize the parameters.
1. Memory clear error.
120F Memory clear error
1. Memory write-in error or memory initialization error.
1210 Memory write-in error
1. Parameter setting error.
1211 Servo axis does not exist
2. Check the parameter settings.
1. Parameter setting error.
1212 Servo axis PAR type error
1. DMCNET initialization error.
1213 DMCNET initialization error
2. Make sure the DMCNET cable is securely connected.
1. Non-volatile memory error.
1214 Non-volatile memory error
1. MLC and NC bottom layer communication error.
1215 Internal comm. error 2. Use the correct firmware version.
3. Set the correct channel parameters.
15-3

1. The following conditions occur when the MLC is in
execution:
 The divisor of the division command is 0.
15
 The jump target position of the CJ/CALL command
is invalid.
1216 MLC PRG error  The number of digits displayed in the BCD
command is invalid.
 The table number of the VRT command is invalid.
 MLC code error.
2. Check and correct the MLC program.
3. Reload the MLC program.
1. Current number of MLC parameters in the internal
memory do not match the number of parameters
1217 MLC PAR does not match planned in the firmware.
2. Update the firmware.
15-4
15.3 Servo errors (1E00)

15
[1530]: alarm signal (DI) on the pulse card is triggered.
Check the error cause of the connected drive.
[1531]: this alarm occurs when the pulse card generates
more than 24,000 pulses within 1 ms.
Check the controller's encoder resolution setting and make
sure the motor speed is within the range.
[1532]: pulse leakage. When the motor is stopped, the pulse
card compares the command pulse number with the
feedback pulse number. If the pulse number difference is
1E00 Servo error greater than 1% of the encoder resolution, this alarm occurs.
1. Check if the signal traces are shielded.
2. Check if the equipment is properly grounded.
[1560]: station number repetition error.
1. Check the channel parameter station number setting.
2. Check the pulse card station number switch knob
setting.
3. Check the drive station number P3-00 setting.
Refer to the relevant servo drive user manuals for the
definition and troubleshooting of other related errors.
15.4 Remote I/O error (1F00)

1. Remote I/O error.
1F00 Remote I/O error 2. Check the remote I/O connection or replace the remote
I/O board.
15-5
15.5 HMI related alarms (3010 - 3FFF)

15
1. An error occurs when the system establishes the HMI
HMI communication interface communication interface.
3010
establishing error
1. An error occurs when the system creates the HMI
HMI communication memory communication memory area.
3011
area creating error
1. An error occurs when the system creates the HMI
HMI interface command area interface command area.
3012
error
HMI interface memory area 1. HMI interface memory area error.
3013
error 2. Restart the CNC controller or send it back for servicing.
HMI interface communication 1. HMI interface communication port error.
3014
port error 2. Restart the CNC controller or send it back for servicing.
MLC interface memory area 1. MLC interface memory area error.
3015
error 2. Restart the CNC controller or send it back for servicing.
1. HMI file transmission error.
3016 HMI file transmission error
1. HMI data transmission error.
3017 HMI data transmission error
1. Incorrect FTP setting.
3018 FTP PAR setting error
2. Reconfirm FTP related settings.
1. Invalid file name.
3100 Invalid file name
2. Modify the file name.
1. The macro call exceeded 8 layers.
3101 Exceeded subroutine call LVL
2. Check the macro program.
1. Non-G code character error.
3102 Non-G code character error
2. Check the G code and modify the program.
1. System internal memory area is in error.
3103 Memory error 2. Use the recovery function of the CNC controller or send
the controller back for servicing.
1. System internal parameter memory area is in error.
3200 Internal PAR CRC error 2. Use the recovery function of the CNC controller or send
1. System MLC program memory area is in error.
3201 MLC PRG error 2. Reload the MLC program or send the CNC controller
back for servicing.
1. No CF card is inserted or the inserted CF card is invalid.
3202 CF card read failed 2. Make sure the CF card is correctly installed or replace
the CF card.
Confirm that the CF card is inserted correctly and has
3203 PAR backup failed
sufficient space.
Confirm that the CF card is inserted correctly and has
3204 MLC backup failed
sufficient space.
1. The usage duration has expired.
3205 Machine is locked 2. Contact the equipment manufacturer to unlock or
extend the machine usage duration.
1. There are system parameters with set values exceeding
3206 PAR value exceeds the range the allowable range.
2. Check and modify the parameter values.
1. Failed to load the external device driver with the
software panel.
3207 COM port DLL load error
2. Update the software panel to reload the external device
driver.
15-6

1. System usage duration expiring reminder.
3208 Machine to be locked soon 2. Contact the equipment manufacturer to unlock or
extend the machine usage duration.
3209
320A
Sys updated, please restart
the controller.
battery power
1.
2.
CNC controller has insufficient 1.
2.
The system update is complete and requires restarting.
Restart the CNC controller.
The CNC controller system battery is low.
Replace the battery of the CNC controller.
15
1. The connection between the software panel and the
external device is disconnected.
3210 COM port disconnection
2. Check the connection settings between the controller
and the external device.
1. Failed to open the external device driver with the
software panel.
3211 COM port DLL open error
2. Update the software panel to reload the external device
driver.
1. An error occurs when the external device driver is
loaded with the software panel.
3212 Failed to create COM port
2. Update the software panel and make sure the setting of
the external link file is correct.
1. Failed to load the TCPIP driver with the software panel.
3213 Load TCPIP DLL Err 2. Update the software panel to reload the external device
driver.
1. Network connection is in error.
3214 TCPIP comm. disconnection
2. Check the network connection or connection status.
1. Failed to initialize the network communication.
3215 Network comm. init. failed
2. Check the network connection or connection status.
1. No response from the bottom layer after resetting.
3216 System reset error 2. Update the CNC controller firmware or send the
controller back for servicing.
1. Failed to remotely enable the backup import.
3217 Failed to import full backup 2. Check the operating mode. Make sure the backup
storage device is correctly installed.
1. Failed to remotely enable the backup export.
3218 Failed to export full backup 2. Check the operating mode. Make sure the backup
storage device is correctly installed.
1. Failed to remotely enable the firmware update function.
Auto update is set, please 2. Cycle the power to start the automatic firmware update
3219
reboot function. You must put the firmware file in the [pkt] folder
in the root directory of the USB disk.
1. Failed to update the remote system firmware.
2. After checking the following conditions, reset the
automatic firmware update function:
Sys. update failed, please  Firmware update model error.
3220
reboot
 File format does not match.
 Firmware update version is not supported.
 Controller emergency stop is not pressed.
15-7
15.6 NC system errors (4200 - 4FFF)
15
1. Homing has not been executed for each axis before
4200 Execute homing automatic operation.
2. Execute homing for each axis.
1. The origin coordinates for the absolute type motor are
4201 Absolute origin setting not established.
2. Go to [DGN] to execute ABS RST.
1. An error occurs when the MLC accesses the memory.
4300 MLC is not ready 2. Restart the CNC controller, update firmware, or send
1. The MLC is not ready.
4301 MLC is not ready 2. Restart the CNC controller, update firmware, or send
I/O module program clearing 1. Failed to clear the I/O module program.
4302
failed 2. Send the CNC controller back for servicing.
I/O module program write-in 1. Failed to write the I/O module program.
4303
failed 2. Send the CNC controller back for servicing.
1. Failed to clear the NC system program.
NC system program clearing
4304 2. Restart the CNC controller, update firmware, or send
failed
1. Failed to install the NC system program.
NC system program
4305 2. Restart the CNC controller, update firmware, or send
installation failed
1. Failed to clear the macro program.
4306 Macro clearing failed 2. Restart the CNC controller and execute the macro
internal memory function.
1. Failed to install the macro program.
4307 Macro installation failed 2. Restart the CNC controller and execute the macro
internal memory function.
1. An error occurs when loading the G code.
4308 G code loading error
2. Check the machining program.
1. Motion defined but not called.
4309 Illegal program location 2. Update the CNC controller firmware and restart the
controller.
Exceeded maximum read
430A 2. Update the CNC controller firmware and restart the
memory area
controller.
Exceeded maximum write
430B 2. Update the CNC controller firmware and restart the
memory area
controller.
1. The I/O module program is not initialized.
4310 I/O module PRG not initialized
1. The I/O module memory is corrupted.
4311 I/O module memory corrupted
1. The I/O module memory is corrupted.
4312 I/O module memory corrupted
1. The I/O module status is in error.
4313 I/O module status error 2. Check if the I/O board is firmly installed and the wiring
is securely connected.
1. Program configuration of the I/O module is in error.
I/O module PRG configuration
4314 2. Check if the I/O board is firmly installed and the wiring
error
is securely connected.
15-8

I/O board hardware interface 1. The I/O board hardware interface is in error.
4315
error 2. Send the CNC controller back for servicing.
15
1. An error occurs when the system reads the I/O board
I/O board hardware interface hardware interface.
4316
error
1. The NC system command is in error.
4317 NC system command error
2. Check the machining program or the macro content.
1. The NC parameter does not exist or the MLC is not
ready.
4318 NC parameter error
2. Restart the CNC controller, update firmware, or send
1. The NC parameter does not exist or the MLC is not
ready.
4319 NC parameter error
2. Restart the CNC controller, update firmware, or send
1. The tool magazine axis number is not defined or
431A Tool magazine axis error defined repeatedly.
1. The NC parameter is in error.
431B NC parameter error 2. Make sure no parameter values are set to 0, such as
the encoder pulse number, the gear numbers of the
output shaft and motor.
1. Spindle voltage output does not match the motor
rotation direction.
2. Check whether the spindle encoder OA/OB wiring is
431C Spindle polarity error correct.
3. By setting Pr51 [1st Spindle OA/OB signal order], you
can adjust the OA/OB phase sequence of the spindle
encoder feedback.
1. This alarm occurs when the Servo On / Off action is
executed in AUTO mode and the position overflow
occurs on the specified axis, so the system does not
4FFC Servo overflow protection execute this Servo On / Off action.
2. Check the servo parameters for preventing position
overflow.
1. When the motion command is issued, the position
feedback did not change.
2. Confirm servo settings; for example, the torque limit
4FFD Position feedback protection value is too small.
3. Check if the servo feedback signal wiring functions
normally.
4. Check if the motor rotates normally.
1. There is an overspeed motion command.
4FFE Overspeed protection 2. Make sure the parameter settings are not set too high,
such as the output gear ratio and cutting speed setting.
15-9
15.7 NC channel errors (B000 - EFFF)

15.7.1 Machining related alarms (B000 - B0FF)
15 Alarm code
B000
Name
Illegal G code line number

1.
2.
Cause and corrective action
The G code line number is illegal.
Check the machining program.
1. The G code length is illegal.
B001 Illegal G code length
1. The G code file is not found.
B002 G code file not found
2. Check the file contents.
1. The name of the loaded file is invalid.
B003 Invalid file name loaded
2. Reload the program file.
1. An error occurs when the system computes the
Workpiece coordinates workpiece coordinates.
B004
computing error
2. Reset the workpiece coordinates.
B005
computing error
B006
computing error
1. There is a conflict in the servo port settings.
B007 Servo port setting conflict
1. An error occurs when the system internal program is
B008 Memory overlap operating.
2. Reload the machining program or update the firmware.
1. The G code buffer is in error.
B009 G code buffer error
B025 G code format error Check the N label of the machining program again.
1. An error occurs to the computing interpolator command
B00A Interpolator cmd index Err index in the system.
1. An error occurs when the system accesses the buffer of
B00B INTRPL cmd BUF access Err the computing interpolator command.
1. The feed rate is undefined.
B00C Undefined feed rate
2. Check the machining program and define the feed rate.
1. Arc radius calculation is in error.
B00D Arc radius error 2. Check the arc machining program or increase the
tolerance for arc radius error.
1. The specified tool number is in error during tool change
or T code execution.
B00E Tool No. selection Err
2. Check the changed tool number and if the T code
setting is within the tool setting range.
1. The number of the connection axes does not match the
Servo connection axes and parameter setting.
B00F parameter setting
mismatch 2. Check the set channel port number and the connecting
servo station number setting.
1. Breakpoint search is assigned to M99.
B010 Breakpoint No. not found
2. Reset the breakpoint search line number.
15-10

1. This alarm occurs when the synchronous function is
enabled and you use the G code to specify the slave
axis moving amount.
15
B015 Sync cmd error
After the synchronous function is enabled, do not
specify the slave axis moving amount in the G code.
1. The tool compensation number in the G code exceeds
the number range.
B017 Tool assignment error
2. Adjust the tool compensation number setting in the G
code.
1. An error occurs when the system checks for the
command transfer in MDI mode.
B018 Cmd transfer not allowed
2. Command transfer can only be done before the
machining program is executed.
1. The axis does not receive G code motion commands
B019 Servo command error when the servo is off.
2. Check if the command axis is in the Servo Off state.
1. The processing amount of the interface data exceeds
the preset value, such as tool changing, magazine
B01A Data amount error setting, variable writing (#), and G10 data setting.
2. Check if the G codes and MLC processing actions are
operating normally.
1. The spindle is not rotating during machining.
B01B Spindle not running
2. Make sure the spindle rotation command is issued.
1. The spindle command exceeds the spindle maximum
speed.
B01C Spindle cmd speed error
2. Redefine the spindle speed.
3. Adjust Pr409 for the spindle maximum speed setting.
1. The stop function is triggered when the path enters the
restricted area.
B01D Stroke limit error 2. AUTO mode: correct the G code execution path.
3. MDI mode: move to the opposite direction of the
restricted area to clear the error.
1. An emergency stop occurs.
B020 Emergency stop 2. Check if the EMG button is pressed.
3. Check the emergency stop status.
1. The chamfer / rounding command cannot be
calculated.
B021 Chamfer / rounding Err
2. Check and adjust the chamfer / rounding command in
the G code.
Illegal G code in command Use of the G28 command is not permitted in the transfer
B023
transferring function.
15-11
15.7.2 Tool compensation related alarms (B100 - B1FF)
15
1. Tool compensation is interfered or the calculation for
the tool compensation coordinates is in error.
B100 Tool compen. interference
2. Check and modify the programmed machining path or
the tool radius for compensation.
1. This alarm occurs when you cancel the tool radius
compensation when the block containing arc
B101 Cancel radius compen. in arc interpolation is executed.
2. Modify the machining program to disable the tool radius
compensation during linear interpolation.
1. This alarm occurs when you enable tool radius
compensation when the block containing arc
B102 Enable radius compen. in arc interpolation is executed.
2. Modify the machining program to disable the tool radius
compensation during linear interpolation.
1. The tool path is interfered after tool radius
compensation.
B103 Radius interference
2. Check and modify the machining program or the tool
radius for compensation.
1. The tool compensation path is too short.
Tool compen. amount too
B104 2. Check and modify the machining program or the tool
small
radius for compensation.
Left and right tool radius 1. An error occurs when the system switches the tool
B105 compensation (G41/G42) radius compensation to the right or left direction.
switch error 2. Check and modify the machining program path.
1. This alarm occurs when the system executes G31
B106 Use G31 in tool compen. during tool radius compensation.
2. Check and modify the machining program.
1. NURBS interpolation is in error.
2. Check if the G code in the NURBS function complies
B108 NURBS interpolation error with the command format.
3. Check if the NURBS first control point is the same as
the coordinate in the previous block.
1. There is insufficient arc interpolation points.
B109 Insufficient space arc block
2. Check and modify the machining program.
Illegal polygon interpolation G An error occurs when you repeatedly assign the G51.2
B10D
code polygon cutting command.
15-12
15.7.3 Milling machine related alarms (B300 - B3FF)
15
1. The calculation result of the variable lead thread is less
B301 Threading pitch error than 0.
2. Check the G code command and modify the program.
1. The turning feed rate for thread cutting is too fast.
B302 Spindle speed too fast
2. Reduce the spindle speed.
1. You switch the system from Spindle mode to C axis
B303 Spindle/C axis switching Err mode while the C axis mode is disabled.
2. Set Pr308 to 0 for the C axis mode.
1. Thread cutting operation is prohibited in C axis mode.
Thread cutting prohibited in C
B304 2. Switch the system from C axis mode to spindle mode to
axis mode
execute the thread cutting operation.
1. In C axis mode, both SP1 and SP2 are set to voltage
mode.
B305 C axis/spindle mode error
2. Adjust the spindle control mode settings of SP1 and
SP2.
1. In Spindle mode, the breakpoint search is in progress,
Spindle mode breakpoint but there is an M code for switching the system from
B306 Spindle mode to C axis mode.
search error
1. In C axis mode, the breakpoint search is in progress,
C axis mode breakpoint but there is an M code for switching the system from C
B307 axis mode to Spindle mode.
search error
1. An error occurs when the system executes the polar
coordinate interpolation command.
2. Check if the polar coordinate interpolation G code
complies with the command format.
3. Check if the polar coordinate interpolation includes
unsupported G code commands.
Polar coordinate interpolation 4. Check if the plane selection is switched when the
B308 system is executing the polar coordinate command.
error
5. Check if there is a specified tool number in the polar
coordinate interpolation.
6. Check whether the polar coordinate interpolation is in
the following conditions:
1. The system is in fixed spindle speed mode.
2. The tool nose compensation is canceled.
3. The system is in C axis mode.
15-13
15.7.4 Command related alarms (B600 - B6FF; B64x not included)
15
1. G code error.
B600 G code error
1. The subroutine called excessive program layers.
Excessive layers in
B601 2. The subroutine cannot call program layers exceeding 8
subroutine call
levels.
1. No correct G code symbol.
B602 No G code symbol
1. The variable symbol is in error.
B603 Variable symbol error
1. The G code symbol is illegal.
B604 Illegal G code symbol
1. There is no G code symbol.
B605 No G code symbol
1. The subroutine call is in error.
B606 Subroutine call error
2. Modify the program.
1. The subroutine file name is in error.
B607 Subroutine file name error
1. The subroutine layer number is in error.
B608 Subroutine layer No. error
1. G code is executed without homing.
B609 Cycle EXEC, no homing
2. Execute homing for each axis first.
1. The syntax for the dwell time command is in error.
B60A Dwell time cmd syntax error
B60B WP coord offset error workpiece coordinate offset.
1. The arc magnification ratio is in error.
B60C Arc magnification ratio error
1. An error occurs when the system performs homing
B60D Homing midpoint Err through the intermediate point.
1. Do not execute G28 / G29 / G30 during cyclic
B60E Homing Err in Cyc machining machining.
1. The specified range for the extended workpiece
B60F G54 extension code err coordinates is in error.
2. Check the G code specified range.
1. The macro variable type is in error.
B610 Macro variable type error
2. Check the macro and modify the program.
1. The macro command is not found.
B611 Macro not found
1. The specified N is not found when the system executes
B612 Macro line No. error the GO TO command.
1. The setting for the macro bit is in error.
B613 Macro bit setting error
1. This error occurs when the macro performs division
B614 Macro divide by zero error operation and the divisor is zero.
1. The macro command is too long.
B615 Macro command too long
15-14

1. The macro command operand does not exist.
B616 Macro Cmd operand not exist
15
1. The macro command is in error.
B617 Macro command error
1. The macro syntax usage is illegal.
B618 Macro Cmd syntax error
The macro operand syntax is 1. The macro operand syntax is in error.
B619
in error 2. Check the macro and modify the program.
1. The macro command is illegal.
B61A Illegal macro command
1. No corresponding tag is found in the G code.
B61B GOTO tag is not found
2. Check the G code and specify the correct tag.
1. No corresponding line number is found in the G code.
B61C No line No. given by GOTO
2. Check the G code and specify the correct line number.
1. User-defined macro alarm is triggered.
B620 User-defined macro alarm
2. #6000 in the G code must not be specified as 0.
1. The halt code is invalid.
B621 Invalid halt code 2. Check the G code and the halt code (M code) must be
used individually.
1. The feed rate is set as a negative value.
B623 feed rate is negative
2. Check the G code and adjust the feed rate.
 Milling & Lathe: synchronous interpolation for linear
axis and rotary axis is not supported.
B625 Interpolation axis error  Milling machine:
1. NC200 does not support tapping.
2. Use NC300 or above models.
1. The following error is too large.
B630 Excessive following error 2. Make sure the servo parameter setting is correct.
3. Check if the system parameter 643 is set too small.
1. The hardware limit is triggered.
B631 Hardware limit error 2. Move the axis into the legal restricted range.
3. Check the hardware limit wiring and polarity settings.
1. The axis position exceeds the first software limit.
B632 1st software limit error
2. Move the axis into the legal restricted range.
1. The axis position exceeds the second software limit.
B634 2nd software limit error
2. Move the axis into the legal restricted range.
1. The home sensor is in error.
B636 Home sensor error
2. Check if the home sensor is installed correctly.
1. When the system switches between the MLC and NC
B637 MLC axis not stopped axis modes, the MLC axis is still in motion.
2. Modify the MLC program.
1. The position error between the master axis and
synchronous axis is too great.
Excessive synchronous
B645 2. Check whether the following error between the slave
following error
axis and master axis exceeded the Pr642 parameter
value.
1. The G10 parameter definition is illegal.
B650 Illegal G10 PAR definition
2. Check if the G code is used correctly.
1. The G10 parameter range is set incorrectly.
B651 G10 PAR range error
2. Check if the G code parameter range is correct.
1. There is no spindle speed in the cycle command.
B652 No spindle speed for cycle
2. Check the G code and specify the spindle speed.
1. There is no feed rate in the cycle command.
B653 No feed rate for cycle
2. Check the G code and specify the feed rate.
15-15

1. The usage of the cycle command is illegal.
B654 Illegal cycle command
2. Check the G code and modify the cycle command.
15
1. Illegal M code command.
Special function when
2. Check whether specific G code was enabled before
B655 executed to M96
and after executing M96.
Not off
Note: Including G16, G24, G41, G42 and G51.
1. Call subroutine Special M was triggered while executing
Gave the M96 command G code.
B656 under interrupt subroutine
Command 2. Check whether the subroutine includes the M96
command.
15.7.5 Temperature compensation related alarms (B640 - B64F)

1. The temperature exceeds the sensing range.
B640 Overheat
2. Check the sensor's output specification.
1. The temperature sensor is disconnected.
Temperature sensor
B642 2. Check if the wiring for the temperature sensor functions
disconnected
normally.
1. The temperature sensor is in error.
B643 Temperature detection error
2. Check if the temperature sensor is installed correctly.
1. The difference between the 1st spindle (2nd spindle)
command rotation speed and feedback rotation speed
is greater than the parameter Pr406 (Pr446), and
Spindle rotation speed error continually exceeds the spindle rotation speed error
B646 check time set by parameter Pr436 (Pr476).
too large
2. When the parameter (Pr436 and Pr476) is set as 0, the
spindle rotation speed reached check will not be
performed.
15.7.6 Lathe cycle command alarms (B6A1 - B6A5)

1. No specified line number is found in the cycle
No specified line No. in G70 - command.
B6A1
G73 2. Check the G code and modify to the correct line
number.
No line No. given by G70 - 1. The cycle command did not specify the line number.
B6A2
G73 2. Check the G code and add the correct line number.
1. The taper calculation of the thread cutting cycle
B6A3 Cycle command taper error command is in error.
2. Modify the G code and check related parameters.
1. The chamfer geometry dimension is incorrect.
B6A4 Chamfer command error
2. Modify the G code and check related parameters.
1. Drilling / tapping cannot be executed.
B6A5 Illegal drilling / tapping
2. Check the G code and the C axis status.
15-16
Revision History
Release Date Version Chapter Revision contents
June, 2021 V5.0 1.4 Added description for B series product models.
Added description for B series product
2.2
installation.
1. Added Remote I/O relay allowable current
3.1.11 value.
2. Added Remote I/O wiring diagram.
3.2 Added description for B series product wiring.
Updated table of corresponding buttons for
4.4
OPENCNC PC.
12.4 Added second spindle parameter descriptions.
Added rotation axis unit parameter
12.5.1
descriptions.
Updated parameter Pr616 return to Home
12.6.1
mode.
1. Added parameter Pr10015 disable the
function of automatically diving values with
12.9.1 no decimal points by a thousand.
2. Added description for parameter Pr10076
file queue settings.
1. Added description for parameter PR12029
system/custom keyboard switching.
12.10.1 2. Added description for parameter Pr12030
parameter customize keyboard button
value.
June, 2018 V4.0 Added NC3__ series MPG DI7/DI8 defined as
3.2.1
X34/X35.
Hardware modification after production serial
3.10 number T1751, PIN (P8/P9) before T1751 is
reserved.
Added parameter Pr642 synchronous
12.2.1
tolerance.
Added Pr617 origin search setting bit 2 homing
12.6.1
mode of rotation axis.
12.6.1 Added home mode 7.
12.9.1 Added open auxiliary input window.
12.14.1 Modified details of RIO setting.

January, 2018 V3.0 All NC_ _EM series updated to NC30E (H) series.
3.1 Updated system interface and connector
1
Update History Milling Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual
Release Date Version Chapter Revision contents

descriptions.
Updated text and added relay type
3.11
(NC-EIO-R2010).
12.6.1 Added description for origin search mode 6.
June, 2017 V2.0 Modified wiring diagram for local I/O connector
3.12
(external power).
May, 2017 V1.0
For relevant information about [Delta CNC Milling Machine Solution - Operation and
Maintenance Manual], please refer to:
(1) Delta CNC Milling Machine Solution Instruction Programming Manal
(2) Delta CNC NC System Solution MLC Application Manual

DELTA IA-CNC Milling Application OM MM en 20210630

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DELTA IA-CNC Milling Application OM MM en 20210630

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

DELTA IA-CNC Milling Application OM MM en 20210630

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Delta CNC Milling Machine Solution Operation and Maintenance Manual

Industrial Automation Headquarters

Delta CNC Milling Machine

Russia: Delta Energy System LLC

DELTA_IA-CNC_Milling application_OM_MM_EN_20210630 www.deltaww.com

This manual includes:

NC controller product features:

How to use this manual:

Delta technical services:

Warning. May cause moderate injury to personnel, or lead to severe damage or

Absolute prohibited activities. May cause serious damage or even malfunction of

Precautions for installation

 Follow the installation instructions in the manual, or it may result in damage to

Precautions for wiring

Precautions for operation

Wiring of Communication Circuit

4 Table of Group Function

5 Introduction to NC System Modes

6 Position (POS) Group

7 Program (PRG) Group

8 Offset (OFS) Group

9 Diagnosis (DGN) Group

10 Alarm (ALM) Group

11 Graph (GRA) Group

12 Parameter (PAR) Group

13 Software (SOFT) Group

How to check controlled devices

14 MLC Special M Relay and Special D Register

1.1 Product inspection ·············································································1-2

1.1 Product inspection

1.2 A series product model explanation

NC series controller (MOP integrated)

No. Item Description

OPENCNC series controller

1.3 Product interface of A series NC controller

No. Item No. Item

(2) Machine operation panel A

(3) USB port

(4) Function keys

(2) Machine operation panel A

(3) USB port

(4) Function keys

(2) Machine operation panel A

(3) USB port

(4) Function keys

No. Item No. Item

(1) Screen (6) USB port

(2) Machine operation panel A (7) Function keys

(3) CYCLE START (8) Power On

(4) FEED HOLD (9) Emergency stop

(5) Machine operation panel B (10) Power Off

No. Item No. Item

1.4 B series product model explanation

NC series controller (MOP integrated)

No. Item Description

OPENCNC series controller

No. Item Description

1.5 Product interface of B series NC controller

No. Item No. Item

(1) Screen (6) USB port